AUTOMATED HAIR ISOLATION AND PROCESSING SYSTEM

Abstract: This invention is a device that when run through hair on the human head isolates hairs in groups of one or relatively few. Once hairs are isolated in separate areas, they are then processed in various ways, usually to beautify them, that would not be possible it they were not isolated. These beautification processes are, not limited to, but include attaching one or a very few hair extensions to one or a very few scalp hairs, reshaping the cross-sectional diameters of individual scalp hairs, automating a precise haircutting process which cuts small groups of hairs to carefully controlled-lengths, applying hair colorants including those that work best if only applied to one or a very few hairs at a time, applying hair permanent curling chemicals to hair followed by a protective coating that prevents escape of said chemicals and acts as a fixation means holding hairs in place during chemical processing so that other fixation means such as hair curlers don't have to be used. In order to aid the entrance of hairs into the isolation processing system, a mechanism referred to as a tensioning hair straightener is described. It allows hairs to stand in a more perpendicular manner relative to the scalp during processing. Also, various means of preventing hairs from building up in front of a processing system which is advancing over the scalp are discussed. For the hair extension attachment embodiment, a system for the removal of attached hairs from the scalp and recycling them so that they can be reattached to the scalp is discussed. Finally, means of manufacturing artificial hair extensions that look and behave like real human hairs and putting them into cartridges that can be used by the attachment system are discussed.

Description: Title: Automated Hair Isolation and Processing System Description TECHNICAL FIELD The technical field of this invention is the hair-care industry. Specifically, the industry responsible for beautification of hair on the human head. BACKGROUND ART This invention relates to an electro-mechanical system that can automatically isolate individual head hairs and mechanically process them in isolation so as to beautify them. For example, by attaching one or a very few hair extensions to one or a very few scalp hairs. Conventional attempts to improve the beauty of hair fall generally into two categories, indirect and direct. Indirect attempts do not try to directly change the physical structure of the hair on the head. Indirect attempts include liquids applied to the hair such as shampoos, conditioners, and chemical treatments They also include various vitamins and drugs intended to prevent balding or improve the quality of hair The chief problem with such attempts is that they are greatly dependent on the starting quality of a person's hair They can nudge the appearance of a person's hair in the right direction, however, they cannot arbitrarily give any person the precise type of hair he desires. Direct attempts include wigs.toupees, and a form of hair extension known as a hair weave You may visualize a weave as the functional-equivalent of a wig cut up into thin strips several inches long each strip to be individually applied to the scalp. Such direct attempts can give any person the precise type of hair he desires regardless of the type of hair he started out with A balding person with little or no hair might use such products Likewise, a person whose hair is adequately thick but has an unattractively coarse texture might use such products to hide or dilute the appearance of their own natural hair. However, conventional direct attempts have many great disadvantages They generally give the wearer the feeling of wearing a rug on his head because they are composed of thousands of hairs held together as a unit When attaching thousands of hairs as a unit, bulky unnatural pieces of backing material must be used to connect them together. Although a few practioners around the world make an effort to achieve natural results by attaching ten hair extensions or less at a time, such efforts are performed on a small scale manually Thus, such efforts are extremely expensive in time and money and can only be used to cover a very small portion of the head. We know of no automated on-head system that can attach hair extensions in this manner Although the embodiment of this invention described in the greatest detail, herein, is for automated attachment of hair extensions, a variant of it makes possible highly precise automated haircutting. There are automated haircutting devices in the prior art However, the most similar one we know of is only capable of cutting the hair one length before user interaction is required. This device consists of a relatively conventional electric hair trimmer mounted in a bracket that holds said trimmer portion a fixed height over the scalp while at the same time supplying a vacuum source above said trimmer portion. The vacuum source both holds hairs straight upward so that they all get cut at the same length and carries away hair trimmings. The problem with this system is that it produces a haircut in which every hair on the head is cut to the same length, unlike most professional haircuts which have many lengths, and this length is limited to a maximum far below that required for most womens' hairstyles. My hair-isolation based system will not have these limitations. It can cut hairs to different lengths at different positions on the head, as professional hairstylist would by hand. Also, it can be used in highly precise application of conventional hair-salon preparations including permanent curling formulas, hair relaxing formulas and colorants. DISCLOSURE OF INVENTION Automated isolation of one or a very few scalp hairs as a group, opens up many hair beautification opportunities that simply are not feasible otherwise This invention, an electro-mechanical device, automatically isolates individual head hairs and mechanically processes them in isolation so as to beautify the hair on a person's head When I speak of processing individual hairs in isolation, I am referring to one of several mechanical processes The first is to isolate single hairs growing from a person's scalp and then to bind one or a very few cosmetic hair extension to them Said hair extensions are bound idealy to the sides of scalp hairs in a position near but not touching the scalp Said hair-to-hair binding uses a means that is virtually invisible to the eye and imperceptible to the touch Most preferably, this binding only occurs between a single scalp hair and one or a very few cosmetic hair extensions. Ideally, the binding does not occur between two or more scalp hairs, nor are the hair extensions bound directly to the scalp. A second way or processing individual hairs in isolation is to reshape their cross-sectional shapes or diameters. This reshaping is desirable because the perceived aggregate texture of a hairstyle depends both on the cross-sectional shape and diameter of each hair. Once individual scalp hairs are isolated in surrounding structures or orifices, they can be processed so as to change their cross-sectional shape and diameter by being drawn through said surrounding structures. Hair isolation also makes possible application of coloring agents to groups of one or a very few hairs at a time. This is desirable for, at least, two reasons. First, natural hair color is made up of slighly different colored hair strands. Conventional color- application attempts, however, often make the hair appear unnaturally the same color all over. Thus, controlled application of colors to specific isolated hairs is a way of countering this. Second, application of colorants to individual hairs makes possible the use of types of colorants that couldn't be applied to all the hair at once. For example, opaque colorants functionally equivalent to opaque printing inks couldn't be applied to all of the hairs on the head at once. This is because the adhesive binder that is necessary to hold the opaque pigments is so sticky that it would stick many hairs together if applied to them a consolidated group. However, such pigments might be feasibly applied to very limited numbers of hairs in isolation. Additionally, isolated application of other coatings used for hair-care can be applied is the manner, such as hair permanent curling and waving solutions, hair relaxers, and hair conventional hair colorants. The central processing mechanism of this system takes on a configuration, in many ways, very similar to the front of an electric hair trimmer. This is to say that it has a comb-like structure externally resembling that of an electric hair trimmer, and is run through the hair in a manner similar to an electric hair trimmer. Like an electric hair trimmer, it has open channels, between the tines of its comb-like structure, which allow hairs to move between them. Also like an electric hair trimmer, it is composed of several layers that can slide relative to each other, and in doing so, narrow the hair holding channels in places. In the case of the electric hair trimmer, this channel- narrowing results in hairs within said channels being cut. In the case of my invention, this channel-narrowing results in individual hairs being isolated and then processed in various ways. Although electric hair trimmers are usually composed of only two superimposed comb-like structures sliding relative to each other. My device might have twenty or more comb-like layers superimposed on each other, each slightly different in structure and functiion from the one below it, some moving other remaining stationary. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS The drawings are labeld in a modular manner such that a series of letters is unique to those figures that begin with the same integer. BEST MODES OF CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Since this inventon is not a mere improvement over a similar prior art device but .rather, an entirely new device, I am not going to be able reference a similar device and merely cite the improvements that consttute my inventon. Instead, I am going to pick one emodiment of it a recite its physical structures in great detail. The emodiment I will pick to do this is used for the attachment of one or a very few hair extensions to one or a very few hairs growing out of the scalp. I will now present an explanaton of the physical structures of my inventon and how they are intended to interact with each other. No doubt you've seen electπc hair tnmmers. You know the type that barbers buzz mens heads with to give them a crew cut. The attachment device I will be describing to you is run through the hair in much the same way that such an eletπc hair tπmmer is. If you've ever looked at an electπc hair tπmmer, you may have notced that the cutting blades seem to be a hybrid between scissors and a comb. A comb because the cutting blades have a fork configuraton and between each two fork tnes there is a empty channel space where hairs can enter. Scissors because the cutting blades are composed of two sharp layers stacked on top of each other that osciallate relatve to each other. These osciallatons narrow the hair channels causing the hairs in them to be cut. Just as an elecrtc hair tnmmer has comb-like channels through which hairs can flow so too does my hair attacher. Just as an electπc hair tnmmer has layers that oscillate relatve to each other so too does by hair attacher. Of course, my hair attacher has many more oscillating layers than a hair tπmmer does. In fact, this embodiment has about twenty layers stacked on top of each other. Each layer is slightly different from the one below it. Some layers oscillate back and forth others donl. But generally the layers are based around a tned-comb-like design that has hair channels that allow hairs to flow through them. The most complex and challenging part of my inventon to understand is this stack of about twenty layers. In general, I call this stack the processing circuit stack because it guides hairs through a planned path duπng the isolaton and hair extension attachment processing. Depending on the context I may also call it similar names like the attachment circuit stack, the attachment stack, the attacher stack, the attacher, and the processing stack. In the case of the trst embodiment, I will descπbe a system whose goal is hair extension attachment, I will call this stack the attachment circuit stack because it guides hairs through a planned path duπng the process of hair-extension attachment. For short, I may refer to it either as the attachment stack or attachment circuit. In order to better understand the attachment circuit, I encourage you to think of a conventonal electπc hair tnmmer as I descnbe it to you. Remember, the attchment circuit is very analogous to the moving metal cutting-combs of an electric hair tπmmer. I will now begin descnbing each level of the attachment circuit of the first embodiment The attachment circuit is composed of many, most likely metal, layers stacked on top of each other Each layer has a slighty different purpose, and as such a slighty different cross-sectonal shape, from the layer below it. I will start descnbing the lowest level of the attachment circuit and work my way up. In other words, if the attachment circuit stack were a building, I would start at the ground floor and go up one floor at a tme. After descnbing the levels separately in their bottom-to-top stacking order, I will descnbe schematcally how these layers work together. In otherwords, I will tell you when and where these layers perform their functions relative one and other. However, that's something I going to do much later. In the following explanaton, each layer's functon will be desπbed mdependenty of the others. Don't worry if you don't fully appencate the significance of an isolated layer duπng the following explanation. I'll explain how the layers function together later. When imagining the attachment circuit moving over the scalp, assume that the hairs are standing straight up like a crop of com facing an oncoming harvester. The device that causes these hairs to stand straight up will be discussed later. Description of the Attachment Circuit Stack's Individual Parts The Statonary Hair Channel Levels Refemng to FIG. 1 , we see the lowest level of the attachment circuit stack, shown all by itself from an elevaton view. It pnmanly has two functons. One is to serve as a protective floor layer for the higher levels in the stack The other is to serve as a path through which scalp hairs can move. Refemng to FIG. 1.1 which is a plan top view with only the front portions enlarged, notice the tunneling tπangular tine fronts A at the front of this layer They gather hairs together in order to bπng them to the area where they will be attached. Although the actual attachment process occurs at higher levels, it occurs directly above the area F How attachment occurs and where the loose hair extensions that are to be attached come from will be discussed later. For now, just realize that once attached, each hair is forced to the πght, along arrow B, such that it makes it past the comer and then it moves backwards through the exit channel G, along anow C, towards the connectivity bπdge D at the back of the exit channel. If this were an electπc hair tπmmer, the top of the hair would simply be cut off and we wouldn't have to worry about how hairs get under the connectvity-bπdge D at the back of the exit channel. I call D a connectivity-bπdge because it holds all the tines together. Since this is not a hair tπmmer, some attempt has to be made to bend the hair tops under the connectvity-bπdge at a rate fast enough to keep the exit channel G from overfilling with hairs. If overfill was to occur, the hairs which started standing up relatively straight and perpendicular to the scalp, like rows of standing com, would be pushed flat and parallel to the scalp back through their entire path, even in the attachment area F. The system would not function properly with hairs lying on their sides in such a manner. Thus, a bend-under connectvity-bπdge system is used. It is the goal of this system to bend the tops of hairs under the connβctvity-bπdge D at a faster rate than hairs can build up in front of the connectivity bπdge in exit channel G Rθferπng to FIG.2, we see a elevated drawing of a bend-under belt system. Notice that a hair channel which the hairs move through is shown as a wire-frame. The portion A of the drawing is the exit channel. The portion B is the tunneling front-most portion of the hair channel Refemng to FIG.2.2, we see an elevated view of the bend-under belt system shown in isolation. Notce how it has a funnel shape F at its front that helps gather hairs into it. The trailing portion of is the trailing portion of the system that helps convey hairs farther backwards. In Fig 2.1 , is a different elvated view from the left side. The lines C represent hairs growing out of the scalp D. The scalp stands still below, but the system is moved through the hair. Thus, the relative movement of the hair itself is from the front to the back of the system in the direction of the anow H, shown behind the rear end of the exit channel. Because the system doesn't cut the tops of these hairs like a hair tnmmer does, the hairs run into a dead end where they meet up with the tine connectivity bπdge G. Left to their own, the hairs would start piling up in the exit channel A, until it would get so backed up with hairs that the hairs were forced to lie down flat, parallel to the scalp and likely pointing towards the funneling front-most portion B. To overcome this, the bend-under belt system E in FIG.2, is configured as two belts which converge on each other and simulateously help funnel hairs to their convergence F at which point they are pinched and pulled back by the belts One belt is moving counterclockwise, the one clockwise; the net effect is linear motion applied to the hairs pinched between the two belts in the direction of arrow H The belts bend the tops of the hairs under the connectvy bπdge G, which forms a dead end in front of it Since the hairs are attached to the scalp, their bottoms cant move. Consequenty, as the tops of the hairs are moved by the belts, they are increasingly pulled out of the belts untl finally the belts drop the hairs, as illustrated by seπes of hairs C shown in FIG. 2.1 Also, something to keep in mind is that the belts are running relatively fast in compaπsion to the speed that the attacher is being combed through the hair As such, hairs donl get a chance to build up in the exit channel in front of its dead end. FIG.2.2 shows the bend-under belt assembly alone from a left side elevated view In FIGS 2-2.2, 1 just showed two bend-under belts floating in space, later I'll descnbe how these belts are supported relative to each other Although in these drawings the belt portons of the system wrap around the front tunneling portion F, in practice, said funneling portion may have belts wrapped around it or not. If not, it would just serve as a passive guide to funnel hairs to the moving belt portons behend it. Also note, in these drawings one bend-under-belt pair is shown per hair channel. In practice, several hair channels might share a single belt pair This would mean that the hairs might be bent under not the very back connectvity-bπdge portion of the channel, but instead, the lateral sides or tne portons. Return you attention to FIG. 1 , which is the lowest level in the system. Now that I e explained how hair flows through this level, I want to draw your attention to one more detail. Look at these four holes E A bolt can be run through each and used to line this level up with the levels above, which also have holes. FIG.3 is the next highest level It is the second level in the stack and is the level of the liquid-polymer-nozzle walls. This polymer is used to form the plastc attachment beads that hold the hair extensions to the scalp hairs. This level has channels A that the liquid polymer flows through to reach the nozzles B. Functonally, these channels B are equivalent to pipes or syπnge needles. Notice how they can share a single fluid input line because each individual tine branch is connected by a manifold G at the back of the attachment stack. In FIG.4, an individual set of nozzles is shown from front elevation. Notice their position relative to the hair channel D, and the similaπty between this drawing and FIG 3. In FIG.4, we are not so much concerned with the path the hairs take through the hair channel. Instead, notice the very ends of the polymer channels narrow to form nozzles C. Like a syπnge needle, the liquid polymer cant escape from these nozzle unless it is put under a certain amount of pressure. By deliveπng this pressure in bursts, individual polymer droplets B can be squeezed out that will fly towards each scalp hair-hair extension pair A held before said nozzles so as to form a liquid bead around said hair pairs. There are four total hairs shown in this drawing There are two pairs A each with a single scalp hair and a single hair extension. In FIG.5 an individual set of nozzles is shown from a back elevation, the two liquid plastic attachment beads A are shown after being applied to the hairs by the nozzles Each bead is surrounding one scalp hair and one hair extension How these beads are hardened into solid plastic will be discussed later because this is the function of another level located directly above Now back to FIG.3, recall that this is the second level in the stacking order. Other than the nozzle portion, notice how this layer remains similar to level 1 , as shown in FIG 1 This is because the hair pathway must remain open at this cross-section also. In FIG.3, we see a second difference from level 1 is the additional channel C. Whereas, the scalp hair enters from the directon of arrow D, loose hair extensions enter from the direction of arrow E . They meet in the middle, which is the attachment area F, shown here encircled by an oval. This additonal open area C, called the hair extension tp trench, helps form the pathway that the hair extensions flow through. Level one, as shown in FIG. 1 , is not open in the corresponding area because it serves as a floor which protects the tps of said loose hair extensions from rubbing against the scalp. The third level is shown in FIG 6 and is almost identcal to level 1 , as shown in FIG. 1 Whereas level one, serves as the floor of the channel that supplies the nozzles with liquid adhesive polymer, level three in FIG.6 serves as the ceiling to the polymer channel to prevent leakage from the top of the channel After all, a pipe must be closed on all sides to carry a liquid. Another difference from level 1 is that this level has an opening A that helps form a pathway for the hair extensions. Also, notce the single circular hole B at the very back of this layer It serves as an opening for the fluid polymer input line to plug into the underlying polymer channels. Once you understand how level two serves as a pipeline to carry liquid polymer, then understanding level 4 in FIG 7 is easy. It is merely a passageway to carry the ultraviolet light which will be used to solidify the liquid polymer bead. Unlike a liquid which can be transported by an empty pipe, U.V. light must be earned on the inside of channels formed out of glass or another transparent mateπal A. In otherwords, fiberoptcs or specially shaped glass pπsms that take advantage of the pnnαpal of total internal reflection. FIG. 8 is a back elevation of such an optical system. Technically, the fork-like portion A is a solid pπsm of glass, not fiberoptics. However, for flexiblity, fiber optic cables C interface with the solid pπsm at this point B at the back. The flexible fiber optcs are used as a "light- hose" which bπngs light from its source several feet away Return your attention to level four as shown in FIG.7 This layer is used to hold in place these specially shaped glass light channels For simplicity, the glass channels are depicted as coming to nozzle-like points B. In actuality, the ends of these glass channels should be designed such that they best focus light on the polymer bead in front of them. Thus, the actual design of this light pathway will have to be refined by an optcal engineer using computer software that predicts the movement of light through fiberoptcs and specially shaped glass pnsms. The optcal designer's goal will be to focus U.V. light on the attachment beads, which are in the attachment areas C. Understand that the areas that surround this glass pπsm A are made of metal or whatever mateπal the levels of the attachment circuit stack are made. The glass pπsm A is most likely manufactured separately and then placed in an empty pathway carved for it. That is carved into the surronding mateπal of this level To review look at FIG.9, the sphencal objects D are the plastc attachment beads. They were sprayed out as a liquid by the nozzles A Notice the end of the optical channel B where U V. light is directed at the liquid beads to harden them into solid plastic. We havent discussed this part C yet. This same part is shown in isolation in FIG 10 and called the pmcher. FIG. 10 is tie pmcher. It moves to hold the hairs together up against the wall where the nozzles and U.V. outputs are. Whenever a part is referred to as the pmcher, it should be assumed to be this part, unless the context suggests otherwise. We'll discuss it more later. For now, notice how the pincher C, as shown in FIG. 9, surrounds the polymer beads D duπng their application and hardening. By pressing the notches of said pmcher up againt the channel wall, where the nozzles are, chambers which I will refer to as attachment chambers are formed. FIG. 11 is level five. It serves as a protective top layer over the optcal channels of level 4 In otherwords, it sandwiches the glass pπsm of level 4 from the top. FIG. 12 is level six and is the sensor layer. Electπc currents or light will be run across a gaps in the channels between two specific points on each hair pathway. For example, gapA between two pairs of electπcal contacts C If there is a scalp hair between these specific points, then the electπc cunent or light will be disturbed in a different way than if there is not. This will allow for the detection of when a scalp hair is going to be enteπng the attachment chambers. Remeber, the attachment chambers are position in front of the nozzles at B. If a scalp hair is not going to be enteπng one of the attachment chambers, then, ideally, that attachment chamber's polymer nozzle should not be fired This will prevent the hair extensions released into the attachment chambers without matching scalp hairs to remain unused and unspoiled with adhesive polymer However, this ideal scenaπo involving individual control of polymer nozzles may or may not be implemented in practce If the sensor layer in FIG 1 uses electπcity, it should be coated with some kind of insulator such as Teflon such that it isnt shorted out by coming into direct contact with an adjacent metal layer. If it uses light, the optcal pathways of this layer should be coated with a mateπal less optically dense than themselves. The back of this sensor layer, shown enlarged from elevaton in FIG 12.1 has contacts C which interface with either electπc wires or fiber optc cables. These contacts should not be coated. NOTE. The sensor currents could be run across the meteπng areas of a channel If this is your first tme reading this, you wont understand what the metenng areas are yet. To understand the significance of the meteπng areas, you first have understand tie functions of the hair handling tines which lie in higher levels and will be descnbed and later. The next higher level is level seven and has the configuration as shown in FIG. 11 This level's pnmary job is to protect the plastic coated sensor layer below it from the repeated rubbing of the hair handling tines immediately above. Remember, we haven . discussed the hair handling tines yet, but they're πght above this layer moving back and forth, rubbing on it. Also, since this is the non-moving level that directiy underlies most of the moving hair handling tines, it can be thought of as working with the hair handling tines to help position the hairs while theyre being isolated and positoned in the attachment chambers. The next highest levels (levels eight-fourteen) are where the moving hair handling tnes reside. The hair handling tnes are used in isolatng out hairs and positoning them in place duπng attachment. And once attachment has occurred, the hair handling tnes are used to facilitate the attached hairs' exit. I call these moving layers the hair handling tnes because they handle hairs and have a fork-like shape composed of tines. For short, I call the hair handling tines the hair handlers. SCHEMATIC PENCILS Before we discuss the details of the hair handlers, I'd like to draw your attenton to this seπes of diagrams shown in FIG 14. In step 1 , we've got five hoπzontal pencils. These hoπzontal pencils are being pushed against a block by spπng A. In step 2, we see that a vertical pencil has been brought down into tie honzontal pencils. Since there is only a distance of about one pencil-width between the block B and the vertical pencil, only one hoπzontal pencil can fit between them. The other four hoπzontal pencils are pushed backwards into the spπng A. In step 3, we see the block B being lifted and allowing the one hoπzontal pencil to escape. The remaining hoπzontal pencils are trapped behind the vertical pencil. Consequently, one pencil has been metered out or isolated, and since the spnng continues to push the remaining pencils forward, we can contnue metenng out pencils one at a t e until no more pencils remain. In the context of my invention, the vertical pencil that comes down and pushes the honzontal pencils back will be considered a pushback gate. "Pushback" because it pushes backwards the pencils that it doesn't meter out in front of itself. "Gate" because it controls the flow of pencils by getting in their way. The block B that keeps the front-most hoπzontal pencil from moving away, in steps 1 and 2, will be considered an entrance gate. "Entrance" because it controls whether the pencils behind it are free to enter the next area along their path. Pushback gates and entrance gates work together. In fact, the distance between a pushback gate and an entrance gate can be used to help determine how many pencils (or by analogy hairs) are metered out at one time That area between a pushback gate and an entrance gate is considered the metenng area. The metenng areas are those areas within which the hars are isolated before being processed. Incidientiy, recall that the sensors, in FIG. 1 , that check for the presence of hairs in the metenng areas. Remember, how I said that you didnt really know what a metenng area is. Now you do The area between a pushback gate and entrance gate is the metenng area that they check. Of course, in different emobidments, said sensor might check different points along the channel, even points along the bend-under system. Obviously, I showed you the pencil metenng diagram, in FIG 14, because my device meters out individual hairs in much the same way that these pencils are metered out Of course, you may be wondeπng if hair is too flexible to be metered out this way. The answer is that a hair that is six inches long behaves nothing like a pencil that is six inches long, such a length of hair would flip around uncontrollably. On the other hand, a length of hair thats only one mm long, or less, behaves quite πgidly. Such a short piece of hair can be held in a tweezers and will point straight out not bending in tie slightest. The relavance of a one mm hair's πgidity is that my hair metenng device operates on hair cross-sections whose length is litte more than one mm, often much less. In other words, since the hair handling tnes are made of thin sheets of metal you can stack many layers of them in the thickness of of 1 mm. It is true that these hairs I'm dealing with flip around considerabley past the small aproximately 1 mm deep length of hair where meteπng and manipulaton is performed However, in the following discussion of the hair handling tnes, I want you to only concern yourself with an approximately one mm long length of a hair that behaves much like a πgid pencil. Remember, hair handling tnes are so thin that although they are on different levels, they can be thought of as being on exactty the same level. This is generally true except for level eight which has significant vertical depth. We will discuss that later. Even the very top non- moving level (level seven as shown in FIG. 11 ) which some hair handlers rub against can be thought of as being on exactly the same level as all of the hair handlers. The previous pencil diagram illustrates the use of pushback gates in a conftguraton which forms one metenng area and as such meters out one hair or one group of hairs at a tme Of course, since the head has about 100,000 hairs on it, it is to our advantage to meter out as many hairs as we can at once. Understand that when I say meter out, this implies isolation of a certain number of hairs, ideally isolated individually. Cetainly, if its our ambition to deal with many hairs at once, we can't settle for metenng out large clumps of hair at a time and then attaching hair extensions to these large clumps of hair. Such a strategy, although fast, would reduce the quality of the hairstyle created. Instead, it is my goal to configure the system to have multiple meteπng areas per channel. Each metenng area capable of isolatng one or a very few hairs in itself. As such, I will present a system that has two meteπng areas per channel However, in practice, the number of meteπng areas per channel could easily be increased beyond two FIG. 15 shows shows the pencil metenng system modified such that there are, not one, but two metenng areas. Rather than just having one vertical pencil descend as a pushback gate, we can use several pencils. In this example, we use three vertical pencils. Notice how there are two metenng areas A and B between these three vertical pencils. You should understand that two of these three vertical pencils behave both as pushback and entrance gates. All three vertical pencils behave as pushback gates because they are all capable of pushing behind themselves the hairs that they do not meter out. However, the front two vertical pencils C and D also serve as entrance gates. This is because they get in front of the hoπzontal pencils that have been metered out and, in doing so, form the front gates of two metenng areas. This is what an enfrance gate does. It prevents hairs from enteπng the next area of the system untl it lets them. However, the very last of the three vertical pencils is a pure pushback gate. All the pencils behind it have been pushed back out of the way and into the spπng E. However, none of the hoπzontal pencils behind it are in metenng areas, so it cant be considered an entrance gate. Although these three vertical pencils act like both pushback gates and sometimes entrance gates, I will refer to such a configuration as a multiple pushback gate. Multiple because it is made up of several pushback gates, not just a single pushback gate as shown in the first pencil diagram FIG. 14. Multiple pushback gates form notches that hold the isolated pencils. These holding notches allow the pushback gates to also serve as transport-forward gates. This is to say they move the pencils, or hairs, forward from their meteπng areas into the attachment area. This forward motion is depicted in the diagram by arrow F. The Moving Hair Hander Tine-Assemblv Levels The levels I'm about to discuss are the moving hair handlers. Most of them slide from side to side others can also slide forward and backward. Regardless of the direction a hair handler moves, in this embodiment, it is moved by cables which are attached to it. For example, FIG. 16 is level eight in the stacking order. It is the next higher level in the stack above the level seven, the highest non-moving level I showed you. In fact, level seven is shown in shaded darkly below level eight in FIG. 16. Level eight is only the lightly shaded layer on top. Level eights front-most portion is capable of moving from side to side, Referπng to FIG. 16.1 an enlarged elevated front view of only the front-most portions of level eight, there are cables A and B attached to the connectivity-bπdge portion of the moving tne-assembly C of level eight. The cable A on the left is capable of pulling it to the left, the cable B on the nght to the πght In either case, it is only the very front piece C that is capable of moving. This rear area D is part of level eight but doesnt move Its only purpose is to remain sandwiched between other levels so as to support the stack. Just as it is the purpose of the second floor of a building to be sandwiched between the first and third. This is true of all the moving hair handler levels. Generally, it is only their front most portions that are moved. In this embodiment, most of the hair handling tnes are thin layers of sheet metal. Level eight, as shown in FIG. 16, is the exception Whereas most of its surface is just a thin sheet of metal, at its tine tips E, it thickens such that it can extend down vertically into the attachment areas of the layers below. Level eights main purpose is to hold scalp hairs and hair extensions in position while they are being attached together It does this by moving sideways from πght to left. It ends its journey pressed up against left wall F of the attachment area. It holds scalp hairs and hair extensions together against this left wall. Remember, this left wall is where the attachment nozzles and U.V. light outputs are located. By pinching scalp hairs and hair extensions between this left wall and itself, level eight holds hairs in position duπng hair extension attachment. In FIG. 17, we see a more detailed look at the shape of the pincher's notches. Notice how there are two notches A. Each notch can form an attachment chamber where one scalp hair and one or more hair extensions can be isolated together. When pinched up against the left wall, these chambers are closed on all four vertical sides such that the hairs cannot escape. In this embodiment, each notch or hair holding chamber has its own corrsponding nozzle on the left wall. In FIG. 17, there are two notched hair holding chambers that correspond to the two nozzles that I showed you earlier Thus, in this system, each channel has two isolated attachment chambers and will apply two attachment beads per channel at a tme Notice the notches are somewhat hollowed out in the middle such that the hairs are grasped at the bottom and top but are not touched by the p cher in the middle. Notice how this allows the liquid polymer attachment beads B to remain untouched by the pmcher. Another thing to notice about the pmcher tips E, as shown in FIG. 16.1 , is that they project to the left more at the top than it does at the bottom. This is because its top is in closer contact with the other hair handling tnes above it. When these other hair handling tnes hand hairs off to the pinchers, we can depend on the hair cross-sections being πght between the middle of the notches at tie very top of the pinchers because that is where the other hair handlers, directly above, have positioned the hairs. And hairs behave rigidly over short lengths. However, the lower portons of the hairs that extend down near the bottom of the attachment chamber are more likely to flip around and not be exacty where we want them Thus, the sloped overhang of the pmcher, as shown enlarged by FIG. 16.2, functons such that the tops of the hairs get pinched the very first and lower points on the hairs get pinched progressively later such that the last point of a hair to get pinched is the lowest point to get pinched. FIG. 18 is a more detailed representation of the pinching acton. It shows the pinchers A and the left wall B getting closer to each other in three progressive steps. Only one isolaton notch of the pmcher is shown. In practice, the pmcher likely has multiple such isolation notchs The pmcher is shown in shaded on the πght; the wall is shown as a wire-frame on the left. Remember that this wall is where the polymer nozzles and U.V. outputs lie. The most important thing to notice about this drawing is that the tops of both the pmcher and its corrsponding position on the wall slant forward. This causes the higher portions of hairs to get pinched first and the lower portions last. This scheme allows for the wayward scalp hair and hair extension tips to be progressively pushed into the center of attachment chamber from top down. One scalp hair and one hair extension is shown in each step. Please note, this means one scalp hair would be attached to the scalp, and thus, it wouldnt truly have a loose tip as shown in this diagram, only each hair extension would. This drawing shows two loose tips to emphasize convergence of the hair and hair extension. In FIG. 19 we see level nine which serves to narrow the entrance A which allows scalp hairs into the attachment area. Level nine is the lighter shaded area, representing a moving tine-assembly. In the background, you can see those underlying layers that make up the hair passageways. Level #9 works with the walls of the underlying passageway B as if they were all one layer. From this top plan view, we can see how this level works with the underlying channel This tne-assembly layer would normally start out not overlapping the hair passageways at all. This allows more than enough width for more than one scalp hair to fit across each passageway. Of course, we only want to allow one scalp hair into each metenng area A at a tme. So the purpose of this nanowmg layer is to be moved out (here from left to πght) over the passageway narrowing it such that only one hair can fit across its width If you'll remember tie pencil diagrams, showing pencils being metered out, you'll recall there was one straight line of pencils. If the pencils, instead, had been stacked several layers deep, then more than one pencil per meteπng area would have been metered out Since we only want to meter out one hair per meteπng area, it is important to narrow the hair pathway to one hair width. Now you may ask, "If a narrowed pathway is what you want, why dont you just make the underlying pathway permenately nanowed so you dont need this moving parf" The reason I'm not doing that is because permanenty nanowmg the pathway to just one hair width is really asking for hairs to get jammed. By allowing the pathway to be narrowed only temporanly, we should be able to prevent hair jamming. Also, notce that the very end C of this narrower actually overhangs the hair channels so much that it doesnt just narrow tie hair channels but it actually closes them off. This is because this portion C of the narrower serves as an entrance gate to the attachment area so that unmβtered hairs dont enter prematurely. I will call this type of hair handler a channel narrowing entrance gate because it both nanows the hair channel and controls entrance into the attachment area. In theory, we could put these functons in two seperate tne-assembhes of hair handlers, here I've put them in one. Finally, notice that only the front of this level is shown. This level is really much longer in back, and has holes through it like the previous layers shown. Many of the following layers will be shown truncated in the same manner. Note: In pencil diagram, FIG. 14, the block B served as an entrance gate that prevented pencils from escaping prematurely before they were metered out. This is what I mean by "entrance gate." FIG.20 shows the next higher level, level ten This level serves to narrow the entrance which allows loose hair extensions into the attachment area If you understand what I just said about narrowing the scalp hair entrance, then you already know how this level works. It's the The Sprinα-Pin Levels: The next five highest levels fifteen through nineteen, shown figs 26-30, should be considered together as a single group This group of levels has two general purposes. First, the back of this set of levels contains spπng-loaded pins whose duty it is to engage the hair clips, which hold the hair extensions. These spnng-loaded pins push these clips forward towards the attachment area. Look at FIGS.26-30. Notice how each of these levels is almost identcal to the others except that we see different cross-sections, such as H, of the darkly shaded part as shown in FIG.27. The cross-sections make up a part called a spπng-pm assembly which is on the inside of these top five levels. Refernng to FIG.26, note that the central front funneling tines A of these levels are shown as unattached and floatng in space. In practice, at least one of these levels would have connectvity bπdges holding these regions together as shown by the second layer E from elevated top view in FIG.34. As such, most of the central front funneling tnes in these layers would not have connectvity bπdges of their own but would be connected vent cally to a layer that does. The reason for this is to prevent the hair extensions from having to bend over a connectivity bπdge at a point too close to their holding clips (to be discussed later), because their bend angle might be too sharp. If we were to take the spπng pins out of the stacked layers which support and hold them, said spnng-pin assemblies would look as they do FIG 31. Notice the spπngs A at the back of each of the four shown spnng-pin assemblies, they push each pin forward. Notce how the shape of the spπng pins corrsponds with darkly shaded cross-sectons shown in FIGS.26-30. Cartπdge & Clip Alone Refernng to FIG. 32, the hair-extension-holdmg clips A are held together in clip-holding cartπdges like B. Each cartπdge has as many clips as the attacher has channels. Each clip should have a spπng-like resilience that allows it to hold hairs in its inteπor by pinching them. This same assembly turned upside down is shown in FIG.32.1 , notice that the clip-holding cartπdge has open slots C on its bottom. (The corrsponding slots on the top of the cartridge are open in the same manner ) Refernng to FIG.32.2, notice that each clip has a wide inteπor D in the front that narrows to a dead end E and then spreads back apart again towards the rear F This dead end can be achieved by simply thickening the inteπor edges of the the clips towards each other or by placing a flexible webbing means there. This dead end, or the flexible flexible webbing composing it, will usually have a funnel shape or V-shape so that ttie very last hairs to be used lie directy in the center of the clip and straight in front of the straightening peg (to be descπbed later). The reason a dead end is helpful is so that that back portions of the clip can help provide spπng force. By doing so, the rearmost hairs in the clip will not be held much tighter than the front most hairs in it. Cartπdge & Pins In FIG. 33, each slot C, and its corresponding slot on the bottom of the clip-holding cartπdge D, is wide enough to allow the vertical portion, or clip-engagement pin A, of a spnng-pin in FIG. 33.1 to stick up through it and mate with the spπng-pm-receiving hole B of its corresponding clip inside said cartπdge. In FIG 33.1 , the isolated spnng-pin and clip off to the side shows how the spπng pins and clips mate inside the cartπdge. This is to say that the pin A is designed to stick though a hole B in the hair extension holding clips. Thus, pin A is a clip- engagement pin This is to say that the pin A you see stckmg up from the top of the attachment stack in FIG.34 is designed to stck though a hole in the hair extension holding clips. Thus, pin portion A is itself a clip-engagement pin. Simplified Aggregate Stack Also in FIG.34, notce the rectangular tabs B that extend up at the very back. These tabs are part of the spπng-pins and can be used to pull them backwards. Remember that since these pins are spπng-loaded, left to their own, they will move forward. These tabs are used to pull the spπng-pins back to a standard contracted position. This standard contracted position, where all pins are pulled to the very back, makes loading and unloading clip cartrdiges possible. This is because all of the spπng-pins are lined up exacty with each other, at the very back of their slots. Note: To save space, the rear slots C, the ones the rectangular tabs move in, have been scaled much shorter than they likely would be. Really, their length would more likely be equal to the forward slots D in front of them, the ones the round clip-engagement pins A move in, because these tabs are connected to and must move the same distance as the clip-engagement pins do. Cartridge with Rubberband As stated before, the spnng-pin receiving holes B of the clips, as in FIG.33.1 , should be lined up with each other before their cartπdge is loaded or unloaded atop of the attachment stack. To see how this can be done, refer to FIG.35. The clip-recieving holes of the clips are lined up by rubber-band A which encircles the cartndge and pushes all of its clips backwards, as far as they will go. Notice how said rubber-band surrounds the cartndge and fits into a groove. Notice the rubber-band fits into hooks B on the clips that the it pulls backwards. Thus, the clips are pulled back as far as they will go so that they are lined up with each other, and the same can be said of the spπng-pins, in the attachment stack (achieved by a mechanism descπbed later). Consequently, the pin-recievmg holes of the clips and the spnng-pm-dip-engagment pins match up perfecty. This makes taking one cartndge off the clip-engagement pins and putting another on easy. Please note, the spπngs of the spπng pins will be strong enough to overcome the rubber-band and push their clips forward despite it. Clip & Peg I told you that levels fifteen through nineteen, shown in FIGS.26-30, have two purposes. I have explained the first purpose, refer to FIG.36 to see the second and FIG.36.1 to see an enlarged front of this level. This second purpose is that the fronts of these levels contain funneling channels A that serve to stabilize the hair extension tips B hanging down from the clips. This way the hairs hang in thin lines waiting to get into the attachment area C. Without these funneling channels, these hair extension tps might flip around from side to side. Perhaps, this side to side movement would lead to hair extension tps hoping from channel to channel or worse yet bunching up before enteπng the attachment area. I call the funneling area A the hair extension hopper It is part of the hair-extension-tp trench and guides and funnels the hair extension tips into narrowed portions of said trench. Each clip may have a straightening peg D behind it that extends vertically through its channel. Notice that the straigtenmg peg D is just slighty thinner than the most nanow portion E of the funneling hair channels of hair extension tip trench Paintbrush Obstacle Scenano 1. To get a better intuitive understanding of what this straightening peg does, imagine guiding the bnstes A, in FIG.37, of a pantbrush down a trench only slighty wider than the brush. You should imagine this trench as having two vertical walls D and E. If you hold only the handle of the paintbrush, then should the bnstes encounter an obstacle B in this trench, its bnstes will bend backwards when you apply enough forward pressure. Scenano 2: In the second scenano shown by FIG.37 1 , imagine the same srtuaton except that you put your finger C down into the trench behind the bnstes of the brush. In this case, you can press the bnstes with all of your strength into the obstacle and they will not bend. The straigtenmg peg serves the same purpose as your finger. FIG.38 illustrates what might happen to the hair extension tps A if there were no straightening peg Notce how the tps curve excessively backward The purpose of the straightening peg is to prevent this. If the tips were allowed to curve excessively backward, the clip B might advance forward without moving the hair extension tps forward with it. Clip & Peg Refernng once again to FIG. 36.1 , the clip is shown with its straightening peg D. Since the tips are kept relatively straight, the hair extension tps can be pushed forward with greater spπng force than they could be otherwise. Spπng Pin Isolated As you can see from FIG.31 , the straightening peg B is part of the spπng-pm system. An altematve approach would be to attach a straigtenmg peg to each clip rather than making it part of the spπng pin Of course, such an approach would be at a disadvantage because each clip would be more complex and difficult to manufature. And since there are more clips, because they are removable, than there are spπng-pins it is best to attach the straightening peg to each spπng-pm, not to each clip. It may be undesirable to extend the straigtenmg pegs down below level fifteen as shown by FIG.26, because if they were any lower, they could come in contact with the fragile hair handling tnes. In fact, in the previous drawings (FIGS.26-30), the straigtenmg peg doesnt extend below level sixteen as shown by FIG.27. In these drawings, portons of straightening pegs are shown as a short segments. In particular, notice the short straighten g-peg segments as illustrated by A in FIG 28. Just as FIG.26 is the layer below FIG 27, FIG.28-30 representa increasingly higher adjacent levels. Notice how the peg segment A in FIG.28 also extends up through the higher levels as shown by FIG.29 & 30. Of course, it is desirable for the spπng-loaded clips to advance the hair tips towards the attachment area but they must not advance faster than the hair extensions in them are used. Refernng to FIG.27.1 , the channel obstruction A helps keep the hair extension clips from advancing faster than the har extensions in them are used. It does this because the har extensions hanging down from the clips are forced up aganst it. This design only allows the spπng-loaded clips to advance when the front-most hairs in them are attached and pulled from the clip by the bend-under system. A second purpose served by sad channel obstruction is to prevent scalp hars from advancing to the point where they actually start pushing the cartndge clips backwards away from the attachment area. Remember, the scalp hairs are coming from the direction of arrow B. As shown in FIG.27 and 27.1 , in this particular embodiment, sad channel obstructon is only placed on level sixteen. It is not placed on the levels above it because this wouldnt give exitng har extensions an area to overhang the channel obstruction without holding the cartndge back. It is not placed under this level because directy beneath is the attachment area, and the hars must have enough clearance above them to bend under channel obstructon A in order to enter the attachment area. You might not completely understand these two concerns now but it will become apparent when I explan exacty how hars flow through the system. The actual placement height and thickness of the channel obstructon A is something that must be calibrated empiπcally duπng prototyping. In other words, when I refer to only placing it on level sixteen that is something specific only to this set of drawings This is not to say that couldnt be placed on more than one level or a different level number so long as the above concerns are taken into account. To Review: Simplified Aggregate Stack FIG.34 is a diagram of the attachment stack. It's simplified in that it doesnt contain every level that the attachment stack would have in practce Instead, to keep things simple, it only shows several representative levels. The following are some overall points about the system: I. The Attachment Stack is Likely Made of Sheets of Metal: A. Most of the levels that I have descπbed are very thin pieces of sheet metal. Some of them have a thickness similar to that of a piece of paper. Of course, since they're composed of metal, they're much stronger and more ngid than paper. The sliding hair handlers are especially thin, except for level eight which has tips that extend vertically downward into the attachment area. The sheets of metal can be shaped into the cross-sections IVe descπbed above using vaπous methods: 1 Photochemical etching- A technology similar to that used in making microchips, only neither as expensive nor accurate. Photoetching involves coatng a sheet of metal with a substance that hardens on exposure to light. A pattern is optcally projected on the surface, and the surface is developed. Those areas on the surface that were exposed to light reman protected after developing. Those areas of the surface that werent exposed to light have only bare metal that is susceptble to chemical etching Thus, shapes can be etched into the metal sheet by exposing it to an acid. Photochemical etching will provide sufficient accuracy to fabπcate most of the layers of this invention. 2. Photoresist electroforming- A highly accurate additive fabπcation method that depends on depositing an electrolyte on an electπcally charged pattern. It can form sheets of metal with features having tolerances of one micron or tighter. This level of accuracy will not be needed for most cross-sections of this invention. Thus, its added expense over photochemical etching is unjustfied for most levels of this machine. However, there maybe a limited number of levels that could benefit from the accuracy of electroforming. 3. Laser cutting- A laser beam can be used to cut metal precisely and accurately. However, laser cutting is generally too slow to use to cut each level from a blank piece of sheet metal for production purposes. Rather, laser cutting should be used to cut tabs off parts produced by photochemical etching or electroforming. 4. Molding- Some parts like the glass optical pnsm fork shown in level four, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, might be manufactured by molding 5 Laser Chemical Vapor Deposition (LCVD)- LCVD is an emerging technology that promises to allow small parts to be formed directiy from the vapor phase by using a laser beam. It promises to be highly accurate but is not a commencally available yet. In vapor phase deposition, a certain cross-sectonal shape is projected using high energy light or electron beams. In the future, it might prove to be an effective means for producing the stack levels. This technology is known to produce extremely pure and extremely strong mateπals. 6. Any other analogous technology can be used to manufacture this invention. The above five examples are only possibilites. II. Holding the Levels of the Stack Together: The above methods descnbe ways of forming patterns for individual cross-sectonal layers However, these individual layers must somehow be attached. There are several ways that this can be done, including but not limited to: A. Bonding with adhesives- This method would use a thin film of adhesive applied between the surfaces of the vaπous levels of the stack. Although a relatively easy method, adhesives are probably not reliable enough for this application. For example, the polymer adhesive this system uses to attach hars together might itself degrade the adhesive. B. Welding- Welding would most likely be done with laser beams. For example, two or more thin layers of metal can be welded together by hitting the surface of one of them with a laser beam. This is probably the most reliable way attaching vaπous levels of the stack to each other It allows for a durable hermetic seal, which is especially useful for forming channels that carry liquid. C. Bolting- Otherwise loose layers can have holes that run through them that allow them to be held together by bolts. Realistically, bolts would probably used in combination with a means such as welding The bolts could be slide through holes E in FIG. 1 and homologous holes through other parallel levels. The hair handlers which need to slide relative to each other will be attached by running a rod through them However, this rod and hair handler assembly will not prevent the layer from sliding relatve to each other Refemng to FIG.39, the bolts N used to hold the layers together may have elongated heads that can be slid through holes in the clip cartπdges B. This will help positon the removable clip cartndges atop the attachment circuit stack. Of course, these elongated clip cartπdge engagement rods N dont have to be bolts running through the entre stack, instead, they could just be attached near the surface. III. Attaching Peripheral Components to the Attachment Stack: The functions of the attachment stack are aided by vaπous external componets attached to it The following is a recitation of how some of these peπpheral components attach: Refernng to FIG.39 we see an elevated front view of an abbreviated hair extension attachment stack, the hair extension clips C are held by the clip cartndge B. The har extension clips C extend from the cartndge and allow the tips har extensions (not shown) which they hold to extend below, perhaps in dangling manner. These har extension tps are guided in individual channels by the funneling areas A, in FIG.36.1. 1 call the areas of these layers that guide and funnel har extensions the har extension hoppers. In FIG.39 and FIG.39.1 , the har hopper levels are represented in abbreviated form by the top two stacked levels A and D. In FIG.39, the cables E slide the har handlers sideways and forward and backward. They lead off to devices that pull on them causing them to move. (I'll say more about this later.) Of course, the hair handlers are at the same levels as their cables. In this embodiment, the layers where the moving har handlers are need not have tunneling fronts, so there is nothing but air space at the fronts of their layers.The moving har handlers are imporant because they move hars around and put them where we want them. In FIG.39 and FIG.39.1 , below the har handlers are the lower stationary hair channel levels where the nozzles reside, represented in abbreviated form by the two lowest stacked levels F. It is in these lower levels where the polymer adhesive is applied to the hairs. In FIG.39.1 we see an elevated back view of the attachment stack, notice the spπng-pm-pullback cable lasso G around the rectangular spnng-pin tabs. This configuraton makes it possible to pull all the spπng pins to the back of the cartπdge, thereby, pulling all the hair extension holding clips to the back of the cartndge in line with each other Refernng to rearview in FIG. 39.1 , hair extension holding clips C are pulled to the very back of their cartndge and lined up with each other. This is achieved simply by pulling the iasso-shaped cable G backwards. In FIG.39, the lasso pulls the spnng-pin tabs K which it surrounds backwards. Simultaneously, this causes the hair extension clips to be pulled backwards. Ideally, this lasso cable leads to an actuator, such as a solenoid, that pulls it backwards when the system's computer tells it to. In FIG.39.1 , notce that the sensor circuits extend to the very back where their contacts are exposed on surface H. This is where the electnc wires or fiber optic cables come in contact with the sensor circuits. A liquid adhesive is used to attach the hars together. The back of level three (in un-abbreviatθd version but the lowest level in FIG.39.1 ) , shown as surface L, is where the liquid adhesive is introduced into the attachment stack. The outline of the manifold pathways M can be seen in FIG.39 1. Really, the liquid adhesive manifold would be concealed under level three in the un-abbreivated veπsion, and only a single adhesive input hole would be seen A hose I carrying the liquid polymer adhesive will be attached to this single hole in level three (un-abreviated veπsion) The liquid adhesive will then be earned sideways and then forward to the attachment nozzles by the manifold pathways M, which really are formed into level two (un-abreviated verision) Acuator Cable Interface with Hair Handlers: Refemng to FIG.40, the sliding har handlers are attached to actuator dπven cables A and B. Remember, the har handlers are thin sheets of metal. An actuator is any device that moves something back and forth. A solenoid is one type of actuator. Before, I descnbe how actuator dπven cables such as A and B, in FIG.40, move only the front portion of a level The front portion, of course, being a hair handler tine-assembly. The issue we will concern ourselves with now is how these cables are attached to the levels that they move without terfeπng with other levels. For example, how the cable attached to one har handler tine-assembly sheet C stays out of the way of the levels above and below it, such as hair handler tine-assembly D below. Since it is expected that these actuator dπven cables will be attached to the top (or bottom) of a sliding har handler tne-assembly, the areas of cable attachment like E will as such be thicker than the rest of the layer to which it is attached. As such, a cable clearance notch F has to be cut in the overlying har handler assembly C above the point of cable attachment E. This is to allow the cable to fit between the two sheets of metal, which compose the har handler fine-assemblies C and D, while at the same time allowing these two sheets of metal to lie surface to surface. These cable clearance notches F will have to be wide enough to allow adequate clearance margins G around the cables as they and the sheets of metal they're attached to move around. Remember, these sliding har handlers not only might move side to side, but some of them also can move forward and backward. As such, the cable clearance notches must be adequately large in order to leave margins like G for movement in several directons between cable attachments like E and edges of clearance notches like F The spacing scheme shown here assumes that the thickness avalable in cable attachment area E will be no greater than the thickness of one tine-assembly level. In other words, we are assuming that the attached cable A is no thicker than the sheet metal of which the sliding hair handler tine-assemblies are made. Thus, cable clearance notches can be just one sheet tine-assebly thick This allows for the cable attachments and cable clearance notches to be alternated between two positions, per har handler tine-assembly side. For example, the left side of these hair handlers will have cable A with notch F above it and a second cable H attached to tine-assembly C at a second cable-attachment position J Of course, if there had been a third har handler tine-assembly stacked above level C, it would have had to have a cable clearance notch over position J. This would allow all cable attachments on this side to be alternated between just two cable-clearance-notch positions. However, if the cable attachments were thicker than one layer of sheet metal, then the clearance notches would have to be made thicker. In other words, they would be made through several layers of sheet metal above them to allow for the clearance of just one attached cable. Should this become necessary, cable attachments would have to be alternated between more than two positons per cable-attachment side. Alternatively, using cable/har handler interface sheets would allow thicker cables to be used while stll altematng attachment notches between just two positons. In such a configuration, the thick solenoid-dπven cables are not attached directy to the sheet metal of the har handlers, but instead, are attached to thin flexible sheets. These thin sheets then go on to attach to the sheet metal of the har handlers. Since these interface sheets are no thicker than one sheet of the har handlers, their clearance notches can be alternated between just two positons, even though the solenoid-dπven cables themselves may be much thicker than just one hair-handler-tine-assembly level. Please note, the cable attachment points could be placed anywhere on a har-handler tine-assembly, including direct attachment to the tines or back of the assembly. The distances the the har handlers slide must be controlled very accurately. Because we are dealing with such small distances, the solenoid-dπven cables themselves are not likely to be accurate enough. In order to achieve accuracy in movement, a movement control rod I will be used. Movement control rods not only keep the sliding layers in place but, also, control their path and distance of movement. For example, tne-assembly D represents level eight which is the the pmcher that moves form side to side pressing hars between its notches up aganst the left wall. By pressing up aganst the edges of this slot K, this control rod I controls how far the tine-assembly moves from side to side. There are some parts that move not only in two directions, but four. Their control rods and slot sides control the paths of their movements in a similar fashion. In FIG. 39, the control rod J is shown relative to the rest of the attachment stack In this embodiment, it runs through the thickness of the entre attachment stack. However, it serves its purpose solely in the levels of the moving har handlers. Numerical Dimensions of the Attachment Stack: I want to make sure you have a good understanding of the size of the attachment stack. The following lists some informaton about its dimensions: -Its about as wide as the head of a razor 1 -1.5 inches (2.54-3.81 cm) and, or perhas, as wide as an electπc har tnmmer which is 1.5-2 inches (3.81-5.08 cm). -Each channel in it is about the width of an electπc har tπmmer's channels, anywhere from .5 to 1.5 mm (.0197-.059 inches). -The attachment stack drawings, which IVe been showing you, are simplified. They only have four channels. In practce, the system would have about 15-25 channels, not just four. -The length the the attachment circuit stack will depend largeriy on how long, the har extension holding clips have to be made. I would expect that stack's length to be between 4-8 inches. -I would estimate that the height of the stack (from its lowest level to its top level where the bottom of the clip cartπdge rests) to be less than 1 inch (2.54 cm). -The above physical dimensions are only guidelines to understanding the first embodiment of the system. However, they should in no way be construed as limitations. Remember, FIG. 39 shows a veπsion of the attachment stack that is simplified, in that it only shows about six representative levels The actual attachment stack would have closer to twenty levels After all, earlier about twenty different levels were descπbed individually. Hair Handler Movement Sequence I have just finished explaining the physical structure of each part of the attachment circuit stack individually. Now, I will explan how the vaπous ha handlers of the attachment circuit stack work together. I will give you a better idea of exactly how and when they move relative to each other. In the following descπption, note that most of the these drawings represent cross-sectional views of the attachment stack. The cross-sections run parallel to the layers of the attachment stack. The har extension cross-sections are represented by shaded circles, and the scalp hair cross-sections by black circles. First Step Series In FIG.41 , we see that the channel narrowing entrance entrance gates F and G, respectively for the scalp hars D and the for the har extensions E, have been moved over to nanow their channels. They will likely make this move exacty at the same time They also serve as entrance gates by preventing hars from prematurely enteπng the attachment area Recall, the purpose of the channel narrowing entrance gates is to temporanly narrow the channel down to one har-width in metenng areas A and B, while preventing the hars from making unauthoπzed entry into the attachment area. Notice the connectivity bπdges C of the har- handlmg-tine assembly Next Step Series In FIG.42, the combination entrance gate/channel narrowers have already been moved over the har channels in the previous step. As such, in this step, they are only shown as outlines. In this step, the pushback gates A, both one for the scalp hars and one for the har extensions, are moved over their channels in order to close a specified number of hairs into their metenng area notches B. Both pushback gates may move exacty at the same time. Notice how each pushback gate has two metenng area notches, each which grabs one har. Now look at FIG.43, it shows what s happening in this step to the hars from the left side of the channel plan view. Notce how we can see the har extension entrance gate A and scalp har entrance gate B. They prevent both the har extensions and scalp hars from enteπng the attachment area C prematurely. Also, notice that that the har extension multiple pushback gates D and the scalp har multiple pushback gates E. The scalp hairs F are being straightened by the tensionmg har straightener G. The hair extensions H are being held by har extension clip I. There is a straightening peg J shown behind the har extensions. The channel obstructon, previously shown as A in FIG.27, is shown here in FIG.43 as K The scalp hars extend upwards from scalp O. The obstruction N represents the forward edge of the floor level of the har extension tip trench. The tip trench is the channel that supplies the hair extensions. Sometmes scalp hars wont get processed untl their follicles have already passed under and past the attachment area, in which case such hairs might have to bend around obstructon N. In FIG.44, this same side view shown in a perspectve view. Notice how the har extensions E are hanging down from the har extension holding clip A Notice the straghtening peg B below the yellow clip. It keeps these har extensions from curving excessively backwards. Device C in front is the tensionmg scalp har straightener. I have not descπbed exacty how it works, for now, just think of it as functionally equivalent to human fingers which pinch the scalp hars F and lift them straght up away from the scalp. The scalp hair straightener ensures that the scalp hairs stand straight up, like rows of com facing an oncoming harvester. The bend-under system D is shown in this drawing. The wire-frame outiine G represents the lowest levels of the har channel pathway of the attachment stack When looking at the side view in FIG.43, keep in mind that the lightly shaded lines represent har extensions H hanging down from where they're held by clip I The har extension ends are loose, so its helpful to think of them behaving much like the bnstes of a pantbrush. This is to say that the clip I holds the hars together much like the metal cπmp of a paintbrush. In fact FIG 45 shows a pantbrush A supeπmposed on the clipped hair extensions with homologous regions of the two aligned. Like pantbrush bnstes, the har extension tps C are free to move about within certain limits. But also like a paintbrush, to a large extent these tips want to point straght downward. Also, notice the straghtening peg D and the darkly shaded channel obstructon You know the obstructon that prevents the har extensions from advancing faster than they're attached The har extension clip, straightening peg, and channel obstructon together functonally serve like the sides of metal paintbrush cπmp B. Since only a limited number of hairs are to be metered out at a tme, the small delicate hair handler gates only let a specified number past them at a tme. If you can imagine yourself manually taking a small straight pin and using it to count out one bπste from a pantbrush at a tme, then you'll have a good mtuitve understanding of how the pushback gates count out har extension tps. In FIG.43, the har extensions are shown by lines H and they move in the directon of arrow M The scalp hars are shown as by lines F and move in the relatve direction of arrow L. The main difference between scalp hairs and har extensions is that the scalp hars are held under tension between the scalp and the straigtener G, but the har extensions H are only held by clip I. For now, think of the tensionmg har straigtener G as two human fingers pinching hairs and pulling them straight up away from the scalp. We will discuss the design of the straigtenter in detail later The scalp hars, in contrast to the har extensions, behave less like pantbrush bnstes and more like little pony tails being held are under tension Once agan, if you can imagine yourself using a straght pin to count out hairs one at a time from a pony tal held under tension, then you II have a good intuitive understanding of what the pushback gates do to the scalp hars Look at FIG 42 By running an electπc cunent or light beam across the channel at each metenng area B, we can ascertain whether or not they have scalp hars in them If they dont have scalp hars in them, then their corrsponding attachment nozzles need not be fired That is to say if there is not a scalp har in a metenng area, then the one nozzle that corresponds to it need not shoot out a bead of adhesive However, this strategy is probably needlessly complex because it requires each nozzle to be mdependenty controlled Most likely the simpler scheme of finng all nozzles in the system at once will be used Next Step Series In the previous step, as shown by FIG 42, neither pushback gates A nor slide out preventon gate C had been moved into the attachment area yet In this step, as illustrated in FIG 46, both the pushback gates and slide-out preventon gate have slid over the attachment area This slide out preventer's purpose is to prevent har extensions (and two a lesser extent scalp hars) from falling out of the open sides of their pushback gate meteπng notches before the pushback gates come to rest lined up with each other The slide out preventer should be moved forward, as shown, into the attachment area slightly before, or at the same time as, the pushback gates are Also in this step, both pushback gates have been moved straght forward in order to carry the hars they had metered out into the attachment area Notce how the two har extensions in the har extension pushback gate s notchs B match up perfecty with the two scalp hars in the scalp hair pushback gate s notchs When pushback gates move hars from the oπgmal meteπng area locaton to the attachment area, they are functioning as transport-forward gates In FIG 47, notice what this step looks like from a left side plan view The har extensions are lined up with the scalp hairs in the attachment area, because both the scalp and har extension pushback gate notches line up Next Step Series Refemng to FIG 48 which is a top plan view, this step begins with the slide out prevention gate being moved back to its orgininal position, so that it no longer blocks the hars from escaping from the open sides of this pushback gate notches Of course, it doesnt need to block them anymore since the pushback gate notches are lined up and, as such, block hars from escaping from each other Look closely, the pushback gates are harder to see because only their outlines are shown, they are not shaded because they do not move in this step The second part that does move in this step is the pmcher A Notce how the pmcher has two notches in it that line up perfectly with the two har holding notches of each of the pushback gates It begins (or at least contnues it journey) from the nght to the left Along its journey it pushes both the har extensions and scalp hars together in front of the left wall of the attachment area Here, they are held still and close togettier in front of the adhesive polymer attachment nozzles in this wall Refer back to FIG 162 in order to see a three-dimensional picture of the pmcher Recall that its top is slanted forward such that it comes in contact with the har extensions near where they are being held by the pushback gates, before the lower portions of the pmcher do The mechanics behind this is illustrated by the seπes of drawings in FIG 18 Since its slanted design pinches the higher portons of the hair extensions first, it lets its lower levels pinch the har extensions progressively later, guiding any wayward lower har portons into alignment with tie notchs above them FIG 49 illustrates the very beginning of this step from the left side In this drawing, the pmcher is on its way but has noj completed its journey to left Notice how the lower portions A of the hars extending below the pushback gates are not completely held together unlike their higher portions B, which are held more closely by the pushback gate notches above the pmcher (Schematically from the SIDE-Second half of step XX only ) In FIG 50, we see the second half of this step from the left side The pmcher has moved farther leftward We can see that the previously wayward har portions A have been brought into alignment with the pushback gate notches B above them Because of the shape of the hair pmcher, it pinches the hars together at a point near B, above the attachment nozzles, and a point near A, below the attachment nozzles Notice how the pmcher chambers are relatively wide in the middle near area C, such that they form empty chambers around the little bundles of pinched har These empty chambers are carved out in order to give the attachment bead room to form around the hars BRAKE ON STRAIGHTENER ACTIVATED IN THIS STEP At this point, there should be something that clamps down on the scalp hars while the attachment beads are being applied so that attachment system cant be moved duπng this tme The part of the system that is most capable of doing this is the tensionmg hair straightener Since we havent discussed the straghtner in detail, just think of it as two human finger capable of pinching hars aid pulling them straight up away from the scalp The straghtner should clamp down before the pmcher has reached its left most positon This will prevent the attachment system from being moved forward in the har untl the attachment beads are in place In essence, the straightener is functoning as a brake Preferrably, the straigtener should brake after pinching together and pulling hairs up, nc_ just after pinching before pulling hairs up This strategy will ensure that duπng the attachment process proper all scalp hars are pulled tght Next Step Series In this step, FIG 51 shows the pmcher A is up aganst the left wall The polymer adhesive nozzles B shoot a burst of liquid polymer at the hars held together and centered in the hollow attachment chambers in front of them The attachment chambers are formed when the p cher notches are pressed up aganst the left wall of the attachment area These dotted line cirlces C represent the liquid attachment polymer surrounding the hars and har extensions In FIG 52, this step is illustrated from the left side Notice these newly formed attachment beads A, shown as black circles Next Step Series In FIG 53, notce the UV optcal pathway B This UV light source hits the liquid polymer beads A with a flash of intense UV light in order to harden them Next Step Series Release Brake, At this point, the straghtner should release its pinch on the scalp hars This will allow the attachment system to advance forward over the scalp Next Step Series Pushout. Weve attached the scalp hairs and hair extension together but we still have to help these attached hars exit the attachment system The following explanaton will explan this step This step is best explaned by using two different drawings Schematically from the TOP-First half of step senes only In FIG 54, the first thing that happens is that entrance gates are slid back over the har channel, blocking entrance to the attachment area, if they hadnt been already Next, the scalp har pushback gates move to the πght, placing them where they are in this drawing n The har-extension pushback gates move to the πght, from where they were in figure 54, to come to rest in line with exit channel C, as shown in FIG.55 Notice that when it moves to the nght, it pushes the hars in its notches to πght also. The pushback gate is functioning as a pushout actuator in this step because it is pushing hars out of the attachment area. Notce how the attached hars B have been pushed so tar to the πght that they are lined up with exit channel C. Schematcally from the SIDE-Both halves of step senes: The left side view of this senes of steps is shown in FIG. 56. Notce how the entrance gates A and B have returned to a position where they block entrance to the attachment area. Also, notice that the scalp-har scalp pushback gates and the pinchers are no longer in contact with the hars, that s why they, e not drawn in this diagram. Only the har extension pushback gate C is stll in contact with the hars. The har extension pushback gate is functoning as a pushout actuator in this step. It pushes the attached hars out of the attachment area to the exit channel. Next Step Series In FIG.57, slighty before the har extension pushback gate ends its tourney to the πght the pullback hook A begins its journey t ed to meet up with the pushed out hars as soon they have moved far enough nght to allow them to be pulled back into the exit channel. This is to say that, ideally, the pullback hook should come into contact with the pushed out hars B slighty before they have completely ended their journey to the πght. Next Step Series Schematcally from the TOP-First half of step senes only: In FIG.58, once the pullback hook A has sunounded the exrting hars B, the har extension pushback gates C are free to move back to the left, to where they are shown in this drawing. Schematically from the TOP-Second half of step senes only: As shown, in FIG. 59, the pushback gate doesnt stop its journey back. It continues straight back away from the attachment area, pulling the exitng hars farther and farther back in the exit channel untl they are engaged by the bend-under system. Once the exrting hars are engaged by the bend-under system, the pullback gate is free to return to its onginal starting positon. Also, notce that the har extension pushback gates have returned to their onginal position. Schematically from the SIDE-Both halves of step senes : FIG. 60 shows the this senes of steps from a left side plan view. The exitng har bundles A are being pulled back in this direction of anow B by the pullback hook C. At the back of the exit channel, the har bundles A will be handed off to the bend-under system, which will contnue this backwards pulling motion of the har bundles A. This allows the pullback hook C to move forward returning to its starting positon. Notice how the attached scalp hars D, shown as black lines, and the attached har extensions E, shown as lighty shaded lines, are being pulled out of the tensionmg har straightener I and har extension clip J, respectively. Since ttie har extensions E are attached to the scalp hars by the attachment beads F, they move with the scalp hairs. If the har extensions were not attached, their tips would most likely bend over the pullback hook C and they would not be pulled from their holding clip. The front edge of har extension channel floor is denoted by G. This same front edge is also shown by H in FIG. 1. Refemng agan to FIG.60, notice how scalp hars H which onginate under this floor G bend around it, even if their higher portons have not been allowed into the attachment area yet. This is fine because the pmcher will tend to push the scalp hars H that underlie the attachment area out of its way. This way these hars will be pushed below or to the side of where the attachment process occurs. Thus, these scalp hars will not interfere with the attachment process but, instead, will wat their turn. Next Step Series RESTART THE CYCLE AGAIN: We can restart the cycle agan even before the pullback hook has returned to its onginal positon or even reached the back of the exit channel. WE DO NOT HAVE TO WAIT FOR THE HOOK TO DO THIS BEFORE STARTING THE NEXT CYCLE. THE NEXT CYCLE CAN START BEFORE THE HOOK FINISHES ITS BUSINESS AND RETURNS TO ITS STARTING POSITION. WHY IS IT POSSIBLE TO BRING ADDTIONAL HAIRS INTO THE ATTACHMENT AREA BEFORE HAIRS FROM THE PAST CYCLES HAVE COMPLETELY CLEARED THE ATTACHMENT SYSTEM? THE ANSWER FOLLOWS. FIG.61 shows the mosty same thing, as FIG. 60, only in perspective view from the πght side The pullback hook is not shown in FIG.61 This is because the exiting hars have already been engaged by the bend-under system, and they no longer need the pullback hook Notce that when the attached har extensions A and attached scalp hars B are pulled backwards, tension causes their lower portons G and H, respectively, to πse up at an angle. And in doing so, the attached scalp hars aid attached har extensions get out of the way of the unattached scalp hairs and unattached har extensions behind them, even before they are entrely pulled from the har straightener E and clip D, respectively. This makes it possible for the spπng-loaded har extension clip D to advance forward pushing its front-most unattached har extensions into the channel obstruction F, even before the attached har extension has completely exited the clip that holds it. Also, notice how the exiting hars A and B have been pulled clear of the the functional areas C of the har handling tnes, so that the har handling tnes are free to meter out, and positon more hars for attachment. For visual clanty in this diagram, no unattached har extensions or scalp hars are shown behind the attached ones. Note: The functional areas of the har handling tines are defined as those specially-shaped areas of the hair handling tnes, usually at their very ends, that actually touch and manipulate the hars and har extensions. Further, in a more abstract sense, the definition of functional area can be extended to the sides of the har channels that actually touch and guide the hars and har extensions. Also, discrete areas with a specific function, such as nozzles, intakes, and dipole ends of a sensor gap, can be considered functional areas. You may be wondeπng if the tops of the attached har extensions and scalp hars A and B, which havent yet cleared their clip D and har straightener channels E, respectively, wont get held up when they press aganst the dead end at t e hair extension channel obstructon F. The answer is no; attached hairs and har extensions will move around the har extension channel obstruction F. To further understand how they move around it, take a look at FIG. 62. Its similar to FIG.61 , only its a close up of the area near the channel obstruction. In FIG.62, the exiting hars and har extensions that are being pulled out of the straightener and clip are under tension and, as such, they do not want to hang straght down, but instead, they want to become more parallel with the clips. In doing so, they are forced to move up at an angle closer to the bottom of the har extension clips. Notce how the exiting har extensions have a bend A that overhangs the har extension channel obstruction B. As such, the exiting hair extensions do not press up aganst the har extension channel obstructon, but instead, overhang it. This leaves the unprocessed har extensions C (two shown) behind, to come in contact with both the channel obstruction B and the har handlers located at the level of E below. Because of this configur aton, the unprocessed har extensions C are free to be pushed forward into the dead end B, which also means theyVe been pushed forward far enough to be engaged by har handlers located at the level of E, such as the pushback gates. Also, notce how a similar process is occurnng with the upper ends of the scalp hars D. A darker-shaded scalp har has been attached to a lighter-shaded har extension and it is pulled around to πght of the channel obstructon B This way the unprocessed scalp hars, such as those two behind, are free to be engaged by the har handlers, even before those ahead of them entrely exit the system. Thus, the cycle is free to start again, even though attached hars and har extensions from previous cycles have rial completely cleared the the system. Recall, the reason we use this har extension channel obstructon B is to prevent the har extension clip F from advancing forward faster than the har extensions C in it are used, and to prevent the scalp hars D from mterfenng with said clip. Also note, that while the attachment adhesive is being applied by the nozzles, the pushback gates would be free to return to the meteπng areas along the channels and isolate more hars at this time This could be made possible by introducing a dedicated pushout actuator, so that the har extension pushback gates dont need to serve this dual purpose. How the Attachment Stack and the Peripheral Structures Connected to it are Supported. A simplified vension of the attachment circuit stack is shown in isolation in FIG 34 However, the attachment stack can't function in complete isolation, as its shown Instead, it must be connected with cables, belts, and wires that support its functons. Also, it ideally should somehow be connected to a handle such that it can be moved over the scalp by a human hand. (Or in a more ambitious embodiment by a mechanical means such as a robotic arm ) Up to this point, I have descπbed the entire attachment circuit stack, and some penpher al structures connected to it Now, I will discuss how these peπpheral structures are themselves supported, and how the attachment stack can be most ideally held by a human hand. In FIG.63, the entre attachment stack is shown as a single object A, its individual layers have been omitted. The first thing that is connected to the attachment stack A is the surrounding gray structure B I've named it the belt buckle because like a man's belt buckle its πgid, planar, and attached to a longer flexible structure. The longer flexible structures that the belt buckle is connected to include cables, wires, and a linear chan of πbs that supports the bend-under belts However, these trailing flexible structures are not shown in FIG.63. They will be discussed later. Notice how the attachment circuit stack A is seated in the center of the belt buckle B To keep t e attachment stack A and belt buckle B together the same bolts C that run though the stack's layers to help hold them together also may run through the floor of the belt buckle in order to secure the stack to it. Notce how the portions of these bolts C directiy above the top of attachment stack have widened collars. You should assume that the bottoms of these bolts are extended through a planar floor in the bottom of the belt buckle and threaded so that nuts (not seen) can be screwed on them. Previously, I mentoned longer flexible structures that extend from the back D of the belt buckle. Although not shown here, the flexible structures all lead to the support base unit. By support base unit, I mean the centralized equipment that provides support service to the hand held attachment system. For example, the type or vacuum cleaner that has a flexible hose leading from a big heavy box, where its motor and bag reside, to a small hand held nozzle could be sad to have a support unit. Of course, the support unit would be tie big heavy box where its motor resides because it provides suction to the handle unit. In a similar manner, the handle held attacher system can be sad to have a support unit. This support unit serves vaπous functons each of which will be descπbed in turn below. Solenoids/Acuators: I have already mentoned that the hair handling tnes are sliding layers that must be moved back and forth The power to slide them back and forth is delivered through cables connected to solenoids or some other form of actuator As discussed earlier, there are multplβ sliding har handlers in the attachment stack, each with at least two attached cables. Two cables because the cables must be grouped in opposing pars that _______ in opposite directons. With this many cables, each attached to its own solenoid or spπng, the cables could easily get entangled with each other if some effort isnt made to isolate them from each other. Manufacturers of bicycle brakes isolate individual brake cables in flexible tubes. Ideally, the inside surfaces of these tubes has a low coeffiecient of friction so that it can guide the cable around bends without generating a great deal of friction The actuator cables used with the attachment stack will also be isolated in tube-like structures whose internal surfaces have a low coefficient of fπcton. However, since there will be many such tubes required, we will use a flexible structure that has the cross-sectons of many tubes parallel to each other such that they form a tube πbbon In order to get the cables into this tube-πbbon, it may be helpful to configure the nbbon as having two snap-together halves. Refe ng to FIG. 64, the two halves A and B of the cable nbbon are shown before they're snaped together around the cables C. FIG.64.1 shows the cable πbbon halves snapped together. This diagram shows just one short length of such a tube-πbbon, but remember, the tube-πbbon is a long and flexible structure made up of many such segment-lengths. FIG.65 shows how two tube-πbbons A can be used to carry actuator cables to the attachment stack. Notice how the actuator cables C and D extend out of their tube πbbons up along the length of the belt buckle at which point they are guided around comers B on the belt buckle and attached to their corresponding sliding har handler layers, in the attachment stack The cables C, which are guided around comers whose curvature lies in a plane parallel to the top surface of the attachment stack, are used to slide the har handling tnes back and forth in a sideways manner. The cables D, which are guided around co ers whose curvature lies in a plane perpendicluar to the top of the attachment stack, are used to slide har handling tnes in a front and back direction Cables and Wires Which Serve As Conductive Pathways: Vaπous types of energy might be conducted along pathways between the support base unit and the attachment stack. For example, ultraviolet light could be conducted along fiber optics in order to supply the attachment stack with the UV it needs to harden the adhesive polymer beads. Either light, which requires fiber optics, or electπcity, which requires conductive wires, must be carried in sensor cirucits in order to detect the presence of hars. Also, if individual polymer adhesive nozzles are configured to operate mdependenty of each other, then the best way to achieve this is to use electπcity to power the ejecton of liquid adhesive beads. The most likely ways electπcity would be used, in this manner, is to cause a vapor burst by heating up a liquid with electπcal resistance or the accuaton of a piezo-electπc device in the nozzle regions. Certanly, in such configuratons, there would have to be many individual wires to form independent electπcal circuits. In the case of deliveπng UV to the polymer hardening system, one bundle of fiber opt cs would be sufficient This is because its fine if all UV outputs are turned on at once FIG. 66 shows an example of such a single fiber optic cable bundle A. Notice how sad bundle interfaces with the back of the UV conductive pnsm B. In FIG. 66, a side of the belt buckle has been made transparent so that the the UV conductive pπsm in its inteπor can be seen. However, in the case of isolated circuits, whether they are for sensors or jet nozzles, many different wires or fiber optic cables will have to be used. At the point where these cables or wires reach ttne attachment stack, they will have to be connected to it at precise points that match the wires up with their corresponding circuits in the attachment stack. FIG.67 shows how this could be done. Multiple cable or wire πbbons A should be connected to a contact card B. The wire or cables attach to the top surface of the contact card. Electncity or light from these wires or cables is conducted ttirough independent conductive patches that run vertically though the contact card. Refernng to FIG.68, the contact card B is shown mated with the matnx of cirucit contacts on surface A which extends from the back of the attachment stack. Notce how the contact card allows all the wires to be attached as a unit to the circuit contacts on the attachment stack Whether optc cables carrying light or wires carrying electncity, the contact card approach should be applicable. Hoses to carry gases and liquids: Refemng to FIG.69, the adhesive liquid polymer is delivered to the attachment stack by hose A which runs from the base unit to a hole in the back of the attachment stack. Assuming individual control of the jet nozzles is either not necessary or achieved by using individual θlectπcal circuits, then only one hose will be needed to carry liquid polymer to the attachment stack. Within the attachment stack, the liquid polymer from this one hose will be distnbuted among the individual polymer nozzles. If individual control of the polymer nozzles is achieved by giving each nozzle its own line whose pressure bursts are generated by a pneumatc means in the base unit, then it would be necessary to lead individual hoses to the attachment stack. These individual hoses would ideally take on a πbbon configuraton and interface with the attacher stack with a contact card configuraton However, individual pneumatc control is probably not the preferred embodiment to use In an embodiment which requires gas or another liquid to be blown or sucked, then further hoses contecting the attachment stack with the base unit will be used. In such an embodiment, additonal levels with hose-receiving holes would extend from the back of the attachment stack in a similar stair-step pattern. Belt Pulley Ribs Support the Bend-Under Belts: Previously, in FIGS. 2-2.2, 1 introduced bend-under belts as a way to prevent hairs from piling up in the attachment system. However, I didnt explan how these belts are supported I will do that now. FIG. 70 shows two bend under belt pars. Each bend under belt par is composed of two opposing belts pinched together and moving in the same linear directon The two belts of each par converge at B where they pinch hars between them and carry those hars with them Although no support structure is shown in FIG. 70, any support structure for such belts should ideally have the following qualities: 1. It should pinch the two belts together. 2. It should hold the belts in a way that they are free to move with very little fπcton. 3. It should hold the belts in a way that they dont fall loose of whatever is holding them. 4. It should neither obstruct the movement of hars earned by the belts nor prevent the hars from falling free of the belt assembly when said hars are pulled from said belt assembly under tension. FIG.71 shows a short segment of a support structure with such qualities. Its made up of joined πbs. I call each πb a pulley-πb. Each πb has got these four cylindeπcal structures A which pinch the two belts together in the middle B of ttie assembly. Notce how this arched shape C has a spπng-like quality that helps pinch the belts together in the middle. This allows the belts to pinch hairs between them and carry the hars. Further, in FIG.71.2, the cylinders A widen near their tips D so as cradle the belts, in a notch J, and prevent t em from escaping. Finally, if you look closely, you'll see that the cylindeπcal objects A have a second cylinder E running through their hollow centers which serves as an axle. This allows the cylinders to act as rollers which convey the belts with very little fπcton Naturally, the inner surface of these rollers and outer surface of their axles should both be made of a low coefficient of fncton mateπal such as Teflon or even employee beaπngs. Refemng to FIG. 71.1 , four of these axles E and the arched shaped spπng means C are molded as one plastc πb F Many of these plastc πbs are joined together as a single molded part by a long flexible rod G This long flexible molded part is attached to or molded as a single part with a portion H of t e belt buckle. In order to hold the belt rollers A, in FIG.71 2 in place, planar parts I (FIGS.71.1 and 71.3) with ideally chamfered holes could be snapped onto the the tapered tips of the axles E under the rollers. Segments such as these should be placed along t e length of the belt assembly to hold its belts in place along its route between the base unit and the attachment stack. The previously descnbed pulley-πb support structure supports the two belts in areas where they are pinched together and parallel, such as along anow A in FIG.70. However, the converging funnel-shaped area B needs a different kind of belt support structure other than the pulley-πb type. The funnel-shaped area needs belt supports that look more like those shown in FIG.72. This support cradles the belt A in its notched shaped area B while it guides it around in a curving funnel shape. WeVe discussed how these components support the belt, but what supports these supports themselves? The answer depends on the point along the length of the belt assembly. For example, in FIG.72, the funnel shaped support D and a few of the pulley-nbs behind it are connected such that they hang down from bottom C of the belt buckle support structure The bottom of the belt buckle is shown as a transparent block C, in this drawing. In FIG. 63 1 , the belt buckle assembly is shown from a left side plan view This object E is the bend-under system assembly. Notce how the bend-under assembly E extends down from the very bottom of belt buckle B. Since the belt buckle is itself πgid, it holds those pulley- nbs attached to its undersurface in a straight inflexible path. However, the belts are most likely dπven by motors in the base unit, which are most likely several feet away. Consequently, the belts should ideally be connected to the base unit in a flexible manner. Thus, the pulley-nbs that pinch the belts together should be attached to each other in a flexible manner where flexiblity is needed. As such, individual pulley-nbs are connected together as shown in FIG. 71. Notice how the individual pulley-nbs are connected at their tops by a fiexbile rod structure G. As a result, the belt assembly is inflexible directly under the belt buckle undersurface H but extends from the belt buckle as a flexible structure that leads to the support base unit. Above, many flexible means of contectng the base unit with the attacher handle unit were descnbed. In FIG.73, many of these things are shown all together. To increase claπty, the attachment stack is invisible in this drawing. However, you should think of everything shown as connectng to or near the attachment stack. In order to consolidate these vaπous hoses.cables, wires and belts, we could run them all though one large flexible enveloping hose A that sunounds them all. This enveloping hose A, is shown as an outiine. Although this drawing only shows one short segment of it, really, it is a long flexible structure very likely several feet long. Either the enveloping hose should reman open with a slit on its underside B, as it shown here, or the bend under belts must reman outside of it until a sufficient distance from attachment stack where the hars earned by the bend-under belts have been dropped. This is to say the scalp hars in the bend-under system should be free of obstructions between themselves and the surface of the human head. In FIG.74 of the base unit, we see enveloping hoses A and B coming in from both the har extension attachment and removal (not discussed yet) units, respecitivly. Also, we can see the vanous flexible lines C including hoses.cables , wires, and belts coming back out of their enveloping hoses and going to the functional areas of the base unit that serve them. The vaπous levels of the base unit represent different functonal areas within it. The structure to πght of the base unit has yet to be discussed For now, |ust realize it is where removed (from the head) har extensions are taken and placed into clip cartπdges held before them on docks. This filling of clip cartπdges is accomplished by a mechanism that moves from one docked cartndge to the next, most likely laterally Handle Structure for the Attachment Stack-Belt Buckle Assembly: Previously, I've desπbed the attachment stack and the belt buckle that supports it, but the belt buckle itself must be held by the user. In FIG.75, a perspective view of the handle unit outer-frame. The handle unit outer-frame may also be refered to as the handle unit or handle although handle unit might also refer to the entire handle unit assembly belt buckle, attachment stack, and all. It is the handle unit that the user will use hold and move the attachment stack assembly through the hair. Notice the lower holes A through the stlts B of the handle unit. The peg F, shown in FIG.63, projects from the belt buckle and inserts into the lower holes A, shown in FIG.75, in order to attach the belt buckle to this handle. This peg- -hole connecton serves as a rotatonal hinge. Ideally, the centers of these pegs should lie along a line that intersects the attachment areas of the attachment stack This will ensure that the attachment areas are held the correct distance above the scalp regardless of t e rotational angle of the belt buckle. Alternatively, the belt buckle might be attached to the handle structure by a flexible yielding means such as spπng rather than a hinge. Ideally, this yielding means would allow the belt buckle to follow the shape of the scalp while keeping ttne attachment area at a relatively constant distance above the scalp. Also, notice these humps C in front of the lower peg connection hole. Their purpose is to push hairs out of the way so said hars dont get caught in the peg-m-hole connection area. Notice the top of the handle unit is a seperate piece. This seperate piece forms a canopy D that can slide on tracks E. Notce that this picture shows a cable loop F delivered inside of a tube G. This cable loop is used to automatically open ttne canopy when changing har extension cartπdges Since the canopy slides forwards to open and backwards to close, it sweeps the long ends of the stored unattached har extensions backwards and out of the way of the user's hands and front of the attachment stack In other embodiments, the canopy might move out of the way rotatonally (especially forward) or simply by being removed Although embodiments that have no protective canopy are a possibility, it is best to make sure the long ends of the unattached har extensions have a concave notch or compartment to reside in that keeps them out of the way of the user's hands and the front of the attachment stack. In FIG.76, the belt buckle is shown attached to tine handle unit Notce that the peg-m-hole connecton A permits the belt buckle to rotate relatve to the handle. However, the belt buckle is prevented from rotatng too far downward past honzontal the by shelves B which project inward from the bottom of the handle under the belt buckle G. Although I stll havent explained how the tensionmg hair straghtner works, FIG 77 shows what its exteπor looks like. Notice how the straghtner has a peg A, similar to the one the belt buckle has. Sad peg will allow it to be rotatonally attached to the handle unit In FIG.76, the straghtner's peg connects to the handle through the second set of holes C that lie above the holes used by the belt buckle to connect. Just as the belt buckle s peg in hole connection allows rotation, so too does the straghtner's. FIG 78 illustrates how both the attachment stack-belt buckle assembly A and the tensionmg har straghtner B rotate to follow the curvature of the scalp C. FIG.78 show relatve positon over flat scalp areas, FIG 78.1 over convex scalp areas, and FIG.78.2 over concave scalp areas. Especially, notce how some part of the straightener always mantans contact with the scalp. This allows the straghtner to grab even hairs that are lying flat on the surface of the scalp and lift them straght up and perpendicular to the scalp, like com in a field. Also, notce that the portons of the belt buckle near the pivot D always remain ttne same height above the scalp although the rearward portons might have a great deal of height variability. FIG.79 shows the entre handle unit being held by a human hand A. Notce the tensionmg har straightener B and the belt buckle assembly C. FIG.79.1 show how the handle unit is held by a human hand and guided over the scalp between the tracks of the track-guide cap D. Scalp Hair Tensioning Straightener. FIG.80 illustrates the tensionmg hair straightener itself. It picks hars A up and, under tension, straightens them away from the scalp. In the plan top view in FIG.80.2, notce that the straghtener has funneling channels. As these funneling areas D narrow, scalp hars A are forced between them into the narrow pathways, as shown by t e anows B. In the perspectve view in FIG.80, once agan, notce how its front encounters the scalp hars A first and funnels them into thin channels The scalp is represented by C. Also, notce how the straghtener is composed of lighty-shaded tines and darker-shaded tnes. The elevated largely front view in FIG. 81 shows only the lighty-shaded tnes alone. In the largely rear view in FIG. 81 1 , we can see that all the lighty-shaded tnes are connected to each other, by a connectvity bndge A at their backs The largely front view in FIG.82 shows only the darker-shaded tnes alone In the largely rear view in FIG. 82.1 , we can see that all of the darker-shaded tines are connected to each other, by two connectivity bπdges A and B at their backs. Thus, in FIG. 80, all the lighty-shaded tines can be moved as a unit while all the darker-shaded tines reman stationary as a unit. The exact actuaton mechanisms that move the tnes is a detail that's not important for this discussion. What is important is the path that the tines are moved along. FIG.80.1 illustrates the movement scheme that is used to get the tines to first pinch and then lift hars up straght. As the arrows indicate, the darker-shaded tnes E reman stll. The lighty-shaded tnes F are moved sequentally along the pathway indicated by the anows #1-4. First, the lighty-shaded tnes F are moved towards the darker-shaded tnes E as the bottom arrow #1 indicates. This narrows the channels and pinchs hars G between the lighty-shaded tnes F and darker-shaded tnes E. In order to lift the hairs, the lighty-shaded tines are rased up along the arrow #2. In order to repeat the process, the lighty-shaded tines must back away from the darker-shaded tines and then lower, as shown by anows #3 and #4. This is a process that occurs repeatedly and rapidly so that hars do not have time to fall back down while the lighty-shaded tnes are backing away and loweπng themselves. Please note, that the tines E themselves neednt move and in this particulr embodiment dont, although in other embodiments both sets might move In this embodiment, since the tnes E dont move, it is they that rest on the scalp. As shown, tnes F might be nested within tnes E so that tnes E never touch the scalp. Altematvely, tnes F at their lowest positions might touch the scalp. Refemng to FIG. 80, the connectvity bπdges H, which hold the straghtener's tnes together, are placed up where they're out of tine way of the lower portons of the hars which are being pulled straght. The connectvity bπdges are a certain height above the scalp. Hars longer than this height will only be pulled straight to the height of the connectvity bπdge, which is all that's necessary. Portions of hars that are longer than the bπdge is high will be forced to bend under the connectvity bndge rather than being pulled straght. This too is acceptable. We dont need each entre har to be straght, only the area near its roots where we're attaching a har extension to it. Also, notce that only the portion I towards the front of the straghtener is low enough to touch the scalp. We only need one point of the straightener to touch the scalp where it can pick up any hars lying flat aganst the scalp. After the hairs have been picked up away from the scalp, they will contnue to be pinched, held, and straightened by trailing portions J of the straightener which neednt touch the scalp. The man reason that the straghtener is so far above the scalp in its back regions is because the attacher circuit stack and its belt buckle must be able to fit under the rear end of the straghtener. Remember, the purpose of this straghtner is to feed the attachment stack with straght hars held under tension. To do this, it has to run in front of the attacher and it will do its job better if it also overhangs the attachment stack so that hars remain straight under tension all the way back untl they're attached. Of course, there are other ways of straightening hars away from the scalp, other than a device exactly like the one shown. For example, a vacuum nozzle could be placed oved ttne hars to suck them straght up. Similarly, air blowing nozzles could be placed near the scalp to blow har straght up. The problem with these other methods is that they're likely to pull the dangling har extension tips upward which is undesirable. Furthermore, hars that are being blown or sucked by air cunents, typically, could not be put under as much tension or held as stable as hars could be by a direct contact mechanical straghtener. Holding hairs under tension is especially crucial for tighty curled har. Also, dont forget that this straghtener might be used to clamp down on hars and prevent forward movement of the attachment system duπng the application tine adhesive polymer beads. Use of a Track-Cap to Guide Overhead Movement Before har extensions are attached or removed, a set of tracks is placed on the head. FIG.83 shows what these tracks look like on the scalp. These tracks might be made out of a πgid plastc that has been custom molded to fit a specific person's head. Alternatively, the tracks could be pre-manufactured in several standard sizes. Notice that these tracks are all attached into a single piece that can be placed on the head like a helmet. Thus, I give such a set of tracks the name track-cap. The tracks are all spaced the same width from each other at all points. Their spacing width is equal to the width of the attachment circuit stack, or its processing swipe width to be more exact. The exact method used to custom form these tracks to the human head isnt important πght now. For now, just know that, if a custom fit is desired, we form a flexible plastc to the contours of a specific person's head and then chemically treat it such that it becomes a πgid plastc that retans its shape. Once this track-cap is formed it can be used many times on the same person. Notice how the areas between the tracks form several rows over the scalp Recall that the attachment circuit stack holds the har extensions it is going to attach in clip cartπdges. The system will likely use one clip cartπdge for every track-row of scalp. This is to say, every tme the attachment stack gets to the end of a track-row, it is picked up off of the scalp and its har-extension cartndge should be near empty so it will be removed, and a new full har extension cartndge will be placed on the attachment stack; the system will be run through the next row of scalp. As shown in FIG.76, because the belt buckle and handle are wider than the attachment stack itself, their width will also be greater the track's width D. For this reason, the vertical portions E of the handle will serve as stilts which lift the outer margins of the belt buckle above the tracks. The tensionmg straightener F should be made to fit precisely between the tracks such that it can fit down between the tracks and touch the scalp. The straghtener should fit snuggly between the tracks so that the fit between the tracks and straghtener guides the entire handle unit over the scalp. Additionally, a snug fit will allow the straghtener to scrape any hairs pressed up aganst the tracks away from them and into it. In practce, the straghtener might be just slighty wider than the inner-surfaces of the tracks. This way it will push the tracks slightly apart allowing any hairs whose roots oπginate under the tracks more direct access to the attachment stack. In other words, such hars will not have to bend around the tracks in order to enter the attachment stack The Hair Extension Remover IVe discussed how the har extensions are attached to the scalp hars by ttne attachment circuit stack. I've discussed how ttne attachment stack is held by a part named that belt buckle which itself is held by a handle. However, once attached, the hair extensions will grow out away from the scalp and need to be removed and re-attached near the scalp agan. I have invented a removal device to perform this function. From here after, I will usually refer to this device as the remover Below, I will descnbe how the remover functons. FIG. 84 is a perspectve drawing of the remover, in isolation Recall, how I descπbed the attachment stack in isolation. That is to say, I descnbed how it worked before showing how it was attached to the belt buckle, a handle, or even any of the cables that supply it with power. I'm going to do the same thing with the remover. The remover, like the attachment stack, will likely be held by a belt buckle which itself will be held by a handle Alternatively, the remover might attached directiy into the handle unit without the ad of a belt-buckle in a similar way that the tensionmg straghtener does. In any case, FIG. 84 in isolation from most structures that surround and support it. For now, j ust know that the structures used to support it and move it through the har are very similar to those used for the attachment stack. The first thing to notice about the remover is that, like attachment stack, it has funneling channels in front Thus, as it is moved through the har, it funnels the hars down into these narrowed passageways or har channels A. Although it is not shown in FIG.84, ideally, the remover has a tensionmg har straightener itself that is in front of and overhangs it. As such, most optimally, the hars that enter the remover are pulled straght up under tension. They're not just flipping around in its hair channels. In order for the remover to detach the har extensions from the scalp hars, in this embodiment, the remover is going to apply a solvent to the hars. This solvent will be applied along the har shafts from a point littie above where we expect the attachment beads to be to a point down near the scalp. However, since the solvent requires several minutes to work, the remover will have to make two passes through the har. The first pass is to apply the solvent. The second pass is to wash the solvent off and carry away the freed hair extensions. First Pass-Application of Solvent: On ttne first pass, pipe B squirts solvent out of nozzle holes C. Alternatively, sad nozzles holes might be configured as a single continuous vertical slit The solvent moves out of the nozzles to the left and gets on the hars that are moving through the narrowed passageways A. Although the solvent might be a liquid, it may be preferable to use a solvent with the viscosity of a gel or semi-solid paste The advantages to using a gel are that it does not evaporate as fast as a liquid and that it stays where it is put it. As such, you can think of the solvent as being applied to the hars in a long flat contnous bead or nbbon, much like what comes out of a caulking gun or toothpaste tube, only flatter. After the solvent bead is applied, the hars encounter bend-under system D, that bend them under the connectvity bπde of the remover. However, unlike the attacher's bend under system, which is ideally placed as close to the scalp as we can get it, the remover's are placed a significant distance above the scalp. More specifically, most optmally, the remover's bend under system is placed above the area where the solvent has been applied to the hairs by nozzles C. This way the bend under system only touches portons of the hars above where the solvent was applied to them. As such, the solvent will not be greaty disturbed. To help contain the solvent and washing fluid, the remover's channels A have walls E ideally higher than any of the nozzles C. Please note, the solvent output might be entrely integrated into these hair chainel walls. They are just shown as seperate in FIG.84 for illustrative purposes. Second Pass-Washing and the Removal of the Har Extensions: After watng several minutes for the solvent to completely dissolve the adhesive that holds the har extensions, the remover will make a second pass. On the second pass, pipe assembly H squirts a washing fluid out of nozzles F, most likely water and a shampoo or detergent. This washing fluid washes the solvent off the hars. As the washing fluid is applied, these square nozzles G vacuum it up before it has a chance to escape and make a mess. Of course, the hars themselves will be pulled towards sad vacuum nozzles G. Since ttie hars are perpendicular to the vacuum nozzles, they wont be sucked into the nozzles but, instead, will just lie flat on the surface of the vacuum nozzles. However, the hars wont stay there for long. Notce how the bend under system D juts out slighty in front of the vacuum nozzles G. Of course, the detached hars will be pulled away by the bend-under system. More specifically, they'll be pulled backwards and under the vacuum nozzles G. Although this happens to both scalp hars hars and har extensions, they meet take a seperate route soon after this point. The scalp hairs, in the remover's bend under belts, take the familiar path descπbed for scalp hars in the attachment system; I will bnefly descnbe this path agan. Refe ng to FIG.2.1 , once engaged by the bend-under belts, the scalp hairs are bent under the connectvity bndge G and, because they're attached to the scalp, dropped. Of course, in this veπsion of the remover, the connectivity-bndge at the back of the channel should be assumed to be the vaccum nozzles G, as shown in FIG.84. However, something else happens to the har extensions. As FIG. 85 shows, since the har extensions A are not attached to the scalp, there's nothing to pull them out of the bend-under belt assembly B. Consequenty, the bend-under belt system pulls said hars under the har channel dead end C and just carnes them away. I'll explain exacty what happens to the carπed-away har extensions later, for now, just know that they're headed for a system thafs going to put them in the har extension clip cartπdges used by the attachment system. In other words, they're recycled. However, in a simpler embodiment, the har extensions could simply be disposed of. Hair Extension Recycling System (Optional . Once removed from the scalp, the har extensions can be recycled and used again. When this happens, the har extensions are transported away and processed through several steps that ready them for reuse. Ultimately, the har extensions will be loaded into the har extension clip cartridges that are used with the attachment system I've explaned how the remover removes hair extensions and transports them away using what I have referred to in the past as bend- under belts In the context of this discussion, we will call the bend-under belts that lead from the remover the first transport belts, because they are the first belts to transport the har extensions away from the remover off to another component of the system The device shown, in FIG.86, is called the hair extension vacuum belt transfer unit. The first transport belts A take the har extensions to this device which transfers sad har extensions to a set of second transfer belts B in a such away that the har extensions are all grabbed at the same distance from their tips. This is to say that when the remover removes hair extensions, we cannot expect the first transport belts A to grab them all at the exact same distance from their tps. Therefore, we use the vacuum belt transfer device to line up the har extension tps and then let a second set of belts B carry the Imed-up hars away. Aligning hair extension tps evenly is important because, when we load the clip cartrdiges for the attachment system, we will want all the har extensions to hang down about the same distance from the clips in order for the har attachment system to functon reliably. The vacuum belt transfer unit works in the following manner First the belt set A which is a first transport belt system, and is likely the tail end of the bend-under belt system that comes from the remover, bπngs har extensions to the vacuum transfer unit. The har extensions C dangle below the first transport belts A and are are pulled through this small slit D in the side of the unit. As such, the lower end of each har extension lags behind and gets slighlty held up at E where slit D dead ends in the lower platform I while the higher tp of the hair does not get caught up untl the slit D dead ends at F in the higher platform. This means the highest tp of har extension C advance farther forward than its lower portions. Also, in the area F where the higher platform dead ends, the first transport belts diverge, so that they stop pinching the har extensions. Consequenty, the belts drop the upper tp G of the har extension C. However, the har extension does not fall downwards because there is a vacuum being applied from above Specifically, the vacuum is introduced through this passage H FIG 86.1 shows an isolated view of the internal platforms levels and their dead-end slits. Thus, as shown in FIG.87, ar is sucked through the vacuum transfer unit in such a way that it takes the paths depicted by arrows A This causes the har extension B which is no longer being pinched by the first transport belt system to be sucked upward tp first. It is very important that the har extension is sucked up tip first, not all at once as a tangled ball or middle first as an inverted U-shape. FIG. 88 is a side plan view of the system that I will use to illustrate why the har extension gets sucked up tp first Because the tp has been released at A and there are air intake openings B encircling the sides of the wall on the same level, the tp is subject to ar flowing past it, as shown by the arrows I. This ar flowing past vacuums the tip upward However, the lower platform level C doesn't have any air intakes and is fairly well sealed off from the ar flow occurnng above it. Furthermore, since the dead end in this lower platform occurs back at D, the lower portion of the har extension is held back in a manner that further shields it from the ar flow of the vacuum. Thus, the lower portion E of the har extension expeπences no direct lift from the vacuum. Only the higher portion J of the har extension gets pulled upwards by the vaccum tp first The lower portion E of the hair extension that lags behind actually acts as somewhat of an anchor that holds relatvely still allowing the vacuum to pull the upper tp straght up under some degree of tension. Of course, as the upper tp of the har extension is pulled up, the lower portons of the har extension are sliding up from below following in sad tip's path The important thing is that the lower portions of the har extension are following in the tp's path The lower portons are not being sucked up ahead or at the same time as the tp. Consequenty, the har extension always points vertically upwards As the tip gets pulled higher and higher, it moves up this passage F Because of the aerodynamics of the system, all tips will move to the center of the passageway F as they are pulled up However, they are not pulled up indefinitely At point G, the movement of the ar cuσents is no longer upwards but switches to hoπzontal This, of course, forces the tp ot ttne har extension to move honzontally into belts H These are the second transport belts Owing to the aerodynamic forces, all hars will be forced to take nearly identcal paths Thus, they will be pulled sideways at the same point, and as such, the second transport belts K will pinch all har extensions at the same distance from their tips FIG 89 shows a top plan view of the vacuum belt transfer system The thing to notce here are the blue funneling shields A in front of the second transport belts B Their purpose is to help funnel the har extensions into the middle of the two pinching second transport belts so that there's no chance that a hair extension will fly off to the side and not get pinched Recall that they har extensions are coming from the directon of anow C Refe ng to FIG 90 which is an off-back perspective view of the unit, notice that there is a vertical slit present at point A, and continous with it is a hoπzontal slit present at point B which continues to become a vertical slit at C These slits are very thin so as not to disrupt the ar flow by allowing great quantties of ar to be sucked in through them, instead of through the designated air intakes D below This slit senes might have a resilient matenal on its edges to act as a seal and further reduce ar intake through it The purpose of this long contnous slit is to give the hanging ends of the har extensions a place where they can exit and stll reman oπented largely vertically downward In contrast, if these slits werent present, the lower portions of the har extensions would be forced to bend to honzontally and be dragged along floor E that underlies the second transport belts H If this were to happen, the trailing har extension tips would get too close to the entrance F of the second transport belts Undesirably, such trailing tips might themselves get vacuumed upwards and pinched by the second transport belts In other words, the same har extension would be pinched twice by the belts This must not happen Only the upper leading tips of har extensions should be pinched by the second transport belts Otherwise, the har extension clips will be loaded improperly To ensure that the trailing tip does not get engaged by the belts, the contnous slit at A,B & C is further extended downward ttirough slit area G on the side of the vacuum transfer units dome In FIG 91 , the purpose of slit A, that goes down the side of the dome, is to pull the lower portons of the har extensions increasingly farther away from the vacuum and pinching belts, which are at B As the leading ends of the har extensions C are moved away by the second transport belts, the trailing ends are forced to follow the dome slit A in order to relieve tension Ideally, this dome slit takes a spiral, rather than straght path, down this side of the dome The purpose for this spiral path is to make it more difficult for the hair extensions to backtrack up the slit under the pull of the vacuum Instead, the trailing tps of the hair extensions are held safely away from the vacuum where they cannot be pulled into the second transport belts Eventually, each hair extension will be pulled entrely from the system, as illustrated by this senes C of har extensions Note. Both the lower platforms with dead ends and exit slit are optonal They are all means of shielding tne trailing portons of the har extension from a vacuum engagement mechanism All that s really required is an assembly of a vacuum and conveyance which flows air over a sad conveyance means, such as belts, and an mital har conveyance means, such as belts, to release the hars in the proximity of sad assembly Optionally, any means which (to some degree) shields the trailing (or relative to descnption only, lower) portions har extensions form air currents while preferentially allowing their leading (or upper) portions greater exposure could be used Finally, engagement mechanisms that use some other har straightening means, like those mentoned in this document, are a possibility For example, a functional equivalent of this system that uses electπcal charges to attract the hars to the second conveyance system is a possibility You should note that there will likely be one vacuum belt transfer unit like this for each bend-under belt pair leading from the remover FIG 84 shows a remover which has three bend-under belt pars, and as such, it will have three vacuum transfer units, each like the one I just finished descnbing However, several first transport belts coming into a vacuum transfer unit with one set of second transport belts is a possibility The bend-under belt pars were renamed the first har extension tranport belts when discussed with reference to the vacuum belt transfer units Of course, the first hair extension transport belts could be supported by the pulley-nb system previously descπbed and illustrated in FIG 71 Such a pulley-πb system allows flexible movement of each belt par it supports This means that the remover handle unit and the vacuum belt transfer unit could be flexibly connected Furtherstill, it is likely desirable that the lower end of each har extension that was bonded to each scalp har is the same end that is bonded agan after recycling For this to occur, the bonded end of each removed har extension must be made the leading end which gets pinched in the vacuum belt transfer unit To make this possible, the har extensions removed from the remover must be flipped upside down before being introduced into the vacuum belt transfer unit The flexible nature of the belt pulley-nb system makes this possible Each flexible belt par is simply twisted 180° along its path from the remover handle unit to the vacuum belt transfer unit Duπng a 180° flip, there is nsk of the har extensions getting tangled with the belts This nsk could be reduced by isolating the regions above the belt from those below by means of planar shelves that that extend outward laterally on both sides of each belt par Ideally, these planar shelves should be independent of the belts but pressed aganst sad belts Sad planar shelves should be supported between the protective sides of the pulley-nbs and should be flexible themselves Another place that the pulley-πb configuraton could be used to achieve flexibility is the second transport belt system Refe ng to FIG 91 , the har extensions C are earned away on the second transport belts D to their next processing station The next processing staton is likely Reversing Clip Filler, which is discussed below Since the Reversing Clip Filler moves from side to side like the head of a dot matπx pπnter, a portion of the second transport belts which leads to it must be made flexible, or at least movable, in order to follow its movement This flexibility can be achieved by using a chain of flexible pulley-nbs like those descnbed earlier Recall, I sad that the bend-under belts that lead from the attacher were made flexible by using a pulley-nb configuraton, and went on to descnbe these pulley-nbs in detail Changing the Hair Extension Clip Cartridges on the Attachment Stack Using the Docks I have explained how the vacuum belt transfer unit readies har extension for reuse in clip cartπdges I will now discuss how these clip cartπdges are held on docks and, from there, loaded onto the attachment stack In FIG 92, we see the attachment system handle unit A turned upside-down over a dock B that holds a hair extension clip cartπdge For visual clanty, the attachment stack, straghtener, and most, but not all, of the belt buckle belt buckle have been made invisible in this drawing In FIG 93 the attachment system handle unit A has been brought farther down over dock B Notice how the attachment handle unit A slides down these pins C These pins align both the attachment handle unit and belt buckle with the dock This is achieved because both the lower portion of the handle unit outer-frame and the belt buckle each have their own par of pin interlock slots E and F, respectvely Notce that although the belt buckle's pin interlock slots F are shown, the belt buckle itself is not Furthermore, as the attachment handle slides down these pins, a switch is tπggered that causes the top canopy D of the attachment handle to slide open This exposes the top of the attachment stack Although the attachment stack is omitted from this drawing, recall that the top of the attachment stack is where the clip cartπdges attach for use Thus, this configuration bπngs the clip cartπdge on the dock in contact with the top of the attachment stack The clip cartπdges are designed to lock onto the top of the attachment stack Perhaps, the clip cartπdges will be made magnetic so that they are attracted to the metallic attachment stack How ever it is done, the clip cartπdges are attaracted away from the docks and onto the top of the attachment stack At which point, the attachment handle is rased back up off the docks, and its top slides closed again The attachment system is now loaded with har extensions and is ready to be run over the scalp When the clip cartπdge is empted, the handle is brought back down over the dock where it oπginally picked up the cartndge This time the process is reveresed The empty clip cartπdge is attracted away from the top of the attachment stack and back onto the docks This is likely achieved by the cartndge-pinching structures G on the sides of the dock moving inwards and grabbing the clip cartπdge Now, the carhndge-free attachment stack is ready to pick up a full cartπdge from another dock Note. The cartndge pinching structures might be made to move in and out by running a threaded rod through their threaded holes H and turning it Ot course, the left and πght cartndge-pinching halves will have to be threaded in opposite directions so that they will move in opposite directions Filling Replacement Clip Cartridges with Hair Extensions on the Docks I have descnbed how the clip cartndges are held on docks so that they can be utlized by the attachment system, and how vacuum belt transfer unit feeds the second transport belts with har extension all grabbed at the same distance from their tps The following discussion centers on what happens in between these two points In other words, how the clip cartπdges are filled with recylced har extension FIG 94 shows t e Reversing Clip Filler It is where the second transport belts bnng the har extensions In fact, the second transport belts A are shown enteπng it Notce that there are four sets of second transport belts A shown Each set composed of four belts, two upper and two lower, just as they were when they left the vacuum transfer units Since this particular drawing shows four sets of belts, we are assuming that they have come from a remover that has four bend-under belts, which means its part of a system that also likely has four separate vacuum belt transfer units Notce that there are clips being held by unremovable clip cartndge B This unremovable clip cartndge has a similar configuraton to the ones used by the attachment stack, however, this particular clip cartndge B can neither be removed from its position on support C nor used on the attachment stack As shown, these clips are empty of hars However, this inverted-L-shaped support C has a turntable D under it that can swivel it around towards the second transport belts A This is why I call it the reveπng clip filler It is capable of reversing tine direction its clips are facing in order to facilitate filling its clips up with hair extensions from the second transport belts A When the unremovable clip cartπdge is swiveled around towards the second transport belts, the reversing clip filler looks as shown in FIG 95 Refemng to the plan side view in FIG 95 1 , notce how tne clips A fit between the lower level B of second transport belts and the upper level of second transport belts C The reason for this configuraton is to ensure that as the transport belts feed the clips A with har extensions that those hars are being held at a point above and below the clips This keeps the har extensions straight and under slight tension when they enter the clips In contrast, if the system had belts only above or only below the clips, the har extension tips might bend into a hoπzontal position rather than being feed in a vertical position into the clips The har extensions move along the second transport belts in the direction indicated by arrow D Similar to the har extension clips in the attachment system, these hair extension clips A are also likely mounted on spπng-pins or a functional equivalent Consequenty, said clips are filled with hair extensions by the transport belts, they are pushed progressively backwards away from sad transport belts Thus, their filled areas are pushed out of the way of the second transport belts that are filling them Tabs F are the part of spnng-pin assembly E that extends downward and can be pulled back by spnng-pin pullback actuator G A similar arrangment could be used on the docks in order to pull their all their spnng pins back, therby, lining them up at the back of the cartndge duπng cartndge transfer to the attachment stack's top After the clips are filled, they are turned back away from the second transport belts, as shown in FIG 94 Notice that the inteπor of the support contans a mechanism E One of its purposes is to loosen and tighten the gπp that the clips have on their hair extensions I'll go into the importance of this later on below The rods F serve as tracks that the reversing filler hangs down from and moves along Really, these two rods are much longer than shown in this drawing Remember, I said that the reversing filler moves from side to side like the head of a dot matπx pπnter It is these rods that it moves along The notches G are not part of the reversing filler but are part of an independent statonary level that overhangs the reversing filler Hump H is part of the reversing clip filler and moves with it The hump is being forced up into the notches G by its spπng I This set up allows the reversing filler to be moved precisely one notch over to the side This is important because the reversing filler is going to have to line up with another part called the clip cartπdge docks Although similar to the ones used on the attachment system, the unremovable clip cartπdge B is not removable and cannot be used on t e attachment system Instead, it has to transfer its har extensions to another clip cartπdge that is removable and can be used on the attachment system These other clip cartπdges, which are removable, are held on the clip cartndge docks FIG 96 shows an individual clip cartrdige dock Its purpose is to hold a removable clip cartndge so that the cartndge can be filled and transfened to the attachment system, as previously descnbed In practce, several docks are placed side by side in line as shown in FIG 97 The exteπor of all five of these docks looks like the one on the far left-hand end that has clip cartπdge A atop it These other four docks have their exteπor's removed in order to show the internal part B, which is the internal clip cartndge loosening and pin retraction assembly I am not going to go into detail now, just know that this part B is moved up and down to loosen and tghten the hold the clips have on their har extensions It does this by forcing tapered-headed spπng-pins extra far into the rear holes of the har extension clips This assembly also allows the vaπous clip cartndge engagement pins to retract downwards from the catπdge To increase simplicity, all five internal parts are likely connected below by a connectivity-bπdge so that they can be actuated by a single actuator or share a single set of spnngs In practice, all five of these docks would have a clip cartndge A atop, like the far left-hand dock on the end does Each of these clip cartndges must be filled with har extensions by the Reversing Clip Filler illustrated in FIG 94 Refemng to FIG 98, the clips A of the Reversing Clip Filler are moved toward the clips B on the docks For perspectve, also, notce the following the second transport belts C that fill the clips of the Reversing Clip Filler with har extensions, and the clip filler's own unremovable clip cartndge In this picture, the clip filler's clips A are turned away from the second transport belts C that fill them with har extensions For visual claπty, the drawing has not been complicated by adding hair extensions to the reversing clip filler's clips, but you should imagine har extensions hanging down from sad clips Recall that I said that the reversing clip filler could move from side to side like the head of a dot matπx pnnter These two rods D serve as the tracks that the clip filler slides from side to side on Notice how the clip filler hangs down from below sad rods D Sad rods are themselves supported by these by two rectangular structures E Sad rectangular structures hang down from the block F Notce that said block F has two rods G running through it Sad rods G serve as tracks that the block can slide forward and backward on Thus, the reversing clip filler is not only capable of moving side to side, but it is also capable of moving forward and backward In fact, the belt H shown on these two wheels I represents the pulley system that moves the clip filler forward and backward After the Reversing Clip Filler itself has been filled with har extensions, it rotates around towards the clip cartndge dock assembly J and then is moved forward towards them When the Reversing Filler is moved forward towards the clip cartndge restng on its leftmost dock, its clips give their har extensions to the clips of the clip cartndge on the dock The result is that this removable clip cartπdge on the leftmost dock has been filled with har extensions and is ready to be picked up and used by the har extension attachment system Although not shown for visual claπty, the har extensions hang downward from these clips The filled har extension clip cartπdges on these docks are picked up by the attachment system, as previously descπbed To facilitate this hair extension transfer, the grasp of each har clip, in the clip cartπdges both on the docks and Reversing Clip Filler, can be loosened by a mechanism internal to the cartπdge supports Refemng to FIG 94 for the reversing clip filler, this type of loosening mechanism is shown as E Refemng to FIG 97 for the cartndge docks, this type of loosening mechanism is shown as B Such a loosening mechanism works by forcing spπng-pins with tapered heads up into the har extension clips, thus, forcing their sides apart When such a mechanism moves upwards the clips loosen and when it moves downward, they re-tighten To transfer har extensions to the docks, first the docks loosen their clips Once the reversing clip has advanced its clips fully forward, the clips on the docks are re-tghtened, those on the reversing clip filler are loosened, and the Reversing Clip Filler backs away Thus, making ttie hair extension transfer complete In FIG. 98, to the πght side of the leftmost clip cartndge dock , are four other clip cartπdge docks. In this drawing, they dont look like the leftmost dock because their extenors arent shown. However, in practce, these four docks look just like this one on the left, each with its own clip cartπdge atop. Recall, I told you that the reversing clip filler is capable of moving sideways, like the head of a dot matπx pπnter. The reason why it can move to the side is so that it can move itself into alignment with the clip cartrdiges on the neighboπng docks in t e same manner. There are two things to consider about the system I've uist descirbed: 1. First, the cartndges docks arent filled directly by the second transport belts. This is because most people have hairstyles where the hars on there head are different lengths at different places. When we remove hair extensions from the scalp, we want to be able to put them back on the scalp at approximately the same place so the harstyle remams tine same. We want to do this while being able to comb the remover the same directon through the har as we do the attachment system because this makes use of the system easier. However, if we move the remover the same directon over scalp as the attachment system and then just directy fill the clip cartπdges with the har extensons. The first hars it removed will be ttne last hars into the cartπdges and, as such, will be the last to be re-attached. In other words, the hars will be applied to the wrong area of the scalp. The soluton is to use the second transport belts to fill one set of clips, namely the clips on the reversing clip filler. This means the hair extensions in the reversing clip filler are in backwards order. However, when the reversing clip filler rotates around and transfers its hars to a clip cartrdige on a dock, the hars are once agan reversed. Consequenty, they are now in the approponate order to be used by the attachment system. Of course, if we werent concerned with putting har extensions back on the head in exacty the same position they came from, then we would use the second transport belts to directly fill ttie dock clips, omitting the Reversing Clip Filler. In this scenano, the second transport belts, would move laterally as the Reversing Clip Filler does, but deliver their har extensions directly to the dock clips. 2. There's a second point I'd like to make. 1 said the attachment system will probably have narrower and, thus, more channels than the remover. Since this would mean that there are more clips that need to be filled than second transport belts, how do all the clips get filled? The short answer is that when the second transport belts are filling the clips of the the reversing filler, we move each second transport belt side to side slighty. This way each belt fills more than just one clip. Refe ng to FIG. 94, each in the set of four tabs J supports a pulley roller (not shown) beneath itself which supports the extreme terminal ends of a second transport belt A. By moving sad tabs J side to side, using an actuator for each, the second transport belts can be rhythmically moved back and forth so that each independent second- transport-belt assembly fills several clips evenly with har extensions. Note: The tabs are staggered longitudinally relatve to each other so that actuator mechanisms, whose axes of movement and shafts are perpendicular to each tab J, can be staggered longitudinally between the tabs Using New Hair Extensions Instead of Recycled: I have descnbed how recycled har extensions are removed from the scalp and placed in ttne clips on the clip cartπdge docks, but how do new har extensions get introduced into the system? By new, I mean har extensions that were not removed from the cleints head Instead of using the the reversing clip filler, an introduction-cartπdge is used to fill the docked clip cartndges with new har extensions. FIG.99 shows a drawing of an introduction-cartπdge. Notice how its made up of two long rows of har extension clips A joined together. For visual claπty, only the clips on the very πghtmost end are shown holding oniy a very few hair extensions B. In practice, every single clip would be holding many hair extensions. Notice the two holes C in the far lateral sides of the mtroduction-cartπdge. Most likely, this cartrdige is molded out of plastic and disposable. FIG.99.1 shows a plan top view of the same. In FIG. 100, we, once again, see ttne clip cartndge docks. Agan, I'll remind you that the exteπor of every cartπdge dock looks like the one on the leftmost end. The holes A in the sides of the introducton-cartndge B are shown being slide over introduction-cartndge-alignment pins C attached to the cartπdge dock assembly. This pm-in-hole interface will line the introduction-cartrdige up with all of the individual cartπdges on the docks. As the introducton-cartπdge's clips are brought towards the docks, they transfer their har extensions to the cartπdges on the docks. To facilitate this, the loosening and tghtening process of ttne clips on the docks might be tπggered. This could be tπggered by a manual button or when the introducton-cartndge touches a switch as it slides over the pins C The assembly that holds pins C might either be temporaπly moved into positon or placed so laterally to the docks that it does not interfere with the operaton of the Reversing Clip Filler. Refernng to FIG 101 , notce how the introducton-cartndge is composed of two rows of clips. The set of clips A floating in space represent the clips of a docked har extension cartndge. The lower row B of introducton-cartndge clips holds the har extensions below the docked-cartndge's clips The upper row C holds the har extensions above the docked-cartndge's clips This configuration keeps the har extensions relatively straight as they're forced into the cartndge's clips. If the introducton-cartndge just had one row of clips, the har extensions might arc backwards when they come in contact with the docked-cartndge's clips. Refe ng to FIG.99, the front of the introducton-cartndge might have a capping structure (not shown) that snaps onto the front of it in order to help hold the the introduction-cartπdge's har extensions in its clips. This cap neednt only block forward escape of the har extensions, but also could have internal slots that fit over each holding clip. Said slots could have narrowing inteπors which would pinch together the clips in order to tghten their gπp on the hair extensions dunng storage. Refemng back agan to FIG. 100, the long switch bar D gets tπggered when the attachment system handle unit is brought down far enough to touch it. It tπggers a circuit that apπses the system that the hand unit is being brought down onto the docks. The system response will likely include opening the canopy D of the handle unit as shown in FIG.93. ESack to FIG. 100, the lower long switch bar E gets tnggered when the handle unit is brought down all the way onto the docks. This apπses the system that the handle unit attachment system is completely docked. This tπggers actons consistent with either placing a clip cartπdge onto the docks or removing one from the docks. The system computer will likely act in an altematng pattern in respect to this. For example, the first time ttne handle unit is brought down onto a dock it will be assumed that a clip cartndge needs to be picked up and the second tme that it needs to be put back on the dock. A clip cartndge may be delivered from a dock to the top of the attachment stack by loosening the cartridge-grabbing mechanism G , as shown in FIG.93. The body of the clip cartndge will most likely have enough magnetc character that it will be attracted to the top surface of the metallic attachment stack. Since the cartndge holding pins A, in FIG. 96, and the clip-engagement pins B on the top of the docks line up perfectiy with those on the attachment system, all pins on the dock will probably be designed to descend (actvely by actuator or passively on spπngs) beneath and out of the cartndge allowing those on the attachment system to enter from the top taking their place. Recall part B in FIG 97. It most likely supports the cartndge holding and clip engagement pins, thus, its descent makes their descent out the cartndge possible. The cartndge, with the grabbing mechanism loosened, will reman magnetcally attracted to the attachment stack when the handle unit is moved away from the docks. To remove a cartπdge from the attachment system handle unit, thereby, putting it on the docks, the process is simply reversed The cartπdge-grabbing mechanisms are tightened on the cartπdge overcoming the magnetic attraction it has to the attachment stack, thus, holding sad cartndge onto tine docks. Refe ng to FIG. 100, we see the threaded rod F which runs through all the threaded holes of the cartridge-grabbers on docks. When said rod is rotated, such as by an electπc motor, all the grabbers on the docks either tightener or loosen. -The bend-under systems might serve more than one hair channel and bend hars under areas other than the tne connectvity bπdges. For example, it may bend some hars under the sides of tne-assemblies. -Instead of using cables that pull the har handler assemblies, other types of actuators could be used including direct attachment of πgid moving actuation rods -The construction of the so-called attachment stack, or any other analogous processing embodiment, does not have to be out of sheets. For example, levels fifteen through nineteen shown in FIGS.26-20 could be configured as one or two molded parts which sunound the spnng-pin assembly. -The channel obstruction A in FIG.27.1 is optional beacue hair handlers and opposing scalp hars will likely keep the hair extensions from advancing too fast. -The one-to-one attachment chamber to nozzle relationship is optional. Sometimes one type of output nozzle can be shared across several chambers. -The support base unit doesnt always have to be so big that it needs to be placed several feet away. It could be small enough to be incorporated into the handle unit -Both the handle unit and belt buckle are optional because the attachment stack could be held directiy by hand, albeit it less than ideal. Also, the attachment stack could be connected to a handle means by a structure very different than the belt buckle For example, the attachment stack or any analogous processing stack or system could be mounted on a handle unit in one of, but not limited to, the following ways: -Mounted on a fulcrum, so that it moves rotatonally -Mounted on a spπng or other flexible mechanism, (or portions of the processing system itself made from deformable matenals), so that in can move in one or more of the following ways: —Vertical retraction away from, and advancement towards, the scalp —Hoπzontal retracton away from, and advancement towards, the scalp -Using sloped notches or a slide-out preventer to prevent hars from escaping duπng transport might be unnecessary. -Whenever we speak of a hair-pinching means, such as for the bend-under system, the tensionmg har straightener, or the transport belt system, we should realize that for pinching another har-engagement means might be substtuted. For example, using hooks, electπcal-charges, or an otherwise sticky surface are such examples of ways to engage hairs. Also, the belts neednt always be configured in pars to engage hars. For example, they might either use a non-pinchmg-engagement means or they might pinch hairs between themselves and a stationary surface. -The tensionmg har straghtener is optional. For example, the har could be held straght by a human hand. -The bend-under system is optional and not absolutely the only way of getting hars past obstructions associated with the processing system. For example, this too could conceivably be done manually. -In many cases this document uses relativistic descnptions. For example, frequently the left wall is referenced as the position where the nozzles are or toward which the pinchers slide. This does not mean that in all embodiments this will be the case. Left wall of the attachment area is just used as a reference to oπent the reader. This is true of many directions given to descnbe the system. For example, transport- forward is relative to the particular destination; specific level numbers in the stack are relative to this discussion only; the stacking order of the har handlers and some of the other levels can usually be vaned; pushback doesnt have to be back in all embodiments; the vanous functional areas of the stack can be rearranged in different cofigurations. For example, har handlers can be placed in different levels such as below the nozzle outputs; fluid nozzles can be placed in different positions other than the left wall, for example, they could be placed on a back wall of the attachment chamber below the har-extension-tip trench; the tip trench floor can itself be thickened to accomodate nozzles or for any other reason. In other words, vaπous functional areas can be moved around in many ways relatve to each other in accordance with their functons Sometmes they can be omitted or substtuted for other functional areas. -The use of the word "stack" in attachment stack (or any analogous processing stack) is mosty used as a relativistc way of making the descπpiton of the system more vivid to the reader. However, functonally-equivalent systems might be configured which are not constructed as stacks. For example, using micro-machine technology to put many har-handler functional areas on the same level is an example of this. -All processing stack (processing systems) can be configured with only a single channel by itself. -The bead-forming liquid polymer can be any functional equivalent adhesive or substance. -Metenng area may refer not only to the area between a pushback gate (or functional equivalent) and an entrance (or equivalent), but also, the area where the metenng functon oπgmally take place, even if sad har handlers associated with said meteπng functon later move move to a different position later. Although meteπng areas are likely formed between pushback and entrance gates, this doesnt have to be the case. Instead, they any area where a limited number of hars are isolated, usually to ready them for further processing. -Sometmes the functional areas of har handlers are referred to as gates or hair-handling gates. -Nozzles are any form of fluid (gas or liquid) output or even gas-suspended solid particle output. For example, the word nozzle does not always indicate that the output opening is on a projecting part. Sometimes the word nozzle can even be applied to intakes into which things are sucked. -Sometmes har handler functional areas perform multiple-functons that could be split among multiple har handlers and the converse is tme. The familiar attachment-area pmcher with its sloping front used to bπng wayward hairs together could be split up into a stack of several pinchers placed on different levels, ideally, triggering progressively lower levels progressively later. Some of these lower levels could even be placed below the stationary levels of the attachment stack. -Use of a track-cap is optional. -This first-descπbed embodiment above has certain optional features which arent necessary and also lack certan other possible enhancements If the system can perform without a certain functonal part, even less effectively, then this part should be considered optional. REFINEMENTS AND IDEAS CONCERNING THE ATTACHMENT STACK ITESLF (and other types of processing stacks by analogy) [[ATTACHMENT REFINEMENTS]] Applying Adhesives in the Most Optmal Manner Previously, discussions about adhesive app caton suggested that it should be applied to the hars in spheπcal beads rather than a thin coating. Although beads do have real advantages over coatings, such as increased peel strength, the man reason beads were used in the previous discussions is because they are more visible in the diagrams. In practice, it is better to use long thin coatngs rather than beads. Elongated volumes of adhesive are the better on two accounts: 1. They are much harder to see than beads.2. Because they are hard to see, they can be made longer than spheπcal beads. Their additonal length provides more protection aganst slipping free Although peel strength is less than with spheπcal beads, this seems less of an issue anyway. —Nffigle Flow Systems *** Several different types of nozzle systems can be used to apply the adhesive or any other fluid substance to the hars. Some of these systems for controlling nozzle flow are descnbed below Vapor bubbles generated in the adhesive or other fluid itself by small heating elements, usually powered by electncal resistance, could be used to propel sad fluid out of a nozzle. In FIG. 102.2, notce how the heat generating resistance means is placed near the tp of the nozzle. In FIG. 102.3, notce how it generates an explosive force C in the directons shown by the arrows In order to generate electncal resistance, t e resistance heatng element needs to have a higher electncal resistance than the electncal circuits supplying it This can be achieved by making tine heatng elment narrower, thinner, or out of a matenal with a higher electncal resistivity than the rest of the circuit In order to construct an assembly where the heating element is thinner or made from a different matenal, it could be constructed using at least two layers. In FIG. 102, the first layer A forms the heating element itself, in FIG. 102.1 , the second layer B is used to reduce the resistivity of the overall electncal circuit in all areas except the area where localized heat is desired. Possibly, light earned by fiber optcs could be used as an energy source to generate the necessary heat in the approponate area A second means of controlling nozzle flow is to use individual lines each connected to its own individual macro-actuator or macro- valve. By macro, I generally mean a seperate part that is too large to be incorpoated within the attachment stack itself. An alternative veπsion of this configuration could use many nozzles that share a common line to a single macro-actuator or macro- valve. In this case, the nozzles will probably not be individually controlled but, instead, will all fire at once. A hybπd between the two previous configuratons would be all or many nozzles shanng a common line to their own macro-liquid supply but are individually controlled by micro-pumps or micro-valves within the layers of the attachment stack. These micro-pumps include: 1. vapor bubbles from heatng elements 2. Micro-acutators (such as Sandia's Laboratoπes micro-steam engine actuator) 3. Piezo-electnc means like those used by some ink jet pπnters These micro-pumps will generally require an electπc current in order to function For manufactuπng concerns regarding "micro- wires," see the electromagnetic pathways section below These micro-pumps or micro-valves might be placed anywhere along the the fluid supply line between the fluid supply reservoir and final fluid output nozzles in the attachment area Furtherstill, micro-pumps or valves placed in or near the attachment stack might be supplied with adhesive by a macro-pumping means Such a macro-pumping means, when used with a micro-pump or valve means, would place the fluid under enough pressure to carry it aganst gravity to the micro-pumps, however, little enough pressure so that it cant exit the nozzles unaded by the micro-pumps If needed, especially for high viscosity adhesives, an ar-in-lme system powered by a base unit that generates pressuπzed ar bursts between each droplet of liquid fired from each output nozzle Of course, ar bursts would be used in order to push fluid through the supply lines to the nozzles For example, an ar compressor that releases pressunzed air bursts into the supply line when solenoids valves open Air bursts used between each liquid droplet ensure consistent dropplet size and prevent trailing strands of adhesive (or other liquid) between each output nozzle and the hars it is wetting Refemng to FIG 103, each isolated fluid supply pathway or tine of the attachment stack generally has several nozzles that share it Likewise, several of these supply tines themselves usually share a single adhesive supply line from the base unit For this reason, the amount of liquid introduced into the lines should be aproximate equal to the number of nozzles t es greater than the desired size of a single output droplet This volume of liquid will first be divided among the supply tines and then the several nozzles on each tine This division among two nozzles on a single tine is shown by in FIG 103 and 1031 In FIG 103, a volume of fluid A is being shown pushed down the line by pressuπzed ar B behind it In frame 1032, this volume of fluid is divided equally between the two attachment area nozzles C and D In practice, there are likely more than two nozzles used per attachment area Furtherstll, before this volume of liquid even reaches these attachment area nozzles, it has to be divided in a similar manner by a manifold means at the back of the attachment stack, which connects the individual tine supply lines together Refemng to FIG 3, such a manifold is illustrated by G This fluid division system is the most ideal way to deliver fluids which are slurπes rather than solutions For example, an adhesive that has grans of sand or fibers mechanically mixed in with it If such a slurry were delivered to the nozzles using a liquid-in-line system that does not seperate small volumes of fluid between bursts of gas, then it would be delivered in an unpredicatable manner This is because the liquid in the slurry would tend to flow around the solids in the slurry At first, this would lead to the output of undesirably liquid-πch droplets With continued use, supply-line blockages caused by the trailing solids would result A system that uses the fluid division ar burst system to deliver a solids-contanmg slurry must introduce the components of the slurry into the line in special manner For example, as illustrated by by FIG 1032, the solids E and liquids F should be independently introduced into a mixing chamber G The liquids pontion F should be introduced through a valve H The solids portions should be introduced using metenng device I It is very likely that this metenng device will take the form of an actuator that pushes a specified amount of solids E into the mixing chamber G This meteπng actuator may have a notch J that can be filled, most likely via hopper, with a specific volume of solids E To facilitate mixing, this mixing chamber might be vibrated externally as an entire unit or internally, such as by repeated vibrating of the metenng actuator I Once all the components are together in the mixing chamber, a third input valve K connected to the mixing chamber chamber should supply the pressuπzed ar burst that moves the volume of mixed slurry through the supply line The above system showed ar bubbles being introduced between volumes of adhesive at a mechanism in the line before the attachment stack is ever reached It is also possible to introduce the pressunzed gas bubbles near the nozzles in the attachment stack When introducing gas bubbles near the nozzles, liquid behind the ar troducton point is going to be pushed backwards For this reason, the pressunzed bursts should always be introduced at a narrowed area of the nozzle such that the back-lying liquid has a greater surface area to offset the pressure compared to the surface area of the narrowed nozzle output This will prevent the back-lying liquid from being pushed excessively far backwards in the supply line This bubble introduction point will likely be placed at a point homologus to the location of the heating element in FIG 102 In 102, gas may be introduced at sad bubble introduction point by va>por generated by a heating element However, there are other ways gas could be introduced at this "bubble point " Alternatively, refemng agan to FIG 102, an external supply of pressunzed gas could be introduced at this point The independent gas supply pathway can be run parallel to the adhesive supply channel either in a higher, lower level or even the same level in the attachment stack This independent gas supply pathway's gas source might be pressunzed gas in the base unit or vapor generated by heatng a fluid in sad independent gas supply pathway ""Nozzle Stack In the first embodiment the attachment stack was shown as has having only one level of nozzles that output only one type of liquid, namely a U V curable adhesive The only other output level shown was for U V light This previous configuration was presented first mainly because it was the best embodiment for illustrative purposes However, we can imagine other embodiments which have several levels of nozzles that output liquid These vaπous output nozzles on different levels work together to facilitate attachment of har extensions to scalp hars For example, a two part adhesive system where one level of nozzles outputs an adhesive and another level of nozzles outputs an accelerator fluid that hastens the cure of sad adhesive When both parts combine on the hairs held in front of them, the adhesive will harden rapidly In a similar manner, one level of nozzles could apply a durable but slow cuπng adhesive means, while another set of nozzles follows this with a fast hardening but much less durable adhesive means Ideally, the faster cuπng adhesive means would be applied over the slower cuπng adhesive means, so that it would not only attach hars together but temporanly serve as a protectve coatng that prevents the slow cuπng adhesive from escaping An example of a par of a slow and a fast cuπng adhesives is a cyanoacrylate, a slower strong adhesive, and a wax rosin mixture which hardens rapidly upon cooling However, to optimize the use of such a multiple nozzle level system, additional nozzle levels should be added and used in accordance with a precise algonthm FIG 104 is a perspective representation of the stack of nozzles and intakes present in a single attachment chamber Although no attachment chamber walls are shown, the two long cylinders represent a scalp har A and har extension B held together in an attachment chamber Each output nozzle will typically, but not always, have a width thinner than each attachment chamber and will be centered on the left wall of each attachment chamber Alternatively, the vacuum intakes will usually have a width equal to several attachment chambers, and will be shared by the several attachment chambers in a single attachment area These attachment chambes are formed by the notches in the pmcher shown in FIGS 9 & 10, being pressed up aganst the left wall F, in FIG 16, of the attachment area F, in FIG 3 Thus, the nozzles that we are discussing are arranged in a vertical stack along the left wall of the attachment area Adhesive will generally be applied a manner that forms a thin film along a length of the hairs that are being attached together In order to do this, after a liquid, such as an adhesive is applied to the hars, one or more nozzles may blow a certain amount of ar or gas into the attachment chambers Air blown into an attachment chamber will move through it along a largely veπtcal line This will flatten the liquid along the surfaces of the hars, without the need for atomization Alternatively, instead of blowing ar, a vacuum intake could flatten the applied adhesive by generating high velcoity ar currents that flow past the adhesive Any excess adhesive that cannot be flattened will be sucked into the vacuum intake Naturally, blowing and sucking could be used together As shown by FIG 104, cyanoacrylate adhesive is output onto the hars from level C Under the force of a vacuum D, it is spread down a certain length of the hars untl any excess is pulled into the vacuum intake Next, a hot wax rosin liquid is applied in a similar manner from level E This wax/rosin must be kept hot in order to remain liquid In order to mantain its temperature, a closed circuit heating channel level F is placed below the wax rosin level The closed circuit heating channel is composed of liquid passagesways much like those descnbed for the nozzle outputs However, the closed-circuit channels are not open on their ends but form a loop that returns their heating liquid to the base unit In other words, hot water will typically be pumped from the base unit through a closed-loop Each tne will have its own closed-loop, but these loops can share a single delivery line similar using a scheme similar to that previously shown FIG 3 for the adhesive outputs However, the return sides of the loops cannot be connected together on a single manifold- level, as shown in FIG 3, because such a connection would intersect with the delivery sides of each tne To solve this problem, the return loops could be commonly connected by forming a manifold into a d ffemt level of the attachment stack itself However, more ideally, this second level of common connecton manifold will be placed on a differnt level by forming it as seperate molded part that splits the single return line into multiple branches before connecting to the attachment stack Thus, by straddling the delivery loop tines, these multiple output branches could be plugged as a unit into tine individual return loop holes (one per tine) on the attachment stack Note that in this descπption of the connection scheme, tie configuration of delivery and return can be interchanged Notce that below the wax rosin level is a level G made of a thermally msulatve matenal that prevents the wax rosin level's heat from esacping to levels below Once the wax ros liquid is applied to the har it must be rapidly hardened by rapid cooling This is best achieved by application of a cool liquid through nozzle level H This cool liquid can be chilled water or even a chilled organic solvent such as acetone Notce how the chilled coolant is kept cold by a closed-circuit coolant loop level I Notice how the chilled hardening coolant is applied by an output nozzle on and sucked along the length of the hars by the vacuum intake level D The chilled coolant will likely be able to harden the wax rosm in a fraction of a second The end result is that the wax rosm by coating the exteπor of the har bundle is both holding it together and holding in the liquid cyanoacrylate that requires several minutes before it becomes hard Thus, the attached hars will be able to leave the attachment chamber without getting cyanoacrylate on anything Dunng this process, the walls of the attachment chamber, despite likely being coated with a non-stick substance, are likely to get coated with adhesive and wax rosm themselves In order to prevent build up, they might be washed with hot cleaning fluid The cleaning fluid will be supplied by an output nozzle J in the stack and sucked up by vacuum intake D The cleaning fluid used should be hot enough to remelt the wax/ rosin, and of a chemical nature so that it keeps the wax/rosm dissolved even it even if it were to cool down An oil is an example of a fluid that can do this Also, ttne cleaning fluid should have the ablity to dissolve liquid cyanoacrylate adhesive Adding a powerful organic solvent such as acetone to the cleaning fluid will allow it do this Altematvely, two seperate output nozzles with two seperate types of cleang fluid could be used In fact, the chilled coolant output nozzle H could be filled with acetone itself Although chilled acetone is capable of dissolving wax/rosm, it will harden wax/rosm much faster Thus, the chilled acetone can be applied quickly to harden the wax/rosm coatng on the hars without dissolving it off Although not shown in this drawing, the vacuum disposal intake could itself be kept heated with a closed-loop system Realize that the cleaning fluids are typically not introduced into the attachment chambers untl after the attached hars have left them The attachment chambers might be cleaned in this manner every fraction of a second when no hars are in them This peπod of time will be called the cleaning This drawing shows three of the most optional levels The first of these optional level, level K, applies a slurry of adhesive mixed with sand or other particles The purpose of these particles is to increase the peel strength of the attachment However, such a slurry might not provide an entrely invisible attachment For this reason, this peel-strength increasing formula should only be applied to a short length of the Bundle of hars More specifically, it should be applied towards the top of all adhesive applied At the top of the attachment bead, it will protect the entire attachment bead from being peeled apart The lower-lying length of adhesive, without strengthening particles, will serve to further strengthen the shear strength of the attachment, while remaning invisible In order to apply the slurry to only a short segment, a special slurry output nozzle K placed extremely close to a dedicated slurry vacuum intake L is used This dedicated slurry vacuum intake would only be activated immediately after the special slurry is applied The algoπthm descπbed above is not the only way attachment can be done There are similar but different algoπthms that can be used to attach hars For example, a simpler stack that does not have all of the components present in this stack can be used For example, a stack with only an adhesive output nozzle and a wax nozzle could be employeed In such a set up, the system might flood the entre attachment chamber with cyanoacrylate adhesive, or another suitable adhesive, and then apply negatve pressure in the cyanoacrylate nozzle in order to suck the excess back into it This would leave only a thin coatng of adhesive on the hars This process could be repeated for the wax/rosm nozzle or even the cooling nozzle if used Furtherstll, a cleaning fluid nozzle that functions in a similar manner might be introduced However, in order to avoid using contaminated cleaning fluid, its nozzle most likely would not suck back but, rather, there would be a seperate vacuum intake or the fluid would simply be allowed to escape from the system Similarly, the stack might be configured slightly differenty if a different type of adhesive was used For example, a permanent adhesive which hardens based on cooling it (likely a thermoplastic) wouldnt require a temporary protective coating Additionally, refinements can be made concerning the application of cyanoacrylates and similar adhesives These adhesives cure rapidly upon exposure to water and other some other chemicals This is desirable from the standpoint that they II achieve a certain amount of bonding strength faster However, if cured too fast, these adhesives will not be as strong Thus, I propose the following technique to take advantage of their fast-cure property without loss of bonding strength After application of a cyanoacrylate (or similar adhesive) to the hairs in the attachment chambers, using another nozzle set, apply an cure-accelerating substance, such as water, using another nozzle set This cure- accelerating substance might be applied as small drops, as atomized in an ar (or gas) steam, or as a true vapor in a gas stream, for example steam in ar However, ideally, only enough accelerator is applied to cure a thin protective coating on the surface of the adhesive bead leaving the internal portons uncured This thin protectve coatng will give the adhesive bead additional strength duπng the temporary protectve coatng application phase In other words, preventing permanent adhesive disruption by the temporary protective-coating application itself However, since only a thin layer of the exteπor will have been cured, it will only reman this way for a very short while, perhaps, only a fracton of a second After this short peπod, the coatng will be redissolved by the uncured portions below it Now, with the temporary protective coating encircling it, ttne once agan liquid permanent adhesive is free to cure more slowly and strongly Finally, including substances in the protectve coatng ttiat ad the permanent adhesive cure is a possibility Shut Down Between Users When the machine is shut down between users, the adhesive nozzles could be temporaπly capped and protected from the enviroment, such as by one of the following methods 1 Allow excess wax into the attachment chambers Reopen the attachment chambers with a stream of hot oil/acetone cleaning fluid, or any other heated or solvent-type fluid 2 Allow the adhesive at the nozzle tps to cure, but then, reopen them with a flood of cleaning solvent from the cleaning solvent nozzles 3 Simply use negative pressure to pull the liquid backwards in the nozzles Thus, there will be ar bubbles at the tps of the output nozzles These bubbles would protect the liquid in the nozzles from the environment 4 Use negatve pressure to pull the liquid backwards in the nozzles Allow a certain amount of ar into the nozzles, but at some point duπng this process, use another level of nozzles to introduce an inert fluid, such as liquid oil or gaseous nitrogen, into the attachment chambers This inert fluid will be sucked up by the adhesive outputs and other outputs which are undergoing negatve pressure The end result will be that certain outputs, such as those for adhesive, will have the liquids that they contan protected by an inert fluid at their most exteπor nozzle tps, and if necessary to protect the adhesive from the inert liquid itself, there will be a small ar bubble between the two 5 Use negatve pressure to pull the liquid adhesive all the way back to its supply resevoir Perhaps, construct the supply lines of Teflon or inject a washing fluid into sad lines in order to lessen any residual adhesive in the supply lines '"Means of Increasing Attachment Peel-Strength*" When talking about the strength of a har-to-har-extension attachment, we have two types of strength to consider The first is tensile- shear strength This type of strength is measured by attaching two hars with t eir shafts parallel to each other, and then pulling on altnemate ends of the hairs from opposite sides of the attachment point Cyanoacrylate adhesives provide extremely good tensile-shear strength attachments So good that a scalp har will usually be pulled from the scalp before its attachment fals The second type of strength is peel-strength This type of stength is measured by attaching two hars with their shafts parallel to each other, and then pulling both hars apart hars from the same side of the attachment point In other words, peeling them apart in a wishbone fashion Compared to their tensile-shear stength, cyanoacrylate adhesives provide very low peel-strength Low peel-strength is not altogether undesirable Most importantly, har extensions attached to the head would not be expected to expeπence significant peel-forces under normal conditions This is because for the hairs to expeπence great peel-forces a person would have to grab the hars in the same manner that they would grab a wishbone Specifically, they would have to use two hands to pinch hars that are close together on the scalp and then pull their hands apart, while mantang their grasp The only tme a person would typically be expected to do something like this is while braiding the har Finally, low peel-strength is desirable from the standpoint that it acts as a safety mechanism If somebody is bradmg the hair in an overly aggressive manner, it is far more desirable for the har extension attachments to fal rather than breaking the natural hars growing out of the scalp Despite the advantages of low peel-strength, should a higher peel-strength be desired, the following methods can be used to increase peel-strength ""Increasing Peel-Strength By Mechanical Manipulaton of Har Shafts A laser or mechanical means could cut small holes in scalp hairs or har extensions in order to allow the adhesive more initmate contact with them Such a laser system could be configured in a tine pattern, as the U V outputs were in the onginal embodiment, and placed as a layer in the attachment stack or even adjacent to spinneret holes in order to process har extensions ttne moment after they have been extruded in the manufactunng process (see discussion on har extension manufactunng) If a mechanical part is used to make small perforations through scalp hairs or hair extensions, it could be configured as a moving tine structurally similar to the pmcher placed either in the attachment stack or har extension manufactunng process Regardless of whether a laser or mechancial part, if used in the attachment stack, it should cut notches or small holes through hars or har extensions near the area where adhesive is to be applied to them The attachment stack's algoπtm might be adjusted to allow har extensions into the attachment area before scalp hars This way har extension tips could be perforated alone without perforating, and thus weakening, the natural scalp hars ""Increasing Peel-Strength Bv Using Adhesives Composited with Stronger Polymers Some adhesives, such as pine rosin, are adequately sticky to hold two hars firmly together aganst tensile-shear forces In fact, they are hold well enough that an attached har extension could pull a har root from the scalp before coming unattached However, rosin and some other functionally-equivalent adhesives have incredibly weak peel-strengths and low resistances to heat Similarly, there are polymers, like polystyrene that are relatively structurally sound with respect to peel-strength and heat resistance but have very little tensile-shear adhesive ability This is to say these polymers will form a strong πng around har fibers but won't hold onto them By mixing a stcky, but otherwise structurally and thermally unsound, adhesive like rosin with a structurally and more thermally sound polymer, like polystyrene or an acrylic, a composite that has both adhesive tensile-shear strength and peel-strength can be achieved In the case of a rosin and polystyrene composite, a hot-melt type adhesive would be produced However, adhesives composites that cure by chemical reactions are also possibilities The use of hot-melt thermoplastics, especially those (such as polystyrene) that are dissolvable by organic solvents, is desirable Such substances could be applied through heating and cooling but removed by a solvent such as acetone As mentioned above, such thermoplastics may be improved by mixing a sticky substance, such as rosin, with them to increase their ablity to provide tensile-shear strength by stcking to the hair better Furthermore, other ingredients may be mixed with thermoplastcs to adjust their melting point up or down and increase their peel-strength such as by mixing fibers or particles into them The thermoplastc or hot-melt type mateπals used to increase peel-strength shouldnt be limited those discussed such as wax and polystyrene Any functional equivalent that hardens to an acceptable peel- stength upon cooling could be used Likewise, the stcky adhesive shouldnt be limited to those discussed such as rosin, any functional equivalent could be used For example, the vanous sticky adhesives used on adhesive tapes could used Finally, when using these sticky adhesive composites, there is a chance that the exteπors of the attachment beads will themselves be stcky To counteract this stckiness, a fluid, or any other substance whose molecules themselves will be bound by the adhesive should washed sprayed, or otherwise exposed, over sad bead, thereby, counteracting external stckiness Such a substance could be integrated into the cleaning fluid formula or applied separately Alternatively, this counteracting-substance means could include using a hot-melt fluid that's not stcky, thereby, applying a non-sticky outer coating Finally, enough solvent, perhaps as part of the cleaning fluid, could be applied to wash only the external stickiness away In all cases, the measures will most likely will be applied in the attachment stack but they might also be applied after exit from the attachment stack ■• Increasing Peel-Strength By Using Adhesives Composited with Strengthening-Particles Application of adhesive with peel-strength-increasing particles, such as fibers, sand or small glass beads, could be used to increase adhesive peel-strength Using fiber or particle composites to increase peel-strength opens up to possibility of using many types of adhesives whose peel-strength might, otherwise, be too low For example, a waxy or hot-melt themioplastc type matenal becomes a possibility A wax or a thermoplastc with a very high melting point could be applied and strengthened by application fibers or sand particles Below are some vaπous application methods for applying adhesive-particle composites 1 Apply adhesive to the entire length of attachment point -A Blow dry particles onto the adhesive which didn't have particles in it -B Mix an adhesive and particles together in a slurry before adhesive application -1 Use vacuum and/or pressuπzed ar to spread the adhesive as decπbed above -2 The suck-back (dipping) approach Squirt out and suck back the adhesive into the topmost high peel-strength adhesive nozzle, but only enough to descend the desired length down t e har Note Duπng the cleaning phase between adhesive application, it is likely that a certain amount of sucked back adhesive at the nozzle tp will be discarded rather than πsking contamination by mixing it back with the man supply 2 Apply sand only to the top most portion of the adhesive attachment point length -A Blow dry sand particles onto the adhesive which didnt have particles in it -1 Use little enough vacuum disposal intake power that the sand doesnt descend much vertically -2 Use a second higher dedicated vacuum that is only turned on duπng sand output, and maybe a little bit dunng the cleaning phase -B Squirt an pre-mixed adhesive and particle slurry -1 Use little enough vacuum and/or pressuπzed ar that the sand slurry is squirted out and descends very little vertically -2 Use a second higher vacuum that is only turned on duπng sand output and maybe a little duπng the cleaning phase -3 The suck-back (dipping) approach Squirt out and suck back the adhesive into the topmost high peel-strength adhesive nozzle, but only enough to descend the desired length down the har ""Equipment Concerns Relevant to Using Adhesives Composited with Strengthening-Fibers The type of particle mixed into the adhesive to increase peel-strength could be small fibers Generally, strengthening-fibers should have a length shorter, or not much longer, than the minimum diameter of ttne adhesive supply line and nozzles These fibers should be made correspondingly thin in diameter themselves to achieve a certan degree of flexibility These small fibers could be pre-added to the adhesive tank and aggitated into suspension before each use The suspension in the tanks could be filtered with a screen, perhaps configured as a centπfuge, whose screen holes are equal to or slightly smaller than the smallest diameter of the adhesive feed line This screen should be placed just before mtroducton into the adhesive supply line Perhaps, sad screen is enclosed in the same ar tght chamber as the adhesive resevoir tank In which case, it might be placed in the tank above the liquid level and liquid would be pumed into and returned through it either into the man tank or a smaller area that directly feeds the adhesive supply line Its purpose would be to functon as a filter to remove excessively large particles in the adhesive Otherwise, these particles might clog the adhesive supply line if left in the adhesive Note All sand and fiber slurry nozzles may have their slurπes pumped to them as a contnous line of liquid slurry or the slurry could be delivered in isolated globs seperated and forced through the supply lines by bursts of pressunzed gas as shown in FIGS 103 and 103 1 ""Increasing Peel-Strenαth By Application of Chemical Vapor Deposition fCVD) Film Rings As the Attachment Adhesive Another possible way of increasing peel-strength is to somehow apply a πng of extremely strong mateπal around the hars that are to be held together. The inorganic solids formed by Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) are much stronger than polymer-based adhesives. CVD is a process that introduces two or more gases into an area and ttien exposes them to an energy source such as heat. The energy causes a chemical reacton resulting in the deposition of a solid. Many solids formed this way are extremely pure, and as such, extremely strong. CVD nngs could be generated around hars to be attached by introducing gases and energetic light, or other energy, into the attachment chamber. The outputs would be arranged in a stack similar to the one shown by FIG.104 and previously descπbed. The gases would be output by nozzles very similar to those previously descnbed for use with liquids. The energetic light, most likely Infra-Red (I.R.), could be output by a tne-shaped pπsm that carπes light via internal reflecton This light transport system would take a configuration much like the one previously descnbed for carrying U.V., in order to effect adhesive cuπng. A vacuum intake might be used to removed excess gases. In order to contain the gases in the attachment chambers, the pmcher should make mtmate contact with the left wall of the attachment chamber. The seal between the left wall and the pmcher might be increased by making the pmcher out of or attaching to it a soft flexible mateπal. For example, small sheets of rubber placed on the exteπor of pmcher and extended partially over its notches could help increase this seal. The CVD system could use the following attributes to help enhance its function: -The inteπor notches of the pinchers could be reflective so that they reflect any light that goes through or around the hars in the attachment chamber back at the hars. This reflectve surface will also help prevent the pinchers from themselves being significantly heated by the energy source. -Altematvely, the pinchers could have their own internal reflecton light transport system constructed into their inteπor. This system would be similar the U V. transport system previously descnbed, except it would be constructed in the inteπor of the moving pinchers instead of the inteπor of state portions of the attachment stack. -The pinchers should be cooled either internally or externally by fluid. If an internal system is used, this fluid cooling system would most likely use a closed-loop coolant circulaton system, similar to that previously descnbed for cooling left wall nozzles of the attachment stack. If an external cooling system is used, it would most likely would be based on left wall output nozzles spraying a cooling fluid through the attachment chamber and onto the pmcher's interior surface. -The small bundle of hars to be attached in each attachment chamber should be quickly heated up with focused I.R.. Presumably, if a low enough frequency of I R. is used, it would deeply penetrate and heat up the entre bundle at once rather than being stopped by the most superficial surfaces of the bundle -If the I.R. cant pentrate the bundle well enough, the of use focusing reflectors on the inside of the pmcher that reflect any light that went around each har bundle back at specific point said har bundles could be provided. This will provide the light necessary to cause vapor deposition on sides of the har bundles far relative to the left wall optical outputs. ESelow are some charactenstics and dimensions that CVD nngs attaching har bundles should ideally have, but they are not limitations -Diameter of one har is about 50.7 microns -The CVD πng around attached hars should be 50-300 microns high, or long relative to the length of the har. -The πng's wall thickness should be about 3-5 microns -The πng's diameter should be 100-200 microns -Ideally, this πng should be clear -The πng should have a high tensile strength -The πng should be applied in about .25 seconds or less -The applicaton temperature should be <140-320 degrees C -Ideally, it should be bπttlθ enough to be smashed off or somehow chemcially dissolvable, such as by an acid. For example, calcium carbonate can be formed as a clear solid that can be dissolvable by moderate strength acids. ""Increasing Peel-Strength By Applying Coating Patterns to keratin fibers (as opposed to entire surface uniform coatings! Coating patterns applied to the surface of the har extensions might could be used to either increase adhesive peel-strength or decrease the coefficient of fπcton of a har extension's surface, thereby, making peeling an attachment point apart much more difficult. Such coatng patterns would most likely be applied duπng tine har extension manufactunng process. Thus, for more details on this consult the secton of this document that deals with har extension manufactunng. '"Utility Features .Saftey/Maintenencei-Stack Level"* The attachment stack might have certain features incorporated into it that ensure safety and system mamtence I call these features utility features. The following are such utility features: ""Escaped Electro-Magnetic Radiation Detector In systems that use intense ulfra violet, or any other type of intense electro-magnetc radiaton, detectors might be used to detect escaped electro-magnetc radiaton. Usually, when intense electro-magnetic radiaton is used, it will be confined to a closed area. For example, the p cher, by being pressed against the left wall, could in large part be used to form this closed confining area The isolaton of this area could be further aded by an attachment chamber seal as previously descπbed for containing gases in the CVD system. However, if there is a breach in this closed area allowing electro-magnetic radiation to escape, a detector could alert of this. The alert could merely be audible, visual, or might shut the entire attachment system off. The detector should be placed along a line of sight to the attachment area where the electromagnetic radiation is being used. It may be placed above or below the attachment stack or even incorporated into the attachment stack as a layer within it. **" Automated Lubπcant and Cleaning Solvent Outputs The moving parts of the attachment stack will benefit from ocassionally being lubπcated and cleaned. For this reason, it might be advantageous to incorporate automated lubπcant and cleaning solvent outputs into the attachment stack circuit itself In this case, the outputs could be positoned in a similar manner to the adhesive outputs. Alternatively, the outputs could be configured in an entirely different manner For example, placed well above the attachment stack, perhaps, as a part independent of it. Cleaning and lubπcation could be perfomered by introducing solvents and lubπcants seperately. Alternatively, a solvent, such as acetone, could be mixed with a light lubncatng oil. Most of the used solution could be drained into a reservoir Very likely, this resevoir means would include a fixture to hold ttne handle unit and a lid to prevent splashes. The acetone portion of the residual solution would evaporate leaving the lubicaton portion behind on the moving surfaces in the attachment stack. This cleaning process could be tngger automatcally, for example, between every salon client. Duπng this automate tπggeπng, the moving parts of the system would likely be actvated so as to distπbute the soluton evenly. Acetone itself is a disinfectant. However, inclusion of other disinfects, if necessary, could guarantee absolute cleanliness between clients. At certain tmes automatcally or manually tπggered by a user, the internal fluid supply lines (such as for adhesive) might be cleaned by flushing them with solvents and/or hot fluids. These flushing fluids might simply be deliver out of the fluid outputs (nozzles) or they could be actuated back and forth in the lines in a forward and reversing moton, perhaps, under great pressure. To facilitate troducton of cleaning fluids the supply lines might have valves that shunt their normal fluid supplies in preference for the flushing-fluid supply [[Hair Extension Supply and Storage]] "*Hair Extension Feed Using Clips"* The har extension holding clips, descπbed in the onginal embodiment, can be sad to be a pinching holding means because they hold har extensions by pinching them. When supplying the system with har extensions using holding clips, there are several concerns: " ♦• Bending har extensions over connectivity bndges while keening them as firms as possible with the straghtening peg: Refemng to FIG. 27, in order to give tine har extensions plenty of room to bend over the attachment stack's connectvity bndges without causing a significant vertical curve in the har extensions, ttie connectvity bπdges could be placed even with, or well behind, position C where ttne har hopper is wide and hasnt narrowed yet. In such a configuration, the har extensions are free to bend more to the sides than if they were forced to bend over a connectivity bndge placed even with positon D where the har extension hopper's passageways narrow. Possibly, all connectivity bndges could be placed behind the rearmost har extensions and the stragtening pegs A, in FIG.28, of the har extension clips . This would mean that the har extension tps would never have to bend over a connectvity bndge. Also, this would mean that the straghtening peg could contnue all the way down to the floor of the har extension channel (tp trench). This would give further support from all sides for even very curly hair extension tps. The disadvantage to this design is that all tnes whether those of the moving hair handlers, or some part of the statonary guide channels, must be made longer. This increase in length will make them less structurally stable. In configuratons where the straightening peg starts behind the connectvity bπdges, at least it could be brought down as close to them as it needs to be. Fortunately, the straghtening peg only has to keep the har extensions πgid down through the thickness of the har haidlers because the pmcher will pull the lower portons of the har extensions into alignment. ""Hair Extension Tip Flexibility When a har extension is bent over a connectvity bndge, the slope of its bend angle is largely set by the bottom of the straghtening peg. If the straghtening peg comes down close enough to the top connectivity bπdge, the slope of the bend angle can be almost a πght angle. If tne straightening peg comes less close to the top connectvity bndge, the slope of the bend angle will be less sharp. The sharper the liar's bend angle, the more spπng force in it and the faster the har will fling over the far edge of the topmost connectvity bndge. Air currents could be used to straighten har extension tps that are not being held in an adequately stiff manner by the har extension dispensing system. For example, ar blown straight down into the attachment area from nozzles above sad area could straighten har extensions tips. An excellent place to put such nozzles would be in the inteπor and underside of the har hopper's channel obstructions. Such nozzles could be fed with ar by a hollow tined-manifold. The length of the tines from where their connectivity bndges end to where their functional areas begin should, generally, at least be equal to the depth in the attachment stack from the top connectvity bndge that har extension must pass over down to the desired depth of the hair extension tip. This will allow hairs to fully straghten out in the hair extension tp trench C, in FIG 3, before coming in contact with any functional areas of the har handlers. Previously, I sad that the sides of the clips serve much the same functon as the sides of a cπmp on a paintbrush. Furtherstll, the narrowed sides of the har hopper also ad this funton, and they help at lower levels closer to the har handlers The tps of the held-har extensions extend down into a passage with vertically parallel walls F on two sides, as shown in FIG.27, and a third obstructing wall G at the front. This third obstructing wall, which is part of the channel obstructon, is placed generally above the attachment area. It prevents the hair extensions from advancing too far forward past the attachment area. Of course, its exact placement depends on empiπcal calibraton, and we may want the har extension top to advance a little past the attachment area. The har extensions are usually held at a short enough distance from their tps so that their tips extend down in a relatively stiff manner. These tips are inserted downward into a cavity carved into the attachment stack. This cavity is know as the tip trench. This cavity and the tips of the har extensions inserted into it extend at least down to the depth of those har handlers responsible for har isolation. Because of the above-descnbβd factors, the hair extensions in each clip will be move with it as a bunch to the functional areas of the har handlers. The har extensions will be moved forward along a line largely perpendicular to the sides of their erect tips. The clips must pinch the har extensions with enough force that they do not fall out dunng movement and do not fall out as their previously attached neighbors slide by them, as said neighbors are pulled from the clip. " • NON-CLIP-BASED Hair Extension Feed"* ""Substitue Conveyor belts for clips -The parallel pinch AND convey to attachertConvevor Belt Feedi A non-clip based system that holds and moves hair extensions by using largely parallel pinching surfaces can be configured. It could best be descnbed as a rotary conveyor system that pinches between opposing parts. Although two rotatng opposing solid objects, such as two disks, fall under this definition and could be used, most likely it would take the configuraton of two opposing conveyor belts which pinch har extensions together between each other and whose inteπor belt portions both move in the same linear direction. Sad belts can be visualized as using the two opposing belt surfaces to substitute for the two opposing surfaces of the har extension clips previously descπbed. However, while the har extensions in ttne clips move with the clips, in a conveyor system they could be said to move through the system as a whole to a larger extent than ttney move with it As with the clip-fed system, the har extensions most likely move in a line largely perpendicular to their shafts The conveyor belt system itself must be fed with har extensions, and this can be done in any of the following ways: -Har holding clips either distant or on the the handle unit itself could be the source. Distant meaning that they are not on the handle unit but somewhere such as the base unit. If the source har extension holding clips are on the handle unit itself, the pinching conveyor system will be positioned on the handle unit between sad clips and the attachment area where it bπngs the har extensions. -A har extension remover system that cut scalp hars off the scalp hair or removes har extensions, as previously descnbed. -A spool system that unwinds to feed the conveyor belt. This spool will either have to be wound with hair extensions already cut to length, or allied with a cutting means that cuts them duπng unwinding. -A pile of free har extensions lying largely parallel to each other in a container such as a box. A funneling hopper type means might be used to initially guide hars from this pile into the conveyor system. ""The parallel pinch AND convey har extensions using a thr ead-the-eye-of-the-needle type design: Another means of dispensing har extensions involves unwinding them from a spool, therefrom, threading them, perhaps, directy into the attachment areas in which they are needed. There are two basic ways to unwind har extensions from a spool: Refemng to FIG. 105, the first way A is to sunound the spool with a path guide means B that will only allow hair extensions C unwound from the spool to extend only along the path bounded by sad path guide means. Such a system could externally supply a rotational force to the source spool D causing it to rotate in the direction that causes har extensions on the spool to unwind. The har extensions would be guided by the path guide means to their functional target area E. Often, such a functional target area is an attachment chamber. The second way F, in FIG. 105.1 , is to feed the har extensions on the spool into a powered rotating or reciprocating engagement- conveyance means G that pulls on them causing them to unwind from their source spool. (Engagement most likely by pinching but other means such as hooking are possible ) This rotatng or reciprocatng pinching means may move har extensions largely tangent or parallel to its rotatng or reciprocatng surface. After the har extension tips exit sad engagement-conveyance means G, they can be directed either to a path-guide means H that guides them to insertion in their functonal target area I or without a path-guide means directy into their functonal target area I in which ttney will be sereted. A path-guide H is used when the conveyance means is not close enough to its functonal target area to guarantee that har extensions will be inserted in to it. This type of system usually will need a hair extension cutting means placed between the engagement-conveyance means and the functonal target area This way, the har extensions coming off the spool will be cut to the desired length. Of course, a hybnd J, shown in FIG. 105.2, of the above two unwinding systems can be configured. It may contan any or all of the above-descπbed components working in combinaton For example, it may contan a spool that is externally supplied with a rotational force in the direction which causes har extensions on sad spool to unwind; it may contan a path-guide means K that directs hair extensions into a rotating or reciprocating engagement-conveyance means; it may also contan a second path guide means L which guides har extensions from a pinching conveyance means into a functional target area If need be, it may contain a har extension cutting means This cutting means need NOT necessaπly be placed between the pinching conveyance means and the functional target area Different Types of Functonal Target Areas The functonal-target area descnbed above can be any one of, but not limited to, the following areas: Any area along the har extension supply channel or pathway that feeds the attachment chambers This includes but is not limited to the following. . . -Into the areas of the har extension channel that precede the metenng areas. -Into metenng areas -Into holding areas (They will be descπbed later.) -Into attachment areas or attachment chambers -Any other area that needs har extensions fed into it Different Types of Rotating or Reciprocatng Hair Exentension Conveyance Means The rotatng or reciprocatng hair extension engagement-conveyance means descnbed above can take on several configuratons including but not limit to: 1. Rotatng belts or cylinders that themselves press against other rotatng belts, cylinders, or state surfaces in order to both pinch and move har extensions between. 2. A part that pinches har extensions (in the manner descnbed above) and moves along a largely a straght line. Then, it releases its pinch, retracts backwards. It repeats this process agan by re-establishing its pinch and moving forward agan. 3. A rotatng har extension grasping conveyance means that has pinching and releasing members mounted on a rotating cylinder or belt. It is similar mechanism to that is used by a commeπcial hair removal product called the Braun Silk-Epil. 4. As in #3, except the rotatng surface does not engage by pinching but some other hair fiber engagement means such as a surface coated with a stcky substance, an attractve static electncal charge on its surface, or having small hooks or similar har engagment features on its surface. Different Ways of Spooling Hair Extensions The hair extensions can be spooled in several different configurations including but not limited to: 1. One single long continous har fiber per spool that needs to be cut to length after it is unspooled. 2. Many long contnous har fibers in parallel per spool. They are unspooled together, and each needs to be cut to length after unspooling. 3. The har extensions have already been cut to length before being spooled. When unspooled, they usually will not need to be cut to length. Hair Extension Wefts Can be Unspooled and Attached In additon to the entrely linear har extensions descπbed above, har extension wefts can also be unspooled and attached to the head Har extensions wefts are of multiple har extensions connected together with a largely perpendicular (to their lengths) member which is usually flexible and may be a fiber itself. Unspooling of har extension wefts can be accomplished in much the same manner as har extenions. Unspooled har extension wefts can be applied in the following manner 1. Adhesive may be applied to the lower portions of the har extension wefts, most likely the unifying portions (those perpendicular to the har extensions) of the har extension wefts. This can be done anytime after unspooling. The adhesive can be applied directy to the weft before it touches the scalp or head hars. Altematvely, it can be applied to the scalp or head hars directy. The har extension wefts can be attached directy to the scalp or to the sides of head hars. 2. Har extension attachment can be can be achieved by running a thread or fiber back and forth through both the lower portons of the har extension weft and lower portions of the scalp hars, thereby, sewing the har extension weft to the lower portions of natural scalp hars. In this configuration, the thread or fiber itself could be unwound from a spool, perhaps the same spool, as the har extension weft which it will attach. (Such an oscillating sttch pattern is likely based on a mechanism functionally equivalent to a sewing machine.) 3. Once the first portion of a weft is attached to the head, the remaning portons can be unspooled simply by the tension that results in the weft as the system is moved over the scalp. Hair Extension Weft Placement Among Natural Scalp Hairs How ever they are attached, har extension wefts have to be guided into areas where the natural scalp hars have been moved aside To accomplish this spooled har extension wefts M, in 105.3, are unspooled into recessed attachment areas N from where hars have been displaced, by the attachment stack tnes O Where sad unspooled har extension weft tps are led towards the recessed attachment areas by one or more of, but not limited to, the following methods: -Har weft assembly stffness and an externally applied rotatonal force on the spool -Linear movement of the entre spool assembly towards attachment area -Rotational movement of the spool where the front tps of the har extension wefts are guided into the recessed attachment area by path-guides. -The leading portion of a weft is attached to the head, and the remaning portions are unspooled simply by the tension that results in the weft as the system is moved over the scalp. -The spooled har is first grasped by a pinching means that moves it to the attachment area. Subsequent unspooling is achieved because the har extension . . . .. . has been attached causing the spool unwind to relieve tension of the extension as the device is moved over the scalp . . . is subject to a cycle of repeated or continous engagement and advancement towards tine attachment area, such as by the engagement conveyance system descnbed above. Note: Although unspooling is the prefened method for dispensing har extension wefts among natural scalp hars, the above method for dispensing har wefts through a recessed area in the attachment stack's tnes can be adapted for use with other har extension dispensing means. For example, such wefts could be held by clips or any other of the non-weft har extension dispensing means discussed could be adapted. Also, note that the recessed attachment areas descibed for wefts are not identcal to the attachment areas descnbed in the onginal embodiment. When we speak of attachment areas, not in reference to wefts, we typically will mean a type more like that descirbed for the onginal embodiment. Further, these recessed area N in FIG 105.3 neednt be open to the har channels, rather they could be holes through the tnes that are entrely closed on all sides. Finally, long har wefts neednt be the only type of har extensions attached to the scalp or scalp hars through a recessed area like N, unified bunches of har extenions could also. ""Unified Hair Extension Bunch Dispensing System: Refemng to FIG 106, a unified bunch har extension bunch dispensing system where bunches of hair extensions have their tips unified together, usually by a unifying object such as by an anchor/bead disk that, might already or may at sometime, have adhesive applied to its surface and will be attached either to the scalp and/or scalp hars: 1.Where before dispensing the unifying objects are held in an interlocking rail/frame/bracket configuraton, as shown by "Pure Rail Interlock Type Clip" in FIGS. 106.1 and 106.2. -Where sad unifying objects are slid down the ral, and the rail itself remans stll. This could be facilitated by a spπng means pushing directy on the unifying anchor beads themselves. -Alternatively, where the entire ral assembly moves forward to advance a new unified bunch towards the attachment area. This could be facilitated by a spπng means pushing on the ral assembly rather than ttie anchor beads directy 2 Where the har extension portons are pinched and the unifying anchor bead portons are held in or against a ral assembly, as shown by "Pinch and SlideAlong Ral-Type Clip" in FIGS. 1063 and 1064 -Where sad unifying objects are slid down the ral, and the rail itself remans stll This could be facilitated by a spπng means pushing directy on the unifying anchor beads themselves -Altematvely, where the entire ral assembly moves forward to advance a new unified bunch towards the attachment area This could be facilitated by spπng means pushing on the ral assembly rather than the anchor beads directy 3 Where the har extension bunches are pinched but no rail or bracket is used to directy stabilize the unifying anchor beads In other words, the har extensions bunches are held in hair extension clips, as descnbed in the onginal embodiment The unifying anchor portons, if aiy, do not secure said har extensions in sad clips However, unifying anchor portons would likely be used to either help isolate a limited bunch of har extensions, so the attachment system doesnt have to, or to attach sad bunch to the scalp For example, each unifying anchor portion could facilitate the attachment of a bunch of har extensions directy to a bald scalp Perhaps, the bottom of sad bead could even have a stcky adhesive pre-applied to it Likewise, each unifying anchor could attach itself and.thereby, its bunch of hars to the sides of natural scalp hars Note. Of course, whenever har extensions have pellet-like anchors at their bases, the loading system very likely will manipulate these pellet-like anchors directy in preference to the fiborous portons The manipulatons could use the familiar har handler mechanisms, however, scaled up to deal with pellet-like structures rather than the thinner har fibers Also regardless of how bunches of har extensions are attached together said bunches might be attached directy to the scalp For example, har extensions might be held into bunches by adhesives or being melded together, such as by heat or chemicals ** *Safegaur ts Against Deviant Processes'" ""Means of handling Deviant Hars To Prevent Unmetered Hars from Enteπng the Attachment Area. Extremely short scalp hars can cause several problems The man problem that sad short hars may cause is that they are too short to be manipulated accurately by the har handlers In such a case, an overly short scalp har might pass under the entrance gates into an attachment chamber with another scalp har As such, two scalp hars might undesirably get attached together A second problem with overly short scalp hairs is that they might not be long enough to securely attach har extensions to Finally, in sophistcated embodiments of this inventon where sensors are used, short hars might be long enough to tπgger a sensor but too short to be reliably kept straght by the har straghtening system and, as such, might not successfully be attached to har extensions In other words, the har sensor system would be tπcked into telling the computer to behave as if it were dealing with a viable scalp hair when it really was not To avoid these problems with overly short scalp hairs, it is best to make sure that such hairs lie relatvely flat against the scalp To a certain extent, short hars might not be effectvely held by the har straightener and will fall to the scalp on their own However, all overly short hars will not do this For this reason, we have to take acton to make them lay flat aganst the scalp There are at least two ways to do this One way is to use ar currents that force all scalp hairs that are too short to be held by the tensionmg har straghtener towards the scalp A second way is to tπgger the har handlers in such a manner that they will push down any har that may have entered the attachment area in an unauthoπzed manner There are several ways to use ar currents to force overly short scalp hars to lie flat Positve pressure air cunents can be directed downwards through the vertical thickness of the attachment area such as to flatten stray short hars in or near the attachment area These downward positive pressure ar currents might be supplied from nozzles that point largely straght down over the the attachment area Using a hollow har hopper channel obstructon with an ar output on its underside is an excellent way to mount ar outputs for such a downward pointing arflow Alternatively, positive pressure nozzles can be positioned on a vertical wall in the attachment area, in a similar manner that the adhesive outputs are Such nozzles will probably not generate an exclusively downward airflow Instead, the arflow will create a positive pressure enviroment in the attachment area with arflow exploding out in all directions This positive pressure will tend to push stray scalp hars away from that attachment area causing them to lie down aganst the scalp Directing an arflow largely parallel and along the bottom of the attachment stack will also usually cause stray hars to lie down This arflow can be generated using blown positive pressure ar or sucked negative pressure ar The ar outputs, or intakes, can be placed most anywhere below the attachment stack A highly suitable locaton would be molding ar outputs, or intakes, into the portions of the belt buckle that hang below the attachment stack Most ideally, such positve pressure outputs could be placed vertically between the bottom the the attachment stack and the bend-under system, assuming the kind of bend-under system that hangs below the attachment stack is used Alternatively, the ar outputs could also be placed below and to the sides of the attachment stack A great advantage of using airflow is that it can be directed or its intensity increased so that not only are loose hars made to lie down in the attachment area but also the areas that precede the attachment stack where sensors might be used This will help prevent sensors from being tπggered by inviable overly short scalp hars Earlier, I mentoned that har handlers could be used to make overly short scalp hars lie down To do this, certain har handlers that overlie the attachment area are tπggered at the last possible moment before the authoπzed scalp hars are brought in This will clear the attachment area of short hars that may have slipped under the higher-lying har isolation system and entrance gates An ideal har handler to use for this would be a dedicated attachment area pushout actuator, or a part that is functionally equivalent Ideally, the har handlers used for this purpose should be placed as close to the scalp as possible This is because har handlers at higher levels might actually be too high to even come in contact with certan short scalp hars let alone flatten them As such, pushout-actuator type har handlers should, ideally, be placed below most of the attachment nozzles and perhaps below the entre attachment stack Possibly, ttie pullback hook could help clear the attachment area of short scalp hars One part that has two-axis motion that can act both as a attachment-area-pushout actuator and pullback in one might be ideal for this purpose If any type of pullback hook is used for this purpose, it should be placed as close to the scalp as possible Dealing with har extensions that do not get attached to scalp hars. Har extensions brought into the attachment area may not always get attached to scalp hars This may happen because a conesponding scalp har is not present to be attached or some type of adhesive malfunction When it does happen, any unattached har extensions will tend to reman in the attachment area They will not be pulled away by the pullback hooks and bend-under system the same way har extensions attached to scalp hairs are This presents the problem of what do to with the remaning unattached har extensions If nothing is done, they will get in the way and if enough of them are allowed to accumulate they might jam the system Clearly, these har extensions should somehow be removed from the attachment area Recycling Unattached Hair Extensions One way to remove the hair extensions would be in a manner that allows them to be recycled One possibility for recycling them would be to open the har extension entrance gate closest to the attachment area and any other gates between sad entrance gate and the har extension pushback gate The pushback gate (gate farthest away from attachment area) itself should reman closed Some type of har handler that is capable of forcing the har extensions backwards behind the entrance gate should be employed Next, the entrance gate closest to the attachment area should be closed This would put the unused har extensions between the pushback gate and the entrance gate nearest the attachment area Next the pushback gate (gate farthest away from attachment area) should be opened Once agan, the har extensions should be forced backwards behind the pushback gate The pushback gate should be closed and the har extension have now been successfully recycled, because they are put back with the bunch that they oπgmally came from and are ready to be metered out agan However, the recycling approach descπbed above has a couple disadvantages First, it takes har extensions that may be coated with adhesive out of the attachment area and puts them in contact again with other har extensions and the har handlers This might cause adhesive to get in an undesirable locaton, or the har handlers simply might not process adhesive coated hars effectively causing them to jam the system A second disadvantage is that this approach makes it impossible to meter out a new group of hair extensions while the group ahead of them is being attached For these reasons, a har extension recycling approach that does not require the har extensions to leave the attachment area is preferable One such har extension recycling approach is descirbed by the steps below 1 Use the p ushout actuator to push attached hars out of the attachment area Although placed relatively close to the scalp, the pushout actuator should be placed far enough above the scalp that it effectvely moves the har extension tps 2 Move tine slide out preventer out over the attachment area 3 Tπgger the pullback hook It will pull the scalp hars aid attached har extensions backwards, but not the unattached har extensions Instead, the unattached har extension tps will flexibly yield to the under-passing pullback hook, as such, remaning to the πght of the pushout actuator near the attachment area To facilitate this, the pullback hook should be placed close to the scalp, probably below even the adhesive nozzle stack 4 As an optional step Move a har extension distπbutor (like the pmcher except it is notchless and only a single-level thick It only moves to the left about as far as the πght edge of the slide-out preventer It may be mounted on a flexibly-jointed tne to make sure does it does not go too far past sad slide out preventer edge ) Its actons will distπbute har extensions evenly along tne nght edge of the slide-out preventer 5 Make the har extension transport-forward gate carry the next group of har extensions into their positons in the attachment area 6 Tngger the pincher's movement towards the left wall This will, as evenly as possible fill the pinchers notches with the recylced har extensions (Evenly because the recylced har extensions have been pressed up evenly along the πght edge of the slide out preventer ) 7 Before the p cher has completely reached the left wall, when its front is largely even with the πght edge of the slide out preventer make the slide out preventer retract This will allow the recylced har extension to join the new group of unattached har extensions, in individual notches of the pmcher 8 Close the slide out preventer over the attachment area notches once agan 9 Retract the pmcher to the πght, away from the har extensions The har extensions will remain divided in notches because the har extension transport forward gate has remaned in the attachment area, and the slide out preventer guarantees that they will stay in the har extension transport forward gate's notches 10 Make the scalp har transport forward gate carry the next group of scalp hars into the attachment area 11 Make the pmcher move towards the left 12 After the pmcher has made it partially under the slide out preventer, but usually before the p cher makes it all the way to the left, retract the slide out preventer Scalp hars have now joined the new and recycled har extensions in individual pmcher notches, also know as attachment chambers when pressed up aganst the left wall The attachment process may now occur If all goes well, all the unattached recycled and new hair extensions will be attached to scalp hairs this tme 13 Optonal In order to buffer an excess of unattached har extensions, the har extension transport-forward gate could be configured with extra notches directly behind, or in front of, those that match up with attachment chambers These extra notches would not be filled with new har extension, nor would they match up with the underlying nozzle stack in order to form attachment chambers The sole purpose of these extra notches is to provide a temporary space for excess unattached har extension in case an unusually large number fal to attach in a given time peπod Thus, their reuse can be spread out over several attachment cycles instead of jammg the attachment chambers on a single cycle In order to make sure the unattached har extensions participate in the above process, we should make sure they enter the notches of the har extension transport-forward gate As shown in FIG 107, this can be achieved by having some structure like a portion of the channel wall or another har handler overhanging, or underlying, the front and back sub-tnes A and B, respectvely, of said har extension transport-forward gate This is to make sure the unattached har extensions only have access to the notches of tne transport-forward gate, and they cannot get positioned in front or back of it Refemng to FIG 107, this overhanging, or underlying, structure C is shown in hatching On a similar note, it is advisable to allow the pullback hook gate, or some other portion of the system, to completely overhang, or underlie, the pmcher notches in their recessed positions to πght in order to prevent entry of exiting hairs into sad notches If exiting hars were allowed to reside in the recessed p cher notches while the pullback hook gate is moving backwards, they could cause a jam Disposing of Unattached Hair Extensions There are some situations and embodiments of this inventon where it would be more desirable to dispose of, rather than recycle, unattached har extensions This is especially true in embodiments which allow adhesive to progressively build up on unattached har extensions In such cases, so much adhesive might build up on a har extension tp that it results in har extensions getting jamed in the pmcher notches, or elsewhere in the system To facilitate disposal of such adhesive-build-up-tpped har extensions, some part needs to pull them from the system The best way for such a part do this is to hook them in their narrower areas above where adhesive is building up on their tips As sad hooking part moves, the hair extensions will slide through it untl the hooking means encounters the bead of thickened adhesive near each s tp This will cause each such har extension to be pulled from its holding clip and moved towards disposal in the bend-under system The most suitable part to participate as a hooking means is the pullback hook However, the pullback hook should be configured somewhat differenty than previously descnbed First of all, the pullback hook should be placed above, not below, the adhesive applicaton nozzles Additionally, the mteπor notch-width of sad pullback hook should be relatvely nanow It will likely be narrower than the notches of the pmcher This way har extensions are pulled from the system before the build up on their tps gets wide enough to jam the pincher's notches If it is undesirable for the pullback hook to have only a single narrow notch, one wider notch could be divided into a few narrow notches by placing tnes in the pullback hook's inteπor width parallel to its length and axis of movement In summary, the narrowness of the pullback hook's intenor notch or notches prevent the har extension tips from flexibly yielding overtop of it In order for the pullback hook to feed the bend-under system with har extensions, it must bπng sad har extensions in contact with the bend-under belt system Usually, this process is facilitated by the har extensions being attached to scalp hars which help pull the har extensions attached to themselves into the bend-under system However, when dealing with unattached har extensions, the har extensions must be fed directy into the bend-under system One solution to facilitate this is to place the bend-under system not below the attachment stack levels, but within the attachment stack at about the same level as the attachment nozzles Unfortunately, this is not a very attractive solution because it presents the problem of routing the supply lines that feed the nozzle stack around the bend-under belt system A more attractive solution would be to configure the pullback hook system so that it pulls to a point behind the engagement point of the bend-under belt system, and then moves itself and the hars within it back again over said engagement point This process would allow unattached har extensions to be pulled far enough from their clips that slack is generated in sad hair extensions This slack would allow the har extensions to dangle vertically beneath the bottom of the attachment stack at which point they could be engaged by the bend-under belt system However this system would functon most ideally if the pullback hooks were given a slighty different design In said design, the pullback hooks should be configured in a shape almost identcal to the scalp har transport-forward gates, where notches of sad pullback hook are open to the lefthand side, as those of the scalp-har-transport-forward gates and pmcher are in the onginal embodiment Sad notches will likely be somewhat thinner than the notches of the pmcher Such a pullback hook might be given multi-axis movement, so it could move towards the left over the notches of the push-out actuator in front of the exit channel, thereby, placing the exitng hars in its notches Next, it would have to move straght back with the familiar path of movement for the pullback hook Specifically, a path that is parallel to the exit channel and towards its back Third, after moving past the front of the bend-under system, it would have to backtrack a short distance, thereby, coming in front of the bend-under belt system Finally, it might move off to the nght so that it no longer overhangs the exit channel This final movement would cause it to completely get out of the way of the slackened har extensions allowing them to fully drop into or in front of the bend-under system Of course, before the cycle could repeat, this special pullback hook would have to move straight forward, preferably, while remaning completely to the nght side of the exit channel and not overhanging it at all Use Sensors to Prevent Unpaired Hair Extensions Of course, the best way to deal with har extensions becoming unpaired with scalp hairs is not allow the situation to occur in the first place This can be achieved by using a system that senses when a scalp har is present in a metenng area, and doesnt allow har extensions to enter an attachment chamber unpared ""Means of Handling Deviant Adhesive Application Liquid adhesive is often used as a means of hair attachment In many embodiments this liquid adhesive will not have time to soldify before exiting the system Certain efforts will be made to keep this liquid adhesive from getting on the parts in the attachment stack Most of these efforts occur in the attachment chamber and they include, but are not limited to, using a vacuum to suck away any excess adhesive, using a solvent wash to wash away any excess adhesive, and coatng the har-applied adhesive with a protectve coatng The nature of the protectve coatng can be temporary such as a coatng of liquid hot wax (or functonal-equivalent) that is cooled and hardens before ever leaving the attachment chamber. In which case, the protected adhesive is given several minutes to cure, and then the protectve coatng is removed by dissolving it off, for example with hot oil. Altematvely, the protectve coatng might be permanent For example, small powder particles be sprayed over the adhesive (such as by introducing an ar-blown suspension through a left wall output). These small particles would stck to the adhesive, but shield the adhesive from coming in contact with anything external to it While some of the most effective adhesive control measures occur in the attachment chamber and are of a similar nature to those just descnbed, further measures could be taken to prevent any adhesive from rubbing off of the hars as they exit the attachment system. The following are two such measures: 1. In order to prevent stray adhesive from stcking to attachment stack channels, Teflon coat (or functonal-equivalent) not j ust the faces of the channels and hair handlers but also their vertical sides. This may include the vertical sides of all of the lower channel walls. 2. Take care to prevent stray adhesive from sticking to the bend-under belts. In additon to using Teflon belts (or functonal- equivalent), make sure the belt grabs hars above the adhesive level by making sure the pully πbs hold the belt assembly sufficienty above the scalp, like stlts. Also or instead, contnually run the belts through a lubπcant/solvent solution The applicaton of this soluton could occur in the base unit, or anywhere along the path of the belts, where a resevoir, or other soluton applicaton means, could be brought into contact with the belts. [[Multi-Chamber/Cycle Systems]] ♦ "Moving Hair Handler System Optimization*" ""Division of the Pushback and Transport-Forward Fuctions Previously, a multple-pushback gate system compnsed of multiple-pushback gates all on one part was presented. I will call this type of pushback gate a compound-multiple-pushback gate because several pushback gates are attached as one piece. Alternatively, the multiple pushback gate system can also have the multiple pushback gates configurated as seperate objects, perhaps etched from separate sheets of metal. These independent pushback gates would function in an identical manner to the compound vaπety previously shown. Specifically, those pushback gates closest to the attachment area would close first followed by the next closest. The gate closing would continue in this seπal manner untl all the the pushback gates had closed. This configuraton of seperate independent pushback gates will generally take up less width than than the one-part compound-pushback gates This is because independent pushback gates do not have to be staggered width-wise as ttney do on a compound pushback gate. Although possible, it would not be as easy to move independent pushback gates forward as it is the compound vaπety. Thus, it is more difficult to use the independent pushback gates for the purpose of transporting the isolated hars to the attachment area than it is to use a single compound pushback gate. Consequenty, a dedicated transport-forward gate should be used, instead. Such a gate is very similar to a compound multiple pushback gate except that its notches can have blunt fronts and its gates need not be staggered. A drawing of such a dedicated transport forward gate A is shown in FIG. 119. Also, FIG. 108 shows a dedicated transport forward gate. The dedicated transport- forward gate can have this configuraton because the hars have already been isolated and cleared out of its way by the independent pushback gates. The dedicated transport-forward gate's notchs and tnes line up with those of all of ttne independent pushback gates. Once hars are chambered between the independent pushback gates, the dedicated transport-forward gate first slides out over the width of the channel. Next, the independent pushback gates are retracted and the dedicated transport-forward gate moves forward carrying the isolated hairs in its notches. When it stops, its notches will be lined up with the adhesive applicaton nozzles. When pushback gates are used in this manner, they can also be considered to have a holding functon. Consequently, they can also be considered holding gates B, in FIG. 119. The area where they hold the hars so that the transport-forward gate can engage them will be referred to as the holding area the holding is compnsed of holding area notches C. ""Multi-Svstem Simplification Overlapping the Holding and Metenng Areas is Not Necessary If something else, other than the pusback gates whose meteπng areas coincide with their holding areas, could isolate hars and feed them one at a tme to the holding area, the holding gates could be configurated as dedicated holding gates as opposed to holding gates which also act as pushback gates. Unlike pushback gates, dedicated holding gates could be placed to concide with the attachment area and its attachment chambers. This would mean that no transport-forward gates would be needed because the hars would already be correcty positon in the attachment area. Although this simpi fies the design, it is less desirable because har attaching and filling the holding area cant occur simultaneously. Thus, such a design would slow the system down. Thus, it is still optmal to use transport-forward gates. Sloped Transport-Forward Gate Notches Prevent Hair-Slide Out Refemng to FIG. 108.1 , the transport-forward gates could have sloped notches so that the hars they carry, with forward movement in the direction of arrow A, tend to get directed towards the backs of sad notches. Consequently, the hars being earned get hooked and stay in the notches. This feature lessens the need for a slide out prevention gate. Pushback gates that serve the transport-forward function are themselves a form of transport forward gate and could have sloped notches themselves However, the slope of their notches is more likely to be limited to only the most inteπor regions so that the more lateral regions can act as pushback gates in the manner of the onginal embodiment. Sloped Attachment Area Rear Wall Lessens Need for Pushout Actuator In order to lessen the need for a pushout actuator or pullback hook, those areas of ttne har extension pathway that lie in front of the har extension channel could be sloped. Refernng to FIG. 109, the lowest floor level could be sloped in the manner, as shown by encircled area A. Likewise, higher levels could be sloped in a similar manner, as shown in FIG. 109 1 by encircled area B. However, the pmcher is probably wider than a flat-fronted (attachment area) pushout actuator, anyway. Thus, channel width would not be further reduced by the elimination of the pushout actuator. Consequenty, there is less need to slope the pathway in order to eliminate the pushout actuator. Entrance Gate Overlap of the Attachment Area Theortically, it might possible for both the scalp side supply system and the har extension supply system to share the same entrance gate. This entrance gate might be continous over the entire attachment area. Alternatively, it might be split into two pro j ections with an open space between ttie over the center of the attachment area. However, this shaπng does limit options because it would require the scalp hars and har extensions to enter the attachment area at the exact same tme. Ideally, each entrance gate should overlap the attachment area no farther than the inteπor edge of its closest bounding notch-tne of its closest transport-forward gate, when sad transport-forward gate is positoned at rest in the attachment area. Entrances gates should not overlap any notches of the transport-forward gates because this would interfere with their functon The advantage of an entrance gate somewhat overlapping the attachment area is that it shortens the distance a har has to travel from the metenng area to it conesponding attachment chamber. A short travel distance is desirable because har extensions and scalp hars that travel relatvely short distances likely reman relatively more perpendicular to the scalp than those that must travel farther. Scalp hars and har extensions that reman more perpendicular to the scalp reman more parallel to each other and as such are easier to bπng together for attachment. Note: By notch-tne, I mean one of the sub- tnes that divide the transport-forward-gate notches and, as such, help compose the functional areas of the transport-forward gates which are positioned on the tps of the channel-level tines of hair-handler tine-assemblies. '"Multi-Chamber Pincher Design'" ""Pmcher Chamber Design The sides walls of the pmcher, (or each pmcher notch), were previously shown to slant forward at the top at a constant angle. However, the pincher-notch sides and the left-wall surfaces that they interface with are not limited to this exact configuraton. As shown in FIG. 10.1 , where the side cross-section of a pincher-notch wall is shown in darker shading on " ♦ Single Hair Isolation Systems"* In the previously descnbed first embodiment, a har or a limited number of hars were isolated in metenng areas formed between entrance gates and pushback gates. However, when dealing with hars of vanable diameter, it will be less likely that the types of pushback gates shown previously can reliably isolate only a single har per metenng area. Since reliably isolatng a single har per metenng area is desirable, refinements need to be made that will allow this. Single har isolaton will often often occur in the metenng area between the front-most entrance gate and rearmost pushback gate. However, often some other means needs to be introduced to subdivide the group of hars in the metenng area There a two broad approaches to the isolaton of one har Both apporaches share the forming of an isolation area, which at least partially isolates one or a very few hars although maybe in a fleeting manner This isolation area is further subdivided such that only one har remains and/or is allowed to escape from it The two approaches are 1. Use sensors to tell where certain hars' diameters start and stop. Use extremely small independently controlled gates to act on what the sensors tell them to isolate one har. 2. Use mechanical gates that progressively subdivide the isolation area pushing out but a single har. Usually, this involves pushing largely backwards all but the front-most single har. I will, first, descnbe some soley mechanical hair isolation schemes that function without sensors Generally, sensors could be introduced to enhances these mechanical schemes and make them run more predictably However, they will likely do fine without sensors " •• Converging-Point Wedging The first veπsions of mechanical har isolation schemes I will discuss fall into the category of what I call converging-point wedging Generally, a narrowing or tnangular shaped isolation area connected to the har channel will be used. Often, it will, at least in part, be formed by an entrance gate, usually, the one responsible for allowing isolated hars out of the single hair isolaton system Refemng to FIG 111 , notce how a tnangular shape A is formed by a diagonally sloping entrance gate edge B imposed on the har channel edge C Hars in the channel are encouraged to press up into this, generally tnangular shaped, converging area formed in the har channel. The first har to reach the point D, regardless of its width, will be in the most stable positon in the isolation area It will be much more difficult to get this front-most har D to move, than it will any of the hairs behind it This is because the front-most har is surrounded on two sides by the firm immovable edges that make up the converging area. In contrast, all other hairs at most, touch the immovable edges on only one side and on all other sides are surrounded by other movable hars Once in this position D, any disturbance, such as vibrating the har channel, exposing the hars in the isolation area to a disturbing force such as ar currents or static electncity, or forcing a mechanical object to run through the isolaton area, will preferentially move the trailing hars, to a much greater extent than the front -most har This property can be used to seperate the trailing hairs from the front-most har D. However, to permanently seperate the trailing hars from the front-most har, an obstructon means should be brought between the trailing hairs and front-most har, after they are seperated. There are vaπous types of obstructions means that can be used to do this. Many of them simultaenously functon as forms of pushback gate means. Below follow examples of several types of such isolation area obstructon means: Flexible Finger Type Isolaton-Area Obstructon Means As shown in FIG 112 step one, one approach is to use flexible finger-like projections A as a supplementary pushback gate means. Supplementary because these finger-like projections can be considered pushback gates themselves These flexible finger-like projections are moved towards the front tip C of the converging area largely along a line bisects the converging area into two halves Duπng their forward movement, as in FIGS 112.1 step two and 112.2 step three, they may even be vibrated so as to help push the unstable non-tip hars B (not at the apex of converging area) out of their way As the unstable non-tp hairs B are displaced by the fingers, they will move backwards away from the front-most apex point As these hars are forced backwards, the flexible finger-like projections might yield to them, as such, allowing their backward movement. Because of their angle of movement, the finger-like projectons will tend to actually press the front-most hair D into the apex, rather than dislodging it. The end result will be that the finger-like projectons in contact with the front-most har will have flexibly yielded to and conformed around mis front-most hair D, as shown in FIG. 112.3 step 4. Thus, this front-most har D will have been isolated from the hars behind it. Within limits, this scheme works regardless of how wide the hars are relatve to each other. Finally, notce how the finger-like projectons tiat can make it, unobstructed by hars, across the channel to its far side insert into notches E These optonal notches stabilize the fingers so that they can maintain their positon and not allow any hars around them from either directon. Shaped-Finger Isolaton-Area Obstructon Means A refinement of the flexible finger-like projection pushback gate means leads to another vaπant of the conver ging-point-wedging hair isolation system. This refinement is to use what I call tapered end spπng fingers. Rather than having spnng fingers with blunt ends, as shown previously, the spnng fingers could be configured to look and behave as shown in this senes FIGS. 113 through 113.2, illustrating three sequential steps Although shown at a different angle, this senes of three drawings should be considred as having spπng fingers at tine end of a har handler tine and taking a path towards the apex of a conveπng isolaton area, just as the spπng fingers in FIGS. 112 through 112.3 were. The tapered shape of the assembly allows it to wedge its way into the isolaton area using less force to displace the hairs in its path. This or any spπng finger assembly constructed with small etched spπng-like parts should usually be sandwiched between two or lying across one firmer supporting layer. Such supporting layers would have largely the same shape as the layer the fingers are formed into. However, the support layers should usually be contnous surfaces with no fingers etched into them Although FIG. 113 shows the spπng fingers etched into a single layer, altematvely, each finger could be formed from a seperate, mdependty moving tne layer. Further, the yielding spπng means could be placed anywhere between t e tne-connectivity bndge and the tip of each finger, not necessaπly as close to the hair-handler functional area as it has been shown up until now This is true of all embodiments that need to get a har handler to stop when obstructed by a sufficientiy immovable hair in its path. Wedge-Shaped Isolaton-Area Obstruction Means Similar to the above pointed spπng fingers is another refinement of the converging-point-wedging type isolaton means. In this refinement the pointed displacement wedges are configured as several independent parts. In these drawings, the wedge shown moving, in a given step, is drawn solid, and the currenty still wedges are drawn as outlines. Refe ng to steps one and two in FIGS. 114 and 114.1 respectively, the narrowest least intrusively shaped pointed wedge A is wedged into the isolation area first. It displaces any moveable traling (non-apex) hars that intersect its path but stops when it comes in contact with the highly stable front-most har in the apex B. In FIGS. 114.2 through 1144 showing steps three through four sequentally, the first wedge moved is followed by increasingly wider more intrusive wedges that push the more lateral hars backwards and out of the isolaton area. Like the first least intrusive wedge, all following wedges stop when they come in contact with the highly stable hair in the apex. The following senes of wedges become increangly more obtrusive by making them wider with more obtuse edge angles, and by placing increasingly wider diameter arcs at their front-most points. These arcs start convex and increase in diameter with each step and then become concave while contnumg to increase in diameter with each step. Concave arcs are used to squeeze away any very small hars trapped to the sides of a much larger front-most har. Once the front-most har is isolated, another channel obstructon gate likely taking the form a more conventonal pushback gate might be moved between said front-most hair aid traling hairs This will keep any traling hars behind the wedges from sneaking around sad wedges when the entrance gate is opened. The use of another more conventonal pushback gate behind the wedges is optonal. Additionally, a conventional pushback gate could be used to help clear a path for the wedges, so they would not have to go through as many hars before reaching the front apex of the isolaton area. This could be done by using a pushback entrance gate configuraton as shown in FIG. 111. Finally, realize that the wedges are capable of yielding when they press up aganst the front-most har in the isolaton area. This yielding be achieved by mountng the wedges on individual tines that are flexibly attached to their connectvity bπdges. ""Senes of Sub-Har-Diameter-Soaced Pushback Gates The second type of mechanical har isolaton scheme I will discuss falls into the category of what I call sub-har-diameter-spaced pushback gates. This type of system has a meteπng area with a front edge that need not narrow to a tp, although it might. If ttie metenng area does not narrow, then it should ideally be no wider than about twice the diameter of ttne smallest diameter har that will go through it Sub-Hair -Diameter-INTERVAL Spaced Pushback Gate System Refemng to FIG. 115, the first embodiment of this system uses a metenng area that will allow even the largest diameter hars to touch its front-most edge. This system uses a senes of pushback gates spaced from each other at intervals of less than tne diameter of tie smallest har. Ideally, the pushback gates are spaced at intervals of less than the 50% of the diameter of the smallest har. These individual pushback gates flexibly yield and stop when they come in contact with the front-most har. However, if they cross the meteπng area at a point between hars, they will not stop but contnue across the metenng area so as to close it off. Thus, the front-most har is isolated from any hars that follow it by the pushback gates between it and them The greatest limitaton of this system is that it can only be used with a very limited range of har diameters. Hars of too great of a diameter might not even fit into the meteπng area or if they do, might be pushed out tne way they came in. This is because the pushback gates are only likely to stop if they intersect with the rearmost 50% of a liar's diameter, so as to push the hair firmly into the entrance gate. If a har is intersected by a pushback gate in the front-most 50% of its diameter, it usually will be pushed backwards, thereby, obstructed from passing said pushback gate. Likewise, if the hars have too small of a diameter, then more than one har might get in front of the pushback gates. To solve these problems and to allow isolation of a wide vanety of har diameters, a second embodiment of the sub-har-diameter spaced pushback gate system is descnbed below. Sub-Hair-Diameter-ACCURACY Spaced Pushback Gate System This second embodiment of the sub-har-diameter spaced pushback gate system uses a meteπng area composed of a senes of attached compartments that become increasingly nanower, usually with increasing proximity to the attachment area. Refemng to FIG. 116, this set of compartments A is usually formed by notches B in an entrance gate C that is imposed on an edge of a har channel D. Each sub- compartment allows only hars of an extremely specific diameter range in it For example, a har of an extremely thin diameter will not stop moving forward ttirough the compartments untl it reaches the entrance to a sub-compartment too thin for it, or the back of the very thinnest sub- compartment. In a similar manner, a relatvely wide diameter har will stop much sooner in one of the wider compartments. If there are any thinner diameter hairs trailing a wider diameter hair, they will be stuck behind it and this is fine. Once we have hars of a specified diameter range in the correct metenng area sub-compartments, we can use a senes of special pushback gates positioned with sub-har-diameter-accuracy to isolate the front-most har in the meteπng area from all of those behind it. Notce, I sad positoned with sub-har-diameter accuracy, not necessaπly spaced at sub-har-diameter intervals, as in the embodiment descnbed immediately above. Because the graduated chambers hold hars of different diameters apart from each other, there is no need to space the isolaton gates at the small sub-har-diameter intervals needed before to seperate two hars of greatly diffeπng diameter. The pushback isolaton gates take on the configuraton and manner of operaton shown by FIG 116. Steps 1 -6 represent the vaπous pushback gates moving over the channel and closing around hars in the metenng area. Notice, in the first two steps, the gates make it all the way across the channel unobstructed. When this happens, a notched area, like E in FIG. 116.2, remans over the channels. Although the front har may be temporaπly pushed backwards and out of the way, as in step 1.5, it will move back into the front of its onginal compartment, as in step 2, after the involved pushback isolation gate makes it all t e way across t e meteπng area. Of course, to make sure this happens, the sub- compartments should be sufficiently long so that the hars are just pushed towards their backs but not completely out of sad sub-compartments. However, in step 3, a har at positon F is encounted by a hook means on the side of a pushback isolaton gate. Sad har obstructs sad gate from making it all the way across the channel When this happens, the notched area E does not make it over the channel. Thus, the front-most area of the adjacent traling sub-compartment L (behind leading liar's sub-compartment) remans covered by the pushback isolaton gate. This keeps any other hars in sad trailing sub-compartment towards its back where they cant be protected from the subsequent pushback gate portion H as t ey would in the front of sad sub-compartment Thus, in step 4, when the next pushback gate swipes over the back of sad sub-compartment, it forces all hairs in it out. The final result is said sub-compartment is entirely empty of hars In other words, hars in sub-compartment L have been push backwards and out of the path of the hook means G and into the path of the pushback gate portion of the the following pushback isolaton gate actuated in step 5. Since all other isolation gates will be held up by ttieir own hook means by the front-most har at point F, no notch areas like E will be brought over the channels. This will cause all subsequent hairs in the compartments of the metenng area to be forced backwards from it in like manner In step 6, a final more conventional pushback gate I which has no need for hook means like G or notch like E is moved over the channel In steps 7-11 , we see that the isolation gates are moved backwards in order to open the metenng area Notice that all hars, except one, have been forced from the metenng area Pushback gate I remans over the channel closing the metenng area off The isolaton gates are moved away from the metenng area starting with the second from last pushback gate J and proceeding in the reverse order that ttney oπginally moved over the channels Notce that the second from last pushback gate J has an optonal sloped edge K on the πght side of its notch that will allow it to push any har between it and the last pushback gate I out of its way towards the last pushback gate I, as shown in optional step 7 Optional step 7 shows what happens if the front-most har is in the widest sub-chamber Notice the last pushback gate I has an optonal concave area L in it that allows it to accept sad har in widest sub-chamber This concave area is optonal depending on how the final pushback gate is spaced relative the more forward pushback gates In practce, all of the notched-push back gates may or may not have sloped or tapered πght edges but one was just shown in J for illustrative purposes Notce at the very bottom of this drawing that the a vaπant embodiment of one of these isolaton gates is shown It shows that these gates can have straght edges like F rattier than semi-circles intersectng with hars as a hook means Note. The above refers to a metenng area composed of a senes of attached compartments that become increasingly narrower Such a metenng or isolaton area needn t be composed of sub-compartments but could simply be a single area that becomes increasingly nanower, most likely, with increasing proximity to the attachment area Also, the narrowing metenng area formed in this embodiment, or any metenng area or isoiaton area formed in any embodiment, neednt necessary be formed by imposing a gate structure on a hair channel wall For example, the narrowing metenng area In this emobodiment could be formed entirely as an opened-ended slit cut into a har handler such as an entrance gate ""Several Meteπng Area Sizes Available Choose the Best for a Given Person's Hair Lack of Hair Diameter Vaπablity on a Head Simplifies Design. To the extent that scalp har diameter remans constant on each person's head but vanes from person to person, two or more har isolation sub-systems could be available, each calibrated for a specific diameter of har For example, there could be several pushback gates each with a different metenng distance from its entrance gate This would allow the meteπng area size to be adjusted to the har diameters on a specific person's head This simple entrance and pushback gate combination could be used as the single har isolation system rather than the much more complex embodiments descnbed above Of course, this would mean that the system operator would somehow have to ascertain the diameter of hars on a given person's head ""The Use of Sensors and Flexibly Yielding Har Handlers for Har Isolation In several of the above-descπbed har isolaton system embodiments there is menton made of certain har handlers stopping when they come in contact with hars in the meteπng area that get in their path There are two basic types of systems that can be used to allow a hair handler to stop in this manner The first involves mechanically yielding har handlers and the second is based on electronic control via sensor monitoπng Refemng to FIG 117 1 , mechanical har handler stopping may be facilitated by making each har handler fine somewhat flexible along arrows F Since several like har handlers are connected and operatng in independent har channels, they cannot all be expected to stop independenfly unless t ey are flexibly connected Thus, each har handler has a flexibility joint at some point, along its tine, between its functional area and its supporting connectivity bndge Refemng to FIG 117, one example of such a flexibility joint involves interrupting the metal tine and placing a silicone connectivity joint A in its place Such a silicone joint can be formed by starting with a metal pattem that has temporary supports B that bypass the area where the joint is to be placed and and connect the distant end C of the tne to the connectvity bndge D These temporary supports not only connect but also surround the future joint area so as to hold liquid silicone in the joint as it soldifles After the silicons is solid, the temporary supports and any excess silicone should be cut away The flexibility joint need not be composed of silicone any other suitable matenal or even a spπng-like pattem E formed into the metal to form the joint may be used, as in FIG 1172 Furtherstll, the flexibility joint need not be placed at exact positon shown in the drawings It can be placed anywhere between the functonal area of each har handler and its connectivity bndge Other possible mechanical methods include, but are not limited to forming a flexibility joint by connecting two hoπzontal stacked πgid layers with a flexibly yielding matenal sandwiched between them Furtherstll, the use of a joint might not be necessary if the entre tne assembly can be fabπcated from a sufficienty flexible matenal However, such an assembly is likely to be too flexible and might need to be supported by being sandwiched between two or attached against one firmer layer Finally, micro-machine type actuators, to be discussed below, could be used as a means of allowing functional areas to yield separately, even if they are not controlled by sensors Electronic control via sensor monitonng is based on sending an electnc or electromagnetic flow across a hair channel and modifying har handler behavior when it is terupted In the case of the har isolation sytem, the sensor flow could be sent across the metenng area at several points subdividing each meteπng area Each point monitored could have a gate capable of subdividing its meteπng area at or relatve to sad point If a front-most har interupts a sensor's path, one or more har handlers will not be moved as they normally would This way said front-most har will not be disturbed The separately controlled har handlers used in har isolaton should close behind this front-most har at the first point the sensors detect a gap between the front-most har and traling hairs A sensor-controlled system has operational advantages over an entirely mechanical system For example, a sensor-controlled system does have to disturb the har that stops it This means it need not undesirably nsk pushing the front-most har out of the meteπng area by bπnging a har handler in contact with the front-most 50% of sad liar's diameter This operational advantage allows a sensor-controlled system to handle a wider range of har diameters than an otherwise identical non-sensor-controlled system However, the operational advantages come at the cost of increased complexity A sensor-based system not only has to monitor several points across each metenng area but it must be able to control the movement of each hair handler in each channel separately Thus, like har handlers cannot be joined by a connectivity bndge and moved in unison Rather, some type of micro-machine technology would be most beneificial to use to control each har-handler functional area separately ""Mult-Chamber Holding Area Design The onginal system presented included compound pushback gates which were also responsible for transporting, into the attachment area, the hars that t ey had isolated in their notches Next, I presented the idea that pushback functon and transport-forward functon could be assigned to two seperate parts Furtherstll, the pushback functon and holding functon could be assigned to two seperate parts In other words, the holding gates could be configurated as dedicated holding gates as opposed to holding gates which also act as pushback gates Of course, this requires an independent har isolaton mechanism to feed these dedicated holding gates with isolated hars The single-har-isolation mechanisms descπbed above could be used for this purpose A descπption of dedicated holding gates and dedicated transport-forward-gate functon follows The following descnption refers to FIG 118 In dedicated holding transport-forward gate systems, instead of using multiple-pushback gates to isolate hars, a single pushback gate per channel meters out hairs one at a time These isolated hars dont go directly into the attachment area, but instead, they go into a holding area between the attachment area and a har isolation means An aggregate holding area is subdivided by holding gates into individual holding areas or holding notches The holding gates closest to the attachment area, shown as holding gates #1 , may help serve as an entrance gate to the attachment area Holding gate #1 remans closed over the har channel before any hars are introduced into the holding area After the first isolated hair (or hars) is introduced into the holding area, holding gate #2 closes behind it Next, a second isolated har is introduced into the holding area and holding gate #3 closes behind this second har The end result is that we have two hars each isolated in its own holding notch in the holding area Each tme a hair is introduced into the holding area, the har isolaton system must cycle once If we want to introduce two hars into each holding notch and single har isolation system is used, it must cycle twice before for each holding notch to be filled In a system where more than two holding notches must be filled, this process can be repeated for how ever many holding notches there are Note The holding gates, (single) pushback gates, and any entrance or narrower gates all move from side to side The flexible-fingers type vaπable-diameter-har isolator most likely moves in from the side at approximately a 45° angle The vaπable-diameter har isolator can be considered any means capable of isolatng a single hair from a group of hars that may have different diameters In FIG 118, the fiexible-finger- like-projections configuration is the type vaπable diameter har isolator illustrated. However, in practice, any hair isolation system can be substituted for it. Refemng to FIG. 119, once single hars are isolated in their individual holding notches, they are ready to be transported into the attachment area by the dedicated-transport-forward gates A. These multple-transport-forward gates transport scalp hars aid har extensions into the attachment chambers in the exact manner as the multple-pushback gates oπginally descnbed. The difference between the onginal multple-pushback gates and the dedicated-multple-transport-forward gates is that the dedicated-transport-forward gates dont have to isolate hars because the hars have already been isolated for them in holding area notches that line up with their notches. As such, the notch-separating sub-tines of the dedicated-multiple transport-forward gates dont have to have a tapered design capable of pushing hars back and they dont have to have a staggered design where the front-most pushback gates cross the har chainel before those pushback gates farther away from the attachment area. Instead, the notch-separatng sub-tines of the dedicated-transport-forward gates can all be equal length and even have flat fronts. • "Electro-Magnetic Pathways for Sensors. Micro-Machines and other Electrical Components in the Attachment Stack. "* Previously, I have discussed the incorporaton of electncal components into the attachment stack. These electncal components include vaπous types of sensors and micro-machines. By micro-machines, I am refernng to extremely small devices that move by mechanical forces generated by themselves. These micro-machines usually are supplied with electncity and sometimes with water or other fluid in order to generate steam that allows them to function as small steam engines The electπcity and water could be supplied through pathways formed into vaπous layers of the attachment stack. The pathways on each of these layers could be supplied with electπcity by contacts at the back of each layer. As shown previously these input contacts might be arranged in a star-step pattern at the back or one of the sides of the attachment stack. Thus, micro-machines or any such functional equivalent which allows independent actuation of individual har handler functional areas either freeing sad functional areas from having to be placed on moving tine-assemblies or allowing said functional areas to move in a slighty different manner from the moving tine-assemblies which support them, should be considered as an actuaton opton. Altematvely, a hybnd between a tne-assembly with all like functional areas physically connected so that they move it unison and a micro-machine is a possiblity. In such a configuraton, the tne-assemblies' macro-actuaton means, such as solenoids, could simply be substituted for a mirco- machine means contained entirely in the handle unit and, perhaps, the attachment stack itself. ""Micro-Wire Manufactunng: The micro-wires that supply the sensors and micro-machines with electπcity will have to be manufactured into individual layers in such a manner that they are electncally insulated. The following procedures descnbe some examples of how such micro-wires can be formed: -Micro-wires within the layers can be generated by. . . -Adhenng a sheet of conducive mateπal to a, perhaps clear, inorganic ceramic such as glass and using a laser, chemical etching, or other cutting means to selectively cut pathways in the conductor. The result is thin wire-like pathways supported, at least on one side, by an insulatve moranic mateπal. -Adhenng the conductor to a thin flexible film and using a laser to cut channels both in the film and conductor. One should make sure the film has adequate margins around ttie conductor that it can hold the cut central portons together The film-conductor assembly can then be sandwiched between layers of the attachment stack. The layers of ttne attachment stack will provide firm support for this probably fragile assembly. The flexible film will probably provide electncal Insulation around the conductors and may also act as an adhesive that adheres the assembly to the adjacent layers of attachment stack. In might act as an adhesive because it is coated with a stcky substance like those used with adhesive tape, or because it melts when exposed to heat while pressed between adjacent layers of the attachment stack. -Adhenng the conductor to a substance (flexible or stiff, clear or opaque) that is more resistant to chemical etching than the conductor. Etch paths in the conductor using chemical photoetchmg. -Forming directly by vapor depositon on or between non-conductve surfaces. Where sad non-conductive surfaces may either be flexible or stiff. Certain electπcal circuits might be used to generate heat at a specific point. For example, adhesive outputs based on heated vapor bubbles need a small point of high electπcal resistance that will heat up causing a vapor bubble. The areas that carry the electncity to the heating element, in order to remain relatively cool, should have relatively lower electπcal resitance. This lower electncal resistance can be achieved by making these areas wider, thicker, or from a more conducive matenal than the heating area. This will likely require that the heating elements and less electncally-resistant portions of the electncal supply pathways to be manfactured as seperate layers that are joined together. To do this, after forming, the layers should be joined togettier by lammatng them between the two non-conductive backings. Further, the two layers could be most securely joined by a means such as laser welding. If a clear ceramic is used as the laminating matenal, its thickness matters less and it needn't be melted by laser welding. However, many other laminate types might get melted themselves duπng the laser welding. If they are thick and clear enough, they might survive. Otherwise, a second layer of laminate should be laser welded on top of the first ones to ensure electπcal or optcal insulation is maintained. A vapor bubble system heated not by electncal resistance but, instead, by light or other electro-magnetc radiaton is a possibility. The light could be earned by optcal pathways via internal reflection. The light could be focused, most ideally on a light absorbent surface, at the point where heat is desired. Some of the sensors and other mechanisms that use light as energy will need to use optical pathways that carry light via internal reflecton. There are several ways of forming such optcal pathways including but not limit to: -Molding. -Vapor deposition. -Chemical etching of an optically clear surface. Sad optically clear surface most likely adhered to an acid resistant surface. ""Har Channel Sensors: A sensor typically detects hairs when its path across a har channel is interupted. The presence of detected hars can be input into a computer for purposes such as har countng and modifying the behavior of the har manipulaton system. For example, a sensor that detects hars in the har channels, in effect countng them, could be combined with a wheel type sensor that measures distance or speed of movement over the scalp. Together these two sensors could be used to judge the density of har in an area of the head. With this density informaton, the system could adjust the number of har extensions it attaches in any given area of scalp. Ideally, to achieve the most accurate counts, a single or very few hars should be isolated in an area along the channel, such as a metenng area. Thus, when a sensor detects the presence of hars in this isolated area, the system can know that this means it has detected exacty one, or some other known number, of hars. Har channel sensors could also be used to measure the diameter of each human har on the head. For example, by deploying sensors across each in a senes of in-line connected har channel compartments that become increasingly narrower, usually with increased proximity to the attachment area (as in FIG. 116), the system can know with in a certain range the diameter hars present in these compartments. Since this configuration is based on the sub-har-diameter-accuracy spaced single hair isolaton system, it will most likely be used with it. Thus, a likely algoπthm would be to detect the front-most compartment that has a har in it, record this data as the hair-width measurement for the isolaton cycle. Of course, sensors could also detect har width in a manner analogous to the sub-har-diameter-interval spaced system by spacing the channel sensors at sub-har-diameters, however, this will likely be more difficult to implement. Some of the specifics involved with har channel sensor implementaton in general are discussed below ""Electπc Current Sensors: In order to implement electπc-current gap sensors, an electπcal voltage could be run across a har channel gap between two dipole ends of a gap-interrupted electπcal circuit. Sad dipole ends would not only be put on opposite sides of a har channel but might also be put on opposite sides of a dialectic layer (one on top, one below). Sad dielectric layer will help prevent the circuit from closing anywhere except the designated areas. The closest tips of sad dipole ends will likely have very thin widths on the order of the width a human har Thus, in order for the voltage to arc, it must cross the har channel at a specific point. Hair should have a different (probably higher) dielectπc value than ar does Thus, when a har is in the way, a different amount of electπcal flow (probably less) will pass at a given voltage This change can be used to detect the presence of a har Since the status of this volatage and el ectπcal-flow charactentcs can be monitored thousands of tmes per second, certain changes can be counted as individual hars The gap between the two designated dipole ends of the circuit should have the smallest dipole moment avalable in the electπc cunent To achieve this, nearby conductors could be kept at a distance or insulated by a mateπal with a high dieletnc value For example, both the top surfaces and perhaps even vertical sides of the har channel could be covered with a dialectic coating Likewise, the gap could be kept to a minimum simply by greatiy narrowing a portion of the har channel or by putting one of the dipoles ends on a moving har-handler fucntional area that temporaπly narrows the gap In order to prevent arcing between electπcal circuits in neighboπng ha channels, the circuits in neighboπng channels might be turned off while its closest neighbors are on Alternatively, neighboπng har channels could use completely independent electπcal circuits •• "Light and Electro-Magnetic Radiaton The hair sensors can also be based on passing a beam of light, or other electro-magnetic radiation, across the channel Of course, hars would be detected when the beam is broken This could be facilitated by independent fiber optc circuits which have gaps across each har channel A similar approach could be used with other types of electro-magnetc radiaton such as radio waves Of course, this would mean a transimission and receiving means would each have to be placed on opposite sides of each har channel *" Micro-Machine Concerns"* ""Micro-Machine Design. Micro-machines are small electπcally powered moving devices usually formed by etching, and often etched into a semi-conductive matenal or silicon-based matenal such as those matenals usually used to form computer micro-processors Although many micro-machines that have been fabπcated are actually microscopic, such as a small steam engine actuator fabπcated by Sandia Natonal Laboratoπes, those used for this invention typically wont be this small They are, nevertheless, micro-machine-like and, as such, will be referred to as micro- machines in this discussion In this discussion, macro-machine is used to descnbe other types of mechanisms For example, har handling tine-assemblies are actuated by macro-machine parts, like solenoids, and are themselves macro-machine part of macro-machine assemblies because they depend on macro-machine parts for their movement Substituting connectivity-bndge-attached hair handlers for independently moving micro-machine actuated hair handlers requires certain design modificatons -Micro-machme-dπven channel narrowers (or any micro-machine-dnven part that overhangs the har channels) might have the stresses aganst them reduced by placing a likely macro-machine powered and likely system wide channel narrower means, most likely based on a connectvity-bndge configuration, beneath them all such as to limit the area they overhang the har channel unprotected -The micro-machine layer, or layers in the stack could be placed in a manner similar to the sensor layer This is to say they would require insulated electncal pathways leading to them Further, they would be totally self-contained within their layer(s) and could be placed above or below the scalp sensors at any level in the attachment stack -In additon to micro-machine linear actuators, the use of micro-machine-dnven circular members, such as gears, which advance, perhaps toothed, rods is a possiblity to use to advance har-handler functional areas •••• Specific Micro-Machine Uses, Although in general micro-machine type mechanisms can replace all the moving-connectivity-bndge type mechanisms previously descnbed, here are some specific examples of micro-machine uses -Conceivably, the use of micro-machine-based har countng would lessen the need for having individually controlled adhesive applicaton nozzle attachment jets That is if individually controlled (ideally by micro-machine) har-handler functional areas do not move har extensions into the attachment chambers in channels which have chosen not to apply adhesive because their corresponding scalp-har-holding chambers arent sufficiently full -The use of holding gates can be optimized by constructing them as micro-machine type actuators By using holding gates, the number of sensors per tine channel needed to confirm presence of scalp hars in all holding notches can be reduced to one per tine channel (instead of one per nozzle or notch) This is because holding gates are filled one at a time, and thus, can be monitored by one sensor per tine- channel counting the hairs that passes it Such a sensor would likely be placed somewhere between ttne har isolation system and back of the holding area farthest from the attachment area Also, the nozzles could be controlled in channel subsets a few at a tme This is because the front (nearest attachment area) holding gates are , in some embodiments, more likely to be filled than the last ones because they fill up front to back If a har channel sensor in the meteπng area doesnt count a sufficient number of hars passing through it, it can be known that a certain holding- area notch is empty without monitoπng this holding area notch directy Thus, the nozzle or set of nozzles in the attachment chamber corresponding to this holding area notch could be kept from outputing adhesive and/or the corresponding holding notches which serve the har extensions could be left unfilled on purpose -Consider using micro-machine actuators to control individual nozzle-shut-off valves Sad valves might be placed anywhere along the fluid-supply lines, including the base unit but they could be made smaller if placed in the handle unit or attachment stack itself, where the adhesive (or other fluid) supply lines are themselves smaller -Also it might be easier to implement shut of the nozzles by rerouting the flow of a lines fluid in a U-tum back to the supply resevoir than to close them off by completely stopping their flow Micro-machine acutators placed anywhere along a supply line might be used for this purpose -Micro-machines could combine several different types of har handlers in the same level -In a predominately micro-machine system, certain macro-machine hair handlers might remain Especially, likely to reman is a macro-machine type pullback hook system configured as tines on a connectivity bπdge, as ongmally descnbed above This is because the pullback hook will usually move over a much greater distance than the other hair handlers -The etching technology used to make micro-machines is relatvely expensive on a size basis Thus, the area where the actual micro-machine har handlers reside should be minimized This can best be done by surrounding, on any or ail sides, the micro-machine layers of the attachment stack with supporting layers fabπcated in a less expensive manner For example, the micro-machine system might be confined to a thin band-like module (like largely perpendicular to the har channels) in only the har-handler functonal areas Natually, this thin band would be bisected by the attachment areas In order to supply this thin band of micro-machine parts with inputs such as electncity and any needed fluids, it should somehow be fused in the attachment stack with less expesive supporting structures These supporting structures will take on nearly the same configuration as that descnbed for the first-descnbed embodiment of the attachment stack system, except for having a subset of micro-machines embedded In order to assure smooth attachment of the micro-machine module to the supporting portions of the attachment stack, adjacent layers of both should be staggered or overlapped at the conneton joιnt(s) where laser welding or a similar form of attachment occurs In other words, the vertical seam between the micro-machine stack and supporting portons of the attachment stack should not be straght line (when viewed from the side), rat er alte atng layers should be interwoven To illustrate, if the length of a fluid channel wall segment is longer in the micro- machine module, it will be correspondingly shorter on the other side of the attachment joint in the support structure, or vice versa Also in this scenano, the layers forming the floor and ceiling of said fluid supply channels would be longer in the support structure and correspondingly shorter in the micro-machine module This leads to overlap which faciliates a hermetc seal much better than trying to attach two blunt-ended stacks together A similar situaton exists with electπcal supply pathways Rather than putting the length of the pattiway on the same level in both the support structure and module sections of the stack, a single pathway should be put on two ad j acent and overlapping layers which can be fused together Sad fusing is likely done by a means of welding layers together such as laser welding -Before fusing the micro-machine module to the supporting structures of attachment stack, sad micro-machine module might have connectivity bndges of its own Once attached to the supporting structures these connectvity bndges may or may not be destroyed If destroyed, it will likely be done by laser cutting -The micro-machine module and support structures might both have holes through them that can be aligned with pegs This is to ensure proper alignment duπng fusing -Micro-machines can be used as a means of allowing hair-handler functonal areas to yield relatve certain hars in their path, in an analogous manner to the functonal area flexibility joints, descπbed herein This yielding can be accomplished simply because the micro- machine functonal areas can be calibrated to have a maximum strength Of course, since micro-machine functonal areas usually move separately from homolgous functonal areas in parallel har channels, flexibility joints are unnecessary • "Acuator/Tine Interface*" Refemng to FIG 120 a top plan view of portions of a har-handler assembly with its tnes omitted, the use of control rods A placed in slots through the connectivity bndges of the har-handling tines was mentioned previously These slots and rods accurately control the distances and directions that har handlers can slide When a har handler slides in only one direction, it is simple to understand how a rod in a slot controls its distance of travel However, some har handlers need to travel along two or more axes For this to occur, the acuators and their attached cables B, which move the hair-handling tne assembly, often pull in two directons simulataneously One of these directons will be the desired directon of har handler movement The other directon will be against a side of the slot that is parallel to sad directon of desired movement This way the side that the rod is held against controls har-handling tne exact path and distance of movement In such a configuraton, it is helpful to use a rod that has at least one flat smooth side that lies parallel to each directon of desired movement If the har- handling tne has two axis moton, the rod will likely have a four-sided rectangular cross-sectonal shape However if diagonal or three-axis motion is also used, the rod's cross-sectional shape should include flat diagonal/sloped edges In other words, the rod's cross-sectional shape might be hexagonal or octagonal Using these pπncipals, slots with more than four sides can be constructed to guide very complex motion patterns, such as slot H in FIG 120 1 , a top plan view of portions of a har-handler assembly with its tines omitted Previously, the optional use of cable to har handler interface sheets was mentioned Refemng to FIG 1202 a front plan view of a stack of har-handler assemblies and their connections to actuator cables, these thin interface sheets C allow the use of relatively thick cables to convey the moton of the actuators, but mediate the attachment of these thick cables to the har haidlers As such, only thin sheets come in contact with the har handlers The most ideal way to configure interface sheets is to wrap one end of a thin film C around the end of a bulky cable B and attach the other end of the film in a usually in laminar manner to the surface of har handler layer E To faciliate a strong attachment, small holes could be made in the surface of the har handler tine at this attachment point These holes would allow adhesive or plastc melted from the interface means to penetrate them Of course, any means that causes the cable to get flatter or thinner will work For example, if the cable is plastc, its end could be pressed into a sheet shape Furtherstll, althougth interface sheets are preferred, because their usually increased width compensates for their decreased thickness, any object narrower than the onginal cable could suffice For example, an interface cable of smaller diameter than the onginal cable could be used Such a cable could be configured either by attaching a smaller cable to the large one or manipulatng the larger cable s end to become nanower Such a configuraton is often preferable to using a relatively thin cable over the entre length between har handler and actuator because the length of mechanical weakness is reduced to a very short span of cable Regardless of the form of ttie interface means, it is, in some directon, thinner than the actuator cables This often means that the stack of har handler tines and t eir flattened interface means will be thinner than the stack of actuator cables If this is the case, unless something holds them together, the stacked hair handlers will not want to lie surface to surface, but rather each hair handler will want to lie along the plane of its acuator cables This is unacceptable so something must be used to push the har handlers together It may or may not be enough to rely on any higher stationary levels of the attachment stack to do this If not, we should configure a part to push either directy on the har-handlmg-tne assemblies or, more ideally, on their interface means C It is preferable to push only the interface means together because whatever is pushed on will both rub and bend around the push together means F Since the har handling tnes themselves must reman flat, ideally only the interface means should be expected to bend As such, the push-together means F should be placed far enough from the har- hand ng-tne assembly that the two never come in contact Likewise, the actuator cables B should be placed far enough from the push-together means to allow for a sufficiently gentie slope of the interface means as they expand outwards towards their attachments D with their actuator cables B The push together means F ideally should have a smooth and curved surface that facilitates the interface means bending easily around it Ideally, all misaligned actuator cables should all be either too far above or too far below their stack of har handling tnes For example, if all misaligned actuator cable are too far above, as shown by bracket G, then only a push down means F is needed to push the har handler tine stack together An additional push up means is not needed Cable attachments for a har handler with only one axis have been frequently shown In such a configuration there were only two attachment points, one point pulls the har handler in one directon, and an attachment point, usually on the opposite side of the har-handler-tne assembly, pulls in the opposing directon If two or more axes of moton need to be used, at least four attachment points will usually be used In other words, two sets of two opposing cables Although these cables can be hooked to the har handler assembly in a vaπety of ways, the most prefened manner is shown on the left-side of FIG 120 Each of the cables (or interface means) I that control side to side movement are placed on opposite sides of the hair handler tne assembly However, the cables (or interface means) J that control front to back movement are placed on the same side of the the har handler assembly Most ideally the front-to-back cables are attached to or very near one of the side-to-side cables This placement conserves on the attachment notches that must be made in the har-handler-tne assembly This is because one of the side-to-side cables shares a single set of clearance notches with both of the front-to-back cables This type of configuraton conserves space much more than if additional clearance notches were to be introduced Furtherstill, this might allow the front-to-back interface means to share the same push-together means with ttie side interface means Of course, this might mean that the side-to-side interface means would be curve along two axes forming somewhat of a bowl-shape If this is found undesirable, the front-to-back interface means could each be given their own push-together means All three push-together means could be formed into a single C-shaped part, where the inteπor of the C-shape is oπented towards the har-handler assembly ***Non-At_achment Uses of Attachment-Stack-Type Technololgy*** The previous discussion about the har attachment stack discussed its purpose of to isolatng scalp hars and attaching har extensions to them However, the attachment stack's ability to isolate one or a limited number of scalp hars is a very useful functon itself Once isolated, scalp hars can be processed individually in a vaπety of ways For example, once an individual scalp har is between a pmcher-like structure and a left-wall-hke structure, it is, in effect, surrounded by an oπfice or isolated processing chamber which it can be pulled through lengthwise To pull a har ttirough such an oπfice, optonally, tπgger a pushout actuator that moves the liar's lower portion beneath the onfice to t e πght Next, optonally, tπgger a pullback hook which moves the liar's lower portion back the exit channel, and allows it to be engaged by a bend-under means, such as ttie bend-under belts By doing this while the pmcher-like structure is still closed around the scalp har, the scalp har is being pulled through an oπfice from the hat's bottom to top This oπfice can do things to the har that change sad har as it moves through sad onfice We will give attachment-stack type systems the broader name of processing stack in order to refer to its use both in har extension attachment and other types of har processing Accordingly, we will name the attachment chambers and attachment areas and structures homologous to t em in other embodiments more broadly as processing chambers and processing areas because it is in these chambers and areas where the har-related beautficaton or transformation takes place Note. The means used to pull har lengthwise through an onfices should not be limited to the above actuation sequence or any individual means recited above There are many types of processing a processing stack can peform besides attachment These vaπous other processes include, but are not limited to the following 1 Applying fluids to the surface of relatvely isolated hars 2 Reshaping the cross-sections of individual hars by removing matenal from each hair's surface or adding new structural matenal to rt 3 Implant and Remove Surgical Hair Implants 4 Automated Har Cutting Processing Stack 5 Dynamic Hair-Channel or Other Functional-Area Designs 1. APPLYING COATINGS TO HAIR SURFACES If the processing done to the har includes applying a fluid, or any mateπal, to it, the fluid can be supplied through outputs in the left wall in a similar manner as that descnbed for attachment adhesive. These outputs are likely to supply their fluid to the inteπor of an isolation chamber/onflce where it comes in contact with the hair that is likely, but not necessaπly, being pulled lengthwise through said onfice. Although mechanics of applying coatings to hair surfaces will be descnbed in great deal in the Har Shaft Sculpting section below, this section details ttie many possible purposes for doing so. There are vanous types of fluid or matenal with which we might want to bnng in contact, or coat, the har. The following list includes some examples of types of fluid or material that we might want to bπng in contact with each har. Q A colorant such as a dye, pigment or bleach. The amount added might be controlled by optcal color sensors capable of looking at a single har in each isolaton chamber. Q A structural mateπal that allows the hair cross-section to be enlarged at certain areas. For example, thiol-dissolved keratin that can harden and form a solid augmenting coatng on the outside of each har fiber, in order to reshape each fiber. This can be achieved by allowing its dissolved disulfide bonds to reform which they tend to to upon exposure to oxygen in the ar or exposure to a thiol- neutrualizing chemical. Generally, whenever the word thiol is used in this document, any disulfide-breaking chemical or means could be substituted for it. Q A thiol or other disulfide-breaking chemcial whose purpose is to temporaπly soften the the protein structure of each har so each har can be reshaped either with respect to its cross-sectional shape or longitudinal curvature, (or any other substance capable of being used to modifiy ttne longitudinal curvature of a har) □ A protectve coatng to the surface of each hair. For example, a coatng capable of holding in good substances, like water and lipids and keeping out bad things, like U.V., certain chemicals and minerals. Q A structural sealant capable of repainng damaged areas in a hair including adhenng split ends together. Such a chemical is likely based on keratin-like chemicals. Q A plasticizer like matenal that softens and conditions the hair. Q A temporary coating like wax to protect a slower hardening permanent coating such as dissolved keratin, while it hardens on the surface of the har. QQ Such a temporary protective coating could be used to hold dissolved keratin with excess thiol, or other protein-dissolving matenal, together with the har shaft being coated. This approach will allow the natural hair keratin and the dissolved har keratin to both dissolve and slighty mix together, and thus, form and harden together under the protecton of the temporary coatng. □ A temporary coatng like wax to protect a har while it undergoes some form of processing QQ Such a temporary protectve coatng could also be used to hold in place any other substance applied to the surface of the har while said substance slowly performs its functon on the har. Sad substance may become permanent by any means not necessanly limited to hardening. Sad applied substances included but are not limited to hair colorants, permanent wave and curl treatments, conditoners. GQ Such a temporary protective coating could act as a temporary supportive template of each hair's softened protein structure while each is being reshaped with respect to its cross-sectonal shape or longitudinal curvature. Such a temporary supportive coatng could be imparted its own shape by a mechanical har setting means such as curlers, a curling iron, a flat iron, a cnmpmg iron, or between two rollers. Q A colorant based on opaque pigments or other largely opaque coloπng means. Such a substance is likely to be the functonal- equivalent of many pnntng inks. In other words, the binders necessary to adhere the opaque pigments likely make the colorant so stcky or viscous that it would be mechanically difficult, if not impossible, to apply it to a great many hars at once However, it would be possible to apply it to just one or a very few hars in isolaton. This is especially true if the colonng substance's viscosity could be temporaπly decreased by heatng. Ideally, such a substance could be applied to the hair as such a thin coatng that it would not affect the structural qualities of said har. The end result of applying such a largely opaque substance is that a hair's externally-perceived color can be changed without affecting its internal structure or internal pigments. Such pigments or colonng agents might be formluted (such as by selection of the approponate binder) to give them certain other properties such as. . . QQ. . .where such a colorant coating is temporary because it can be removed from the har such as by dissolving it off with chemicals (like organic solvents) or melting it off with heat Since the hair's internal structure hasn't been changed, removal of the outer coating of pigment would allow the user to go completely back to his natural har color. However, if neither solvents, heat, nor other removal chemicals are applied, then the structural coating and color ideally will remain permanently. (The same qualaties could be given to colorants which arent opaque also, thus, all discussion related to the opaque pigments applies to them as well.) ϋQ. . .where such a colorant coating allows for is water-permeable allowing moisture exchange, perhaps, because it is keratin- based, keratin-like-chemical-based or based on another substance capable of forming structurally-sound moisture-penetrable coatings, thereby, binding a coloπng agent to the har. Moisture penetrability is desirable so that normal styling of the hair may be undertaken. Normal harstyling requires the har structure to absorb water and soften and, then, dry out, thus, slighty hardening and retaining its shape. QQ. . .If the formluation is to be keratin based (or keratin-like-chemical-based), and temporary it will likely be formulated from at least three types of substances: 1. the color pigment (or other coloπng agent), 2. the keratn or keratn-like mateπal, 3. an allied mateπal(s) which allows the kerain-like mateπal to be heat meltable or dissolvable by organic solvents . Sad allied matenal and the keratn or keratn-like-mateπal could be allied in vaπous ways including: 1.chemically as a copolymer, 2. by some form of chemical cross-linking, including the possibility of linking using disulfide bonds, 3. mechanically mixed together, perhaps as a plastcizer. The allied substance(s) that the keratn-like mateπals are allied with will determine not only how the coatng can be removed, but also how it will be made structurally sound on the surface of the har. For example, the coatng might be made structurally sound by hardening upon cooling, or by allowing chemically-dissolved disulfide bonds to reform, or by some other chemical mechanism or a combination of several of these things together Theoretcally, the colonng agent and allied matenal might be the same. Also, the allied mateπal might itself be a form of keratn or keratn-like mateπal which has been made more suceptble to be dissolved by disulfife-bond-breakmg chemicals. Note' A wax-like protectve coatng is mentoned. Generally, this refers to any coatng that can be applied to the har to protect it and then readily removed. It may also include substances which are liquid when hot but harden rapidly upon cooling. Note: The qualities required for producing a temporary/water-permeable colorant coat descπbed-above might also be used to formulate a coating (colored or otherwise) that could be used to fix the longitudinal curvature of har in a given shape for a peπod of weeks or months, however, it could be removed at anytme duπng this peπod allowing the har to go back to its normal longitudinal curvature. In other words, a har-curlmg system that doesnt generally affect the internal disulfide bonds of each har but, instead, ttne structural attπbutes of the coating hold tine desired curvature pattem of the har Since sad coating can be removed, sad har can go back completely to its natural state. 2. HAIR SHAFT SCULPTING We have just mentioned how bnngmg fluids in contact with a har fiber's surface can improve it. We also sad that one way a har can be improved is by changing a har fiber's cross-sectonal shape. However, bnngmg a har in contact with a fluid is not the only way it can be processed or changed for the better. We might want to change the cross-sectonal shape of a har shaft by cutting away, or reforming under pressure, its surface in certain areas. This is desirable because the texture of a person's har is based largely on its cross-sectional shape and diameter. This is to say vaπation in overall har appearance from one person to the next has less to do with vaπation in the chemical compositons of hair than it has to do with vaπaton in the shape and diameter of each individual liar's cross-secton. Thus, the user of the system could choose a har cross-sectonal shape and diameter based on her desired har texture. In which case, each individual liar's cross- sectional shape will determine the aggregate appearance of all of the har on the head. For example, straight hars usually have near perfect circle cross-sectonal shapes, and curly hars have more oblong shapes. Hars with very thin diameters will look too weak and wispy, while hars with very thick diameters will look overly stiff. Hairs might be carved or reformed by a vaπety of devices. The descπpton of one such device follows. CARVING PERFORMED BY ORIFICE WITH TWO HALVES The most preferred way to carve a hair's cross-secton is to surround each har with two halves of a razor-sharp knife assembly and then, most likely, pull the har lengthwise ttirough this assembly. The halves will usually be semi-circles because they will usually be expected to carve har cross-sections into a largely circular shape. The knives are best visualized as having an open-topped conical shape, similar to that of a volcano, as shown in FIG. 123. At the very top nm of this volcanic shape, should be a razor sharp cutting edge A The diameter and shape of this cutting edge should usually be exactly the same as that desired for the hairs pulled through it, such as har B. However, sometmes it should have a slighty smaller diameter than that desired for the hars pulled through because these hars are to achieve their final diameter by subsequenty being pulled through an onfice that applies a permanent structural coatng to their surface such as thiol-dissolved keratn. In such cases, it will be this structural coating that determines their final cross-sectional shape and diameter. For this reason, the razor-sharp cutting oπfice is not only free to carve the har down to a smaller diameter, but also it may carve the har with an unnatural cross-sectional shape, such as a rectangular shape. Once agan, this is fine because a structural coatng will subsequenty be added to the surface of the har to achieve its final cross-sectional shape and diameter. Regardless of the exact cross-sectional shape carved, these razor-πmmed carving onfices work by shaving off very thin layers of a hair's surface where said surface is too wide, but shave little enough that they leave the har structurally sound. Finally, notice the ndged edges A of the carving oπfice vaπant shown by FIG. 124. Although the ndges are optional, they are intended to preserve blade life by making the blade edge resistant to breaking or bending. Additonally, the razor edge of the carving mechanism is likely to have a diamond, or a similar very thin but very hard, coatng deposited on its surface to further extend blade life. This coatng is most likely applied using a form of vapor deposrtion. FIG. 125 shows a side cross-sectional view of carving onfice halves A and B surrounding a hair C. One might wonder if hairs passing through these carving onfices would undesirably get cut in half transversely, rather than being shaved longitudinally. This is unlikely to happen for two reasons. First, the razor-πmmed edges of the carving onfices are placed in a plane largely perpendicular to the surface of each har. Secondly, the hars will be expected to remain this way because they are being held under tension, most likely by the tensionmg har straghtener, a d because of the small scales involved, the hars behave as πgid cylinders with reference to the onfices. THOSE RESHAPING ORIFICES USED FOR COATING ARE USUALLY COMPOSED OF TWO HALVES, ALSO Earlier, we said that one reason for applicaton of coatngs to the surface of hars is to add mateπal to the har surfaces so as to change their cross-sectonal shapes Although there are several ways this can be done, including spraying mateπals from nozzles onto individual isolated har held before them, in ttie har-cross-sectonal-reshaping process, mateπals are generally applied to hars before or duπng their being pulled lengthwise through coatng applicaton onfices. These onfices are used to control the cross-sectonal shape and diameter of the coatng surface applied to the har. Like the carving onfices descnbed above, these coatng onfices represent a type of cross-sectonal reshaping onfice and are composed of two largely semi-circular halves each par of which closes around a single hair These onfices will usually be placed in-line with and below the carving onfices. Thus, hars will be pulled lengthwise through a senes of onfices some of which cut away mateπal, others that add it, but all of which are working together to give each har a desired cross-sectonal shape. Some examples of what coating onfices may look like are descπbed immediately below. Generally, coatng onfices are composed of two largely semi-circular halves whose inteπor cross-sectional shapes and diameters are the same as those desired for the outer dimensions of the coating they apply. Refe ng to FIG. 126, notce how the left half A of the coatng onfice has a projecton B extending from it with a hollow channel C inside. It is this projecton that plugs into a fluid coatng output on the left wail. Naturally, an alternative design would be possible in which the left wall bears a projection that plugs into a concave notch in the side of the left orifice half. Har D is surrounded by said coating orifice's left half A and πght half E. Refemng to FIG. 127, we see a side cross-sectional represenation of a left oπfice half A plugging into the left wall B. Perhaps, nozzle output C on the left wall and/or onfice projection D have seals along their edges made out of a resilent mateπal to prevent leaks. The har being pulled through is represented by E. Next, we will discuss side cross-sectonal representations of three different coatng onfice shapes. Firstly, in FIG.128 , there is a constant diameter coatng oπfice vaπant whose entre intenor is the shape and diameter of the cross-sectonal-coatng outer diameter it is to produce. Secondly, in 129, there is a constπcted-bottom vaπant whose belly A is wide to allow easy flow of a high viscosity coatng around the har shaft B, but whose bottom C narrows to impart the cross-sectonal-coatng shape and diameter desired. Finally, refe ng to FIG. 130, the constncted-top-and-bottom coatng onfice vaπant has both a constπcted top A and bottom B. This design allows easy flow of high viscosity coating around the har shaft C in the central region D, but prevents coating escape from both ends. Since har F, as shown in FIG 131 , will be pulled lengthwise vertically downward from one type of onfice to next, several different types of onfices are likely to be connected together vertically in-line as a single moving part attached to the end of a tne This in-line assembly might include several coatng onfices each applying a different coatng. The razor-πmmed carving onfice A is placed in-line and above the coatng-application onfices B and C Although the razor-nmmed carving onfices could be vertically attached in-line with the coating application onfices below them, they are more likely placed on their own independent tne assemblies so that they can be controlled mdependenty of the coatng applicaton onfices. Of course, in this drawing, all onfices are shown floafing in space because the vertical attachments have been omitted. In practice, the onfices might be spaced so closely that a har is not exposed to the external atmosphere as it passes from one oπfice to the next. Alte atvely, the onfices will have enough space between them that a har will be exposed to the atmosphere as it passes from one onfice to the next. Often we will want to include a space between onfices so that vacuum intakes, likely positoned on the left wall, can carry away any excess escaped coatng fluid and har shavings. If we would like to expose the hars to ttie benefits of a vacuum without exposing them directly to the external atmosphere, we can place vacuum onfices in the vertical stack without space above or below them Vacuum onfices have largely the same structure as coatng onfices, but instead of being supplied a coatng fluid by the left wall, they plug into a vacuum intake, most likely on the left wall. Of course, as with other har processing systems, like the attachment system previously illustrated, we want to bnng several hairs into each processing area at once so several hars can be processed at ttne same tme in a single channel, and thus, the system will process more hars in a given amount of time. Therefore, each system should have several processing chambers, (in-line onfice sets), in the processing area of each channel. Refernng to FIG. 132, we see what we will call a mulitple-onfice pmcher assembly. It has two, or more, onfices A and B (shown as genenc onfices) per channel processing area holding two hars C and D. By geneπc onfices, we mean any type of onfice including out not limited to carving onfices, coatng onfices, vacuum onfices, and the yet to be discussed har centeπng guides. Although only two onfices are shown here, in practce there are likely five or more onfice sets per channel. Also, notce the interlocking convex projectons E and F and concave notches G and H placed at the margins of the multple-oπfice assembly. These interlocking structures help guarantee alignment between the onfices halves If these onfices were coatng onfices, they could plug into the left wall using projectons I and J Naturally, I and J could be consolidated into one single projecton which branches out within the assembly to supply the multiple onfices, therein Although the multple-oπfice assembly in FIG 132 merely has two copies of one type of onfice, refernng to FIG 133, we see three multiplθ-onfice assemlies A,B, and C vertically attached in-line by vertical-attachment beams D and E Notce how each multple-oπfice assembly is composed of a πght and a left half All the πght halves are supported by beam E and all the left by beam D These vertical- attachment beams, themselves, will most likely each be connected to the end of a tne as shown by A and B in FIG 134 Although shown as genenc onfices, in FIGS 132-134, these stacked onfices will most likely be of different types which perform different functons, such as carving and coating ORIFICE HALVES ARE CLOSED TOGETHER BY PLACING EACH HALF ON A PINCHER MECHANISM This discussion has largely assumed that the har-reshaping onfices will be composed of, at least two moving halves, or parts To be more specific, one half will be disposed on or near, the left wall, and the other on a structure homologous to the har extension attachment embodiment's pmcher mechansim, as shown in FIG 10 Although movement might be limited to only one half of each par, ideally, it is more desirable to think of each in the par of onfices halves as being on two seperate moving pinchers One would move from the nght in a largely similar manner to the pmcher previously descnbed in har extension attachment system The other pmcher would move from the left In other words, the left pmcher would be positoned between the left wall and the πght pmcher, such that it would come between the left wall and the more familiarly positioned πght pmcher This dual-pmcher design is desirable because both pinchers can be moved away from their encircled hars simultaneously This is advantageous because it allows processing of both sides of the har to be stopped simultaneously Furthermore, it could allow one type of processing to stop while other types of in-line processing contnue to occur For example, the hair cross-secton could be carved by one par of carving onfice pinchers below which another par of coatng applicaton onfice pinchers would be responsible for adding structural keratin to the surface of the hair In such a configuraton, the carving par of pinchers could be mdependenty released allowing only the structural mateπal adding onfices to contnue This manuever is likely to be used when the hars have been run through the system before, and only the areas near their roots need to be processed This system could carve the areas only near the roots and apply mateπal to only those carved areas and a little higher In this scenano, if matenal applicaton had to cease at the same moment as carving, a short segment of carved area would never be pulled through a coating-application onfice nor have structural matenal applied to it Since it is desirable to limit complexity wherever possible, we must question each pmcher half's need to move If a dual-pmcher system is used for the applicaton of any fluid, such as a structural coating, the leftmost pmcher halves most likely will have a channel through each that interfaces with fluid outputs on the left wall The desired fluid will flow from the left wall through this channel into ttie center of the isolaton chamber where it will come in contact with a har As such, expectng the left pmcher halves of the fluid applicaton onfices to move once each processing cycle would be adding needless complexity to the system because it disturbs the juncton with the left wall On the other hand, if we were to simply build the left-oπfice halves into the left walls as non-moving, the system could only give the hars one cross-sectonal shape and diameter In order to enable a selection of vanous cross-sectonal shapes and sizes while still reducing complexity, the left pmcher should be allowed to move but only between client sessions when the cross-sectonal shape and size setting needs to be changed To allow the system to produce several different sizes or shapes of har cross-sectons, several different types of cross-sectional- reshaping assemblies could be placed separately on different connectivity-bπdge tine assemblies As shown by the perspective view of a single hair channel in FIG 134, there is one set of vertically in-line onfices for each type of hair cross-section, and each said set is composed of two moving halves, such as the left half A and πght half B Each of these halves is attached to its own tine assembly These different types of cross- sectional-reshaping assemblies could be nested, as pars, in the storage area bracketed by C which is out of the way of the path of har flow through the channels In other words, exiting hars flow to the left of this storage area In sad storage area, there three different cross-sectonal- reshapmg assembly sets, each one capable of producing a different har cross-secton For visually, claπty only the front-most set is fully illustrated, the two sets behind it are only shown as footpπnts E and F Sad illustrated footpπnts correspond to onfice assembly sets composed of two halves, each half is mdependenty attached to a tne assembly like both A and B Thus, this drawing implies six separate halves which require independent attachments to six separate connectvity-bπdge tnes, although only two are actually illustrated When called out of storage for use, the left and πght oπfice-set halves, although on seperate tnes, likely travel together Refe ng to the top plan view of same har channel in FIG 135, we see each oπfice set travels along the path illustrated by anows A, B and C As such the left half may interface with the left wall at point D which supplies the vanous coatng and cooling fluids in additon to vacuum intake ar cunents At this point, the left half E will usually reman statonary and plugged into the left wall duπng har processing and will remain so until processing of an entire human head of har is completed, and a new head needs a different har-cross-sectional-reshaping-oπfice set to be used However, the πght half F of the assembly moves once to pinch hars and once to release them each processing cycle In doing so, its lateral movement is very much like that previously descnbed for the attachment system pmcher as illustrated by FIG 10 The halves of each set may even have forwardly slanted tops, like those descnbed for the pmcher in the har extension attachment embodiment for the purpose of guiding wayward hair tps into place, as illustrated by the three steps in FIG 18 -Refemng to FIG 134 notce how nestng is possible in the πght rear storage area C of the hair channel This nestng area is avalaole because, unlike the har extension attachment system, there is no opposing flow of har extensions from the back The nestng pattem of the oπfice-pincher-connectvity-bπdge-tne assemblies is shown from a plan πght side view by FIG 136 Here, it is assumed that four in-line reshaping onfice halves A,B,C, and D are attached vertically together Thus, in FIG 136, the razor-πmmed carving onfices would move together with the coating application onfices In FIG 137, it is assumed that all in-line coating onfice halves are attached vertically together on a independent tine assemblies A,B or C, but each razor-nmmed carving oπfice half is placed on its own tine assembly D,E, or F In which case, the carving onfices are able to move mdependenty of the coatng applicaton onfices For reference, the connectvity-bπdge portion of the tne assemblies is bracket by G in FIG 137 and by G in FIG 136 As enclosed by penmeter G in FIG 135, the isolaton and sorting mechanisms for the scalp hars are likely present in the same area as in the har extension attachment stack and functon virtually identically as descπbed for the attachment system For example, transport- forward gates will likely be used to carry scalp hars into alignment with each oπfice chamber (or processing chamber) of the cross-sectonal reshaping system in the exact same manner transport-forward gates were used to do the same for the har extension attachment embodiment's pmcher notches (or attachment chambers), as illustrated in FIG 48 Also, in the same manner as the attachment stack when hars reach the end of a hair channel, they will be forced under the connectivity bndges by a bend-under means such as the bend-under belt assembly Of course, if only one cross-sectional shape and size choice were desired, the left onfice halves could be permanenty built into the left wall, and the πght halves could be configured as a single pmcher, very similar to the one used to form attachment chambers in the attachment system Such a p cher would only need to be given a simple side-to-side movement pattern and could be stored to the far πght and in direct line with the left wall half, like the attachment system's pmcher is It wouldnt need to be nested to the rear Such a system might even be able to stop carving before coatng This could be achieved in at least two ways The most reliable way would be to configure the caving onfice pmcher with both left and πght moving halves, both independent of the left wall In a less reliable vaπant, the left carving half would be stationary and built into the left wail This configuration would depend the moving πght onfices half s release of pressure, in order to cease carving HAIR-CENTERING GUIDES It is desirable to make sure that hars are centered in their processing onfices This especially true of coating application onfices which are wider than the hairs going through them, and optimally we do not want the har fibers to rub up aganst the coating-application-oπfice sides, because this would mean the coating would be applied unsymmetπcally around each har To center hars, har-centeπng guides could be used The har-centenng guides, as illustrated from top plan view by A and B in FIG 138, should be configured as two opposing mirror-image pinchers whose notches, often V-shaped, funnel or converge in cross-secton with increased lateral distance from their leading ends These funneling pinchers could be disposed on opposing tnes Each tine should be capable of flexibly yielding, such as with flexibility joints placed in tines like those descnbed for use with the single har isolation system in the har extension attachment embodiment, and illustrated in FIG 117 Refemng to the top plan view in FIG 138, funneling centeπng guides A and B will meet on opposing sides of the har C that needs to be centered They will flexibly yield to accomodate said hair's diameter Since they both yield the same distance under the same amount of force, they will place the ha. s center at the exact center point between them This center point should be calibrated to coincide with the very center of the processing onfice D In FIG 139, this centeπng mechanism is shown from a perspectve view converging on a har in order to center it in a processing oπfice In order to increase the centenng accuracy of such guides, their maximum displacement distance, caused by contact with a hair, should be limited to a very short distance not much greater than a few hair-diameters wide This is to say, although the flexibility joints involved most likely will be capable of moving a much greater distance than a few hair-diameters, the maximum distance they should actually be allowed to move to accomodate venations in hair size should only be a small fraction of this This will mean that the spnng-force change, in response to flexibily yielding relative to a hair's surface, will be very small This can be best done by making both the guides come in contact with part of the surface of the oπfice which they serve in such away that they get hooked or stopped by sad oπfice at a very specific point Sad stopping points position relative to the center of each onfice will be very accurately controlled, and with reference to the centeπng-guide convergence points E and F in FIG 138, and should be less than a few har-diameters from the center of sad oπfice This will simultaneously accurately posititon the starting position of each guide and limit its potential displacement in response to har-diameter vaπation Refemng to a bottom perspective view of onfice A and its centenng-guidβ halves B and C in FIG 140, notce how the bottom of centeπng-guide half C has a projecton D on its underside that comes it contact with the surface of onfice A, thereby, preventng farther advancement of centenng-guide half C The same relatonship exists between centeπng-guide half B and the projecton E on its underside The centenng guide halves get hooked at points where their apexes, or convergence-points, have advanced at most a few har-diameters past where tie outer surface of where a centered har should be You should note that although the guide might move a relatvely great distance before it contacts a part of an oπfice, once its in positon to center a har, it will have an extremely small displacment distance Since in practce multple- oπfice assemblies will be used, the hooking point and hooking projectons used might look slighty different than shown in FIG 140 However, even in multiple-oπfice-per-channel configurations, the centenng guides should have some degree of independent movement from other centenng guides even those in the same channel This is necessary because slighty different size hars might be in a single processing area at once which will require the vaπous centenng guides involved to resilenty yield different amounts This movement independence might be achieved by vanous methods including sub-dividing the tne all the way back to the flexibility joint into sub-tnes each with a single centenng guide half disposed on its end Likewise, independent spπng-resilence means could be placed at the tps of each tne between ttie long portion of the tne and the functonal area portion which constitutes a centenng-guide half Placing independent micro-machme- basβd centenng guides on a tine is an example of the latter If the opposing har-centeπng guides achieve their movement vaπability or resilence through tine flexibility joints, then they will likely be placed on independent tine assemblies not attached to the vertically in-line cross-sectonal-reshaping-assembly onfices, but rather, nested among them using a scheme similar to that illustrated in FIG 137 However, if they are based on micro-machines actuators or any other resilence means placed at the tne tps, then they could either be attached vertically in-line as part of each cross-sectonal-reshaping assmbly or disposed on independent tine assemblies In either case, micro-machine type actuators could be entirely contained at the distal tp of the tnes next to the hars they're responsible for centenng Wherever centeπng guides are placed on seperate tine assemblies from the vertically in-line onfices which they serve, they will likely have their own dropped-down nesting pattem as illustrated by FIG 137 and previously descnbed with reference to imparting independent movement to carving onfices Although less likely, centenng guides might be placed on the statonary walls of the har channel, for example on ttne left wall Refemng to 131 , centenng guides will functon best when one par D is placed above the processing onfices and another par E below However, centenng guides placed above carving onfices might sometmes be redundant because the carving onfices functon as centenng guides themselves when carving hars with diameters greater than their own Har centenng guides will likely contact the har fibers with a low-fncton surface, such as a Teflon coatng, and will likely have rounded, beveled or even downward funneling smooth edges In fact, sad centenng guides may even be configured as some type of opposing roller means Since the centenng guides are in contact with hars that have coatngs on their surfaces, small shavings of said coating might rub off and build up on the guides To prevent cummulative buildup, in addition to exposing the guides to vacuum currents and squirted cleaning fluids from the left wall, the guides might be temporaπly retracted from the hair surfaces and moved over a parallel surface which serves to scrape them clean Of course, this means that a given par of guides would temporally stop centenng when they re moved out of contact with their har To remedy this, centenng-guide pars could be deployed in vertical stacks of at least two pars at each region along the har that needs to be centered When one par is retracted, another stacked par would take over Since centenng guides wiil likely be placed both above and below the in-line processing onfices, there may be two such stacks used An similar option of keeping the centenng guides clean is to limit their contact with the hars For example, the lower centenng guides might only contact a har for a fraction of a second at ttne start of lengthwise pull-through and, then, retract before the coated portions of each har reach them At this point, the presence of other mechanisms such as rollers placed under the processing stack could help the har reman centered FURTHER TINE ASSEMBLY SIMPLIFICATION BY CONSOLDIATION Refemng to FIG 141 , a top perspective view of two consolidated tine assemblies the cross-sectional reshaping system can be further simplified by consoldiating all onfices on the same side, but with different cross-sectonal shapes or diameters, onto a single connectvity-bπdge tne assembly For example, all left onfice halves have been placed on tine-assembly A and all left halves on tine assembly B Based on the cross-sectional shape and diameter desired, the appropoπate set of vertically in-line reshaping onfices could be moved into alignment with the left wall fluid outputs This consolidated configuration simp fes movement and reduces the number of tine-assemblies involved, at the expense of requiπng several different in-line onfices assemblies to move at once Each processing cycle, the entire nght-side tine assembly B and the several vertically in-line onfice sets on it would have to move together Furtherstll, using micro-machines, all onfices and har centenng guides could be placed on just two consolidated connectivity-bndge assemblies, one for the left half the other the πght Micro-machines will not only allow the independent flexibily yielding nature needed for the centenng guides, but also, the independent movement needed to move the carving onfices away from the har before the coatng onfices As mentoned before with reference to the attachment system, the use of micro-machines reduces the complexity of tne-assembly movement, sometmes obviatng the need for tine movement entirely by localizing part movement to only the functional area of a har handier that is directly in contact with a hair Thus, refemng to FIG 141 , the consolidated tne assemblies A and B would only have to move into alignment with the left wall once per user session Dunng the many processing cycles in a session, they could reman statonary using only the localized movement, provided by the micro-machines, to pinch and release the onfice halves To further reduce tne-assembly movement in the consolidated-tne configuraton multple vertically in-line fluid supply outputs and vacuum intake clusters could be placed longitudinally along the length of the left wall In other words, the system would have the familiar set of left wall functonal structures duplicated at several points spaced longitudinally down an extended length left wall In such a configuration, the tine-assembly movement could be limited strictly to side-to-side movement because all vertically in-line oπfice sets would always be laterally in-line with the left wall regions which they can plug into simply by being moved sideways Hars would be brought to a different longitudinal position along the har channel depending on the onfice set currenty in use Since there would be unused onfice sets, such a system would face the problem of either wastng processing fluids or having to turn off the left wall fluid output stacks not in use What has been sad about placing micro-machines on a consolidated-tne assembly can be extended to placing them on a har channel wall EXAMPLE RESHAPING SEQUENCE A likely processing sequence for changing the cross-sectonal shape and diameter of a har is as follows Note that the frame of reference of the following steps is a point on har as it is pulled lengthwise through the following senes of onfices from highest to lowest All or several of these steps maybe performed on different points of single har simultaneously 1 Highest level. A har goes through encircling razor-πng oπfice type pmcher 2 Next highest level. A har has structural keratin applied to it by coating application onfice type pmcher 3 Next lowest level. A slightly wider concentπc onfice is used With it, hair is coated in a temporary protectve wax coating that will harden fast holding the structural keratin coating in place aganst the har as sad keratn coatng fuses with the natve keratn of the har 4 Lowest level A cooling liquid (or gas) is applied to the temporary wax coatng instantly hardening it Technically, applying cooling fluid should be considered a type of coatng applicton, and thus, is done by coatng applicaton onfices Note. Steps 3 and or 4 might be skipped if the structural coating fluid is or can become sufficientiy hard on its own immediately after the coated portion of har exits the application oπfice Perhaps, this could occur by cooling of sad structural keratin coating 5 Removal of wax protectant Just as the wax protectant used in the hair extension attachment process needs to be removed, the wax protectant applied duπng the cross-sectional reshaping process does too A likely way to do this is to apply hot oil to the har which will dissolve the wax The hot oil itself could then be washed off with water and detergent Of course, a device similar to the har extension remover, previously descnbed, would be perfect for such a process ____te__Thιs step occurs after the hars have been waitng on the head a few minutes It is NOT performed simultaneously with steps 1 -4 nor by the vertically in-line onfices used in sad steps Somewhere among the above outputs, on the left wall, could be one or more vacuum intakes to dispose of shavings from the har, excess structural keratn, cooling fluid and wax that escapes, especially when the pmcher onfices open Refemng to FIG 134, these vacuum intakes might be placed as hoπzontal slits between the vaπous fluid output nozzles G or as long vertical slits H on either side of them COATING EXTRUDED UNDER POSITIVE PRESSURE There are, at least, two approaches to applying a coating to the surface of a har One is to try to seal the top end of the oπfice off by making it nanow and perhaps using a resilient matenal to form a seal around the enteπng portion of the hair With the top end sealed off, any applied fluid is free to be extruded only through the bottom of the onfice Of course, the har is being pulled through this same onfice Thus, the mateπal will be exturded concentπcally around the har The goal should be to match the mateπal extrusion speed with the speed that the hair is being drawn through the oπfice Thus, a concentπc coating will be exturded around the central har fiber If two concentπc extrusion onfices are placed vertically in-line, they might both have permanent seals on their top holes, or the moving extruded matenal from the bottom of the topmost oπfice might be fed into the top of the lower oπfice in such a tght manner that said moving extruded matenal itself forms a temporary seal in the top of the lower onfice In most cases, this concentπc extrusion approach is relatively technically challenging COATING SIMPLY STICKS TO HAIR SURFACE A simpler approach would be to use a coating fluid delivered by a combination of very low pressure and capillary action through the supply channels and onfice inteπor Sad fluid is so viscous and delivered under such low pressure that it fills up the inteπor of each coating application onfice, but cannot overcome capillary action within the onfice, and lack thereof outside, in order to escape from the onfice by itself Ideally, the fluid should be introduced into t e intenor of the onfice chamber by an output nozzle that has a relatvely large diameter or cross- sectional area in comparsion to any open area the onfice has around the har in its intenor The coating fluid should have a great enough affinity for the surface of the har that it sticks to sad har and is pulled from sad onfice on the surface of the har The lowest (nearest the scalp) and final cross-section of the onfice encountered by the hair is likely narrower than the more central portions of the onfice It is this final cross- secton's purpose to impart a final cross-sectonal shape and diameter to the fluid coatng as it leaves The coatng is viscous enough to hold this shape until either the hair is coated with a temporary fast hardening coating, such as wax, most likely a fraction of a second later or the structural coating hardens itself in a fast manner In the latter case, the structural keratn itself could be hardened by immediate applicaton of a cooling liquid or gas upon exiting the onfice, perhaps, obviating the need for the protective wax coatng In this case, it is likely that the structural keratin had been warmed somewhat itself before application to the har in order to decrease its viscosity Of course, a vaπant process which relies on actively controlling the flow rate of the liquid coatng rather than entrely on low pressure and viscosity to stop the flow could be considered Such a vanant would be, otherwise, the same relying on the coatng sticking to the har and a lower onfice imparting a final cross-sectional har shape REDUCE TIGHT TURNS FOR EXITING HAIRS Duπng the har cross-sectional reshaping process, the har is pulled lengthwise downward through the vertically in-line reshaping onfices by virtue of the pullback and/or bend-under means achng on it This presents a problem because these systems must be designed to allow access close to the scalp, which necessitates that the har follow a path made up of relatvely sharp comers duπng pullback and bend- under These sharp comers will typically be acceptable in the har extension attachment embodiment However, sharp comers might disturb the stll-soft hair coatngs applied by the har cross-sectional reshaping embodiment Naturally, we can take efforts to lessen the damage any sharp comers may cause by making them rounded and slippery, ideally, even using rollers on such surfaces if feasible In particular, we will want to make sure ttiat the surfaces of the lowest centenng guides, the pullback means, and the connectivity bndge area over the bend-under belts are all smooth and rounded However even comers with smootti and rounded surfaces, might not be able to completely counter the effects of tght turns in path Thus, the ideal embodiment should have a way of obviatng tght turns in a hair's exit path while stll allowing the system to access the hars close to the scalp The best way to both obviate tght turns and stll allow access close to the scalp is to cause the processing stack A to elevate away from the scalp B, as shown in FIG 142, after the hairs C are chambered in their vertically in-line reshaping onfices D As such, the first lengths of har pulled through sad onfices are not pulled by the pullback or bend-under systems, but rather, by the stack elevaton system F This stack elevaton is most likely achieved by mounting the cross-sectonal reshaping stack on its belt buckle E using an assembly F that allows the stack to elevate relatve to the belt buckle while the belt buckle itself remans the same distance over the scalp at all times Once the reshaping stack is elevated, perhaps several centimeters over the scalp, it will be possible for the pullback and bend-under systems to guide the exitng hars along a path made up of much wider-radius comers Of course, to realize this situton, the pullback and bend- under systems have to be configured somewhat differently themselves First of all, the pullback system should be configured of smooth surface guides, ideally rollers, placed underneath the reshaping stack to guide the exiting hars around gentle comers on their way back to the bend-under system Before the reshaping stack is elevated away from the scalp, there is not much room for the smooth surface pullback guides or rollers under it Thus, while the stack is near the scalp, these guides must stored elsewhere and brought into positon under the reshaping stack only while it is elevated There are vanous places where a pullback- guide-support assembly G could be stored while not in use, and vaπous ways it could be moved into positon under the processing stack For example, sad assembly and the guides within it could swing down from recessed portons in bottom of the processing stack, like landing gear on an arc. aft Alternatively, sad assembly could be positoned to the side, back, or front of the reshaping stack most likely on the top surface of the belt buckle and slid into positon laterally or longitudinally, respectively Finally, a combination of these things used together might be used Refe ng to FIG 143, we see that it represents FIG 142 at a later point in time after the pullback system compnsed of guides C and, optonally D, has been actuated backward and the exiting hars E have been engaged by the bend-under system G Optionally, a smooth-surface guide B remans statonary underneath and very slighty behind the center of the vertically in-line processing onfices H to lessen the stresses and rubbing aganst the lowest har centenng guides Optonally, a guide A can be placed underneath and very slighty in front of the center of the vertically in-line processing onfices H to help lessen the stresses and rubbing against the lowest har centeπng gudies Although both guides A and B are optonal, guide B is more strongly recommended At least one smooth surface guide C serves the function of a pullback hook and, as such, is moved back towards the bend-under system G Optionally, at least one other smooth surface guide F serves as a leading protectng edge of the connectvity bπdges in the belt buckle and/or bend-under system Altematvely, a functonal equivalent of this can be achieved by configunng the moving pullback system with two smootti surface guides on both forward and rearward sides of ttie exitng hairs as shown by the inclusion of the optonal guide D In all cases, the smooth surface guides are most ideally rollers Ideally, these rollers will either be made up of independent passive (moved only by hars in contact with it) segments, one for each channel or a single roller that is actvely dπven at the same linear speed and direction that the hairs are moving over its surface Note By passive rollers, we mean rotated only by exitng hars moving over their surface By actvely dnven, we mean rotaton is dπven by a mechanical mechanism At the end of each processing cycle, lastng about second or less, the whole process must reverse so that the reshaping stack can decend towards the scalp and isolate a new batch of hars in its chambers Most ideally, the reshaping stack would be split into two stacks, one ttiat elevates, the other that doesnt In this situaton, the portions of the reshaping stack responsible for isolatng individual scalp hars would not elevate, but rattier, reman near the scalp so that they could be working while the reshaping onfices were elevated Potentally, this scheme of elevatng and introducing smooth-surface pullback guides could be used with any processing-stack configuraton including the har extension attachment stack In fact, it can be considered as an altemeratve means of either har pullback bend- under, or both In fact, more generally it could be considered a means of preventing har buildup in front of an obstruction associated with the processing system. This is to say if the processing stack elevates high enough, and the hars it deals with are short enough, no other bend-under means would be necessary. Also, one should note that the other means of pullback and bend-under discussed, herein, could be applied to this system instead of the exact guide configuraton descπbed above For example, rather than moving pullback rollers backwards themselves, they might reman in place but be actively rotated so that they pull hars into themselves and push said hairs out under themselves. Summary of Cross-Sectional Process Vaπants There are different possible vaπations of the har sculpting and coating methods descπbed above The methods previously descπbed above are those prefened for on-head scalp har processing. However, there are other methods and all methods can be adapted for the alte atve purpose of applying concentπc coatings duπng a factory fiber extrusion manufactunng process The following catalogs different approaches which might be used both for processing scalp hars and applying concentπc coatings duπng a factory manufactunng process for artificial hars: Centenng Within Onfices Dunng Extrusion The center of the har could be forced to coincide with the center of the processing onfices it passes through by one of the following centenng mechanisms- -Where the central fiber is centered in onfices. . -. . .by a stretchable skirt, around the onfice and in contact with the har fiber so as to center it, that uniformly expands around the fiber going through it -. . . y a spπng-mounted individual mechanical supports that converge towards the center point of the each fiber. Such a support is most likely made up of several gores that together form a conical structure. The gores likely have a spπng-hke quality that pushes them inward to meet at a central point but allows t em to yield outward to accomodate a har running through the central axis of the onfice which they serve. They might have a flat smootti surfaces or even rollers at their tips in contact with the har. -. . .by two spπng mounted, or otherwise resilient, mechanical supports converging on the har from opposite sides and that contact the har with notches whose shapes are mirror images of each other and should be configured as two opposing mirror-image pinchers whose notches, often V-shaped, funnel or converge in cross-secton with increased lateral distance from their leading ends between which the har cross-section will be held. This descnpton includes both tne-mounted supports with flexibility joints and micro-machine type supports. -. . .by an adusteble ins setup in which the har cross-secton will get held. The ins is forced to adjust by ttne force of the har pushing on it -. . .by placing the entrance of a second onfice so close to the exit of a first (<1 mm) that the exiting fiber remans stiff and, thus, centered in the second onfice by the first. Approaches to adding keratin-like mateπals to natural scalp hars 1. CONCENTRIC COATING OF HAIR ONLY Concentπc-only coating is when coating is added only to hair surfaces, but coating is stopped when the tip of a hair exits the applicaton system The following catalogs some concentπc-only coatng vanants- -Coating is stopped because a sensor detects that the length of the har has been exceeded. -Sad sensor causes the system to stop extruding coating matenal -Sad sensor causes the system to tπgger a cutter that clips any coating mateπal that trals the har tp. -Coatng is stopped because the pressure at which the coatng matenal is extruded into the intenor of extrusion onfice is not great enough to exit sad onfice The coating matenal can only exit if it sticks to a hair surface as it is pulled through tine onfice. -The coatng mateπal might exit the onfice but it is not structurally stable unless it is coatng the surfaces of a har. Thus, if the coatng leaves the onfice without a har, it gets pulled away by vacuum, perhaps before it even reaches the wax coating onfice -The coating mateπal is structurally unstable unless coating a hair, in part, because only enough coating matenal is supplied to the extrustion onfice and only fast enough to coat a har, not to form a new length of fiber via extrusion 2. FORMATION OF ADDITIONAL HAIR FIBER LENGTH VIA EXTRUSION Not only should the keratin-like matenal be used to coat natural scalp hars, but when the tp of a har exits the application system the coatng extrusion is contπued, no longer as a concentπc πng coatng, but as the extrusion of a full diameter hair shaft. Thus, the length of each natural har is extended by the extruded matenal. Specifics Regarding Hair Attributes Achieved Through Processing. HAIR CURLINESS CHANGING IN RESPONSE TO NEW HAIR CROSS-SECTION Thiols or other chemcials capable of breaking disulfide bonds could be applied to the har in its natural state (not in curlers, coated with wax-like substance or otherwise fixated) after har cross-sectional sculpting. When a har is given a new cross-section by sculpting, the internal forces which determine its degree of curiiness would be expected to change. However, the hat's onginal internal protein molecules will, in some cases, still be locked together largely in the same manner that they were before har shaft sculptng. Applicaton of disulfide- breaking chemicals will allow the molecules to reorganize themselves in accordance with the new stresses they are expeπencmg. Thus, if a har cross-secton is made rounder, it will tend to reorganize its molecules in a manner that encourages straightness. Likewise, if a hair cross- section is made more oblong, it will tend to reorganize its molecules in a manner that encourages greater waviness or curiiness. In other words, when a hair cross-section is made more oblong, application of perm chemicals without curlers could produce increased curiiness, anyway. Without cross-sectonal har sculptng, applicaton of perm chemicals without curlers would probably either do nothing or make the har straighten When using this disulfide bond reoranizaton scheme, it is probably best to configure the process so that the har dπes before the disulfide-breaking chemicals are neutralized. Since all hair tends to straighten out when soaking wet, the har will not expeπence the true effect of its new cross-secton untl somewhat dry Thus, by exposing the har to disulfide-breaking chemicals duπng the drying process, molecular reorganizaton will be possible duπng the drying process. In turn, the molecules will organize in manner consistent with the internal forces present in dry har, not wet har. To summaπze, the sequence of applicaton would be har cross-sectonal sculptng by carving and/or coating, removal of any temporary protective coating, application of disulfide-breaking chemcials to unfixated hair, letting har dry with said chemicals on them. Of course, an altematve approach is to simply estimate the waviness that corresponds to a particular cross-sectonal har shape and fixate the har in a manner consistent with this waviness. In this case, the disulfide-breaking chemcials could could be neutralized while still wet There are several possible ways to fixate har in the wavy manner that corresponds to its particular cross-sectional shape. The first is to use conventional external fixation devices, like curlers, with conventional disulfide-breaking chemicals, like perm solutions and, of course, to apply them in the conventional manner A second way to fixate har is to apply a disulfide-breaking chemical to the surface of each hair and then coat each hair with a temporary protectve coatng, like a wax-like substance This wax-like substance could then be curled or cπmped into the appropoπate shape, which would hold the hars in place without any external fixation devices, such as curlers. The disulfide-breaking chemical and protective coating could be applied duπng cross-sectional har reshaping. In which case, the disulfide-breaking chemical could be one and the same as that mixed in with the keratn-type coatng to keep it dissolved Altematvely, additonal disulfide-breaking chemical could be added directy to the hars surface duπng cross-sectonal har reshaping. In either case, under the influences of disulfide-breaking chemicals, the keratin-type coating would tend to meld with the surface of the har, and the entire hars protein structure would soften allowing it to take on a new degree of curiiness corresponding to its new cross-sectional shape. Likewise, the temporary protectve coatng, used for fixaton, would likely the be the same one applied for the purpose of cross-sectional reshaping. Duπng the fixation peπod, chemical reorganization means that the har might not only be soft enough to change its shape but, most likely, to actually meld with the structural keratin-type coating applied to it Chemically speaking, this includes formation of disulfide bonds between the native har keratin and the keratn-type coatng. Furtherstll, it might even include a small degree of volumetnc mixing of the two. As such, the protectve coatng would be necessary to support the har duπng this weakened tme It is possible that fixaton might not always be necessary which might make a wax-like temporary protectve coatng something that could be avoided so long as the structural keratn mateπal remans undisturbed on the hair while it chemically hardens One way to do this is to formulate the structural keratn-like coatng so that it becomes farly solid upon cooling Of course, cooling alone probably would not provide the long-term stability we desire Thus, this coatng might be designed so that when it is cooled far below room-temperature it hardens, but when allowed to re-warm to room-temperature, it softens enough to allow chemical hardening to take place via a mechanism such as the oxygen in the ar causing thiol-reduced disulfide bonds to re-establish. Remember, reducing agents in the coating will likely leach over to the native har keratin causing it to soften and littie, thus, allowing melding of the coatng with the native hair Duπng this fragile re-melt peπod, the hairs will need to be protected from sticking together and perhaps even deforming To achieve this, we could revert back to the wax-like coatng which is capable of even holding somewhat liquid coatngs to the surface of the har. In additon to, or instead of, a wax-like protectant, we might be able to use a thick liquid or gel that doesnt harden but acts as a protectant by virtue of its lubπcity and mtπnsic physical structure. Sad liquid protectant ideally will have affinity for the keratn-like coatng on the hars, however, its presence would keep adjacent coated head hars from stcking together, just as cooking oil keeps food from stcking to the pan. Also, the lubπcity of this coatng will help hars exit from the reshaping system stack with so little fπcton that their coatng isn't rubbed off or distorted even if the hars are expected to bend around an object on their way out Of course, one of the greatest advantages of using a non- hardening protectant is that it can simply be washed off once the structural coatng's hardening is complete Finally, we should note that the liquid or gel protectant could serve the simultaneous purpose of a coolant for the structural coatng or any other type of coatng applied pπor to it COATING AFFECTING HAIR SURFACE PROPERTIES Ranid Cooling to Change Surface Texture Structural keratn-like coatng of a har followed by passing the har through an oπfice, or output nozzle, that exposes it to a rapid change in temperature which causes the applied coatng to wπnkle, thereby, giving the hair a rougher less light reflective texture This rapid cooling can be achieve by use of a cool liquid or gas This temperature-induced wπnking can be calibrated to produce the precise surface texture desired. Note: Using a structural keratin-like mateπal that can throughly re-melt before hardening permenately by a chemical reaction or using only a non-solidifying protectant will encourage surface-texture wπnklmg generated duπng a rapid cooling to smooth out. Doing the opposites will encourage a rougher surface texture for a less shiny more muted har appearance. Imparting Texture Through Surface to Surface Contact Structural keratin-like coating of a hair followed by passing the har through an oπfice that exposes it to a textured, perhaps vibrating, surface in order to impart (impπnt or abrade) a rough less light refiectve texture on the surface of the coated har Said textured surface might be configured as the familiar in-line oπfice with two halves or in an similar manner to the textured moving-cylinder extrusion roller pars descnbed in the artificial har manufactunng section The rollers could transfer the texture impnnted on their inner-surfaces to the hair fiber's coatng, whether the coatng was applied before or duπng sad fibers movement through sad rollers Of course, any such use of the movmg- cylmder approach would have to be modified so that the cylinder pars can fit into the multiple parallel processing areas of the connectivity- bπdge tine configuration used in the har-reshaping system Structural Coatings As a Way to Control Hair Color The keratin-like structural coating might have a custom color that matchs the har Where this color is custom produced by mixing component colors. The component colors can be mixed as pure colorants and then introduced to the structural coatng Or the structural coatng can be produced in several standard component colors which are then mixed together to produce the final custom color The mixing can occur anywhere between the component supply reseviors and the output nozzles. The colors could be of a transparent nature that allows the natural har color to influence the appearance of the har Altematvely, the colors could be competely opaque such that they completely hide the natural color of the har shaft and produce whatever artificial color is desired. Structural Coatnαs Addivrtives As a Way to Control Hair Texture In an analogous manner to colorants, particles could be added to the coating to influence its texture. Such paticles might help give the har a rough less light refiectve texture. Alternative Hair Cross-Secton Modificaton Means In addition to razor-edge carving and coating, some additional ways of hair cross-sectional modification are catalogued below. Most likely, these methods would be employeed themselves using some type of onfice which the hars are drawn through duπng processing Hair mavbe carved awav bv vaπous means: -Mechanical carving/cutting by razor edge -Mechanical gπnding or abrasion -Where said gπnding is vibrational -Destruction by electromagnetic energy -Laser vaporizing/burning (especially excimer) —Laser directed tangently on a plane —Laser directed in a cone formation with a diameter shield —Laser directed parallel to hair shaft -Electron beam vapoπzing/burning Hair mavbe reshaped with pressure by vaπous means: -Mechanical melting & reforming of shape -Mechanical pressure to reform from tne side (maybe combined wth heat) -Mechanical stretching to reform by putting direction means Note: Most of the above-mentioned pressure-reshaping means work by pulling the hair through a narrowing conical onfice which acts like a die that the har is drawn or exturded through in a similar manner as that used in the manufacture of metal wire * If using draw- through onfice/die-approach, heatng har to soften, before or duπng pull-through, or applying disulfide-breaking chemicals ahead of tme could be a beneficial adjunct Altematve Har Cross-Secton Modificaton Means Examples If a laser, such as an UV excimer laser, were used to carve hair cross-sectons, its light would be supplied in a similar manner to the U.V. adhesive cuπng laser, previously descnbed. However, it would, most likely, output its light from the two halves of an onfice that close around each har. These halves would likely have largely semi-circular shapes. Ideally, these halves would serve as optcal outputs capable of directing their light either along a cylinder with walls largely parallel to the surface of the hair, a cone that both encircles and slants towards the har shafts center, or along many lines in a largely flat plane each with angles tangent to the outer surface of the hair's cross-secton. In all cases, the goal is to am light supenfically at the surface of tne har so that if preferentally carves only the most protruding surfaces of the hair while leaving the recessed areas untouched Using an abrasive to carve the har surface is another altematve Naturally, like the laser, the abrasive would be positoned in two halves sunoundmg the har. Most likely, the halves would be semi-circular in shape However, neither a laser nor abrasive is the most prefened way to carve a hair's cross-section, but rather, are alternatives to the encircling razor πng Miscellaneous Notes on Hair Cross-Sectiona Reshaping * We have already discussed that disulfide-reducing chemcials can redissolve a concentπc coatng layer and also the har itself causing them to merge as one while they are being held together and protected by an outer temporary protectve coatng layer such as wax. -To further this melding process, perhaps use laser or light energy, or a mechanical means, to cut holes through the har shafts in order to allow the added keratin coating to actually penetrate the har shaft Of course, such a hole-cutting means would likely be deployed on tines and positioned in-line with the reshaping onfices * The centenng guides (and perhaps pushout and pullback actuators too) should likely have very smootti funneling surfaces that may even have identatons. the shape and size of a har cross-secton semi-circle, at their rearmost har contact edges. Ideally, these smooth surfaces ttirough capillary acton and/or a hydrophilic nature would encourage the har to hydroplane along their surface. * The coatng coolants should likely be formulated with an ant-freeze that allows its temperature to be made extremely low, thereby, allowing it to work faster. * Cooling fluid likely applied using a coatng onfice in preference to a spraying nozzles so that it can be applied in the way that least disrupts coatngs previously applied to a hars surface. However, sparying nozzles are an opton. * Cleaning nozzles maybe present on the left wall in the reshaping system in the same way they are likely to be in the attachment system, as previously descnbed. " Many of the concepts useful in the Har Extension Factory Manfactuπng secton can be applied to har-cross-sectonal reshaping and vice versa. For example, the chemical coatngs and chemical hair fiber formulatons used in factory manufactunng can usually be used as structural coatings for har-cross-sectioπal reshaping. Likewise, many of the physical structures, such as the moving- cylinder spinneret hole approach, can be applied Similarly, when we speak of structural keratin mateπals that can be used as coatings, it should be understood that keratin-like mateπals might be substituted. * Whenever we speak of wax coatings, such as for temporary protective coatings and for temporary fixation purposes, we should realize that any wax-like coating could be substituted whether it is technically a wax or not. By wax-like, we mean something that softens when heated and hardens when coded. * In the attachment system, the processing area is more specifically called the attachment area. Since other vaπant systems, used for purposes other than attaching har extensions, are analogous to the attachment system, whafs true for the attachment area in the attachment system should usually be tme for tne processing areas of the other types of systems For example, the processing area of the cross-sectonal-hair-reshapmg system could be refened to as the reshaping area, and is supplied with scalp hairs in a similar manner to the attachment area. The column of vertically in-line reshaping onfices are a form of processing chamber homologous to the processing chambers in the attachment system called attachment chambers Thus, in discussions of the support equipment, such as the tensionmg har straightener, connectvity-bndge-bend-under system, and belt buckle, what applies to the attachment stack and its attachment area applies in an analogous manner to any processing stack and its processing areas and chambers. Types of processing systems that perform functons other than har extension attachment include those that, apply coatngs to the surface of hars, reshape har cross-sections, automatically cut scalp hars to a controlled length, and those that implant and remove har implants into and from the the scalp. * The vaπous onfices used for cross-sectonal reshaping require extremely tght tolerances sometmes on the order of less than one micron This is especially true fo the razor-πmmed carving onfices whose razor edge is so small it most likely must be produced without the ad of gπnding equipment. Thus, for all onfices coatng-t pes included, but particularly those involved in carving, extremely precise manufactunng methods must be used The most promising method involves electroforming the oπfice-halves on a template which itself was produced by ion-beam milling. The oπfice-halves would likely be formed out of a metal such as nickel. Thus, in order to preserve the sharpness of the razor-πmmed cutting edge, vapor deposition of a diamond-like coating onto the nickel is advisable. 3. Implant and Remove Surgical Hair Implants Use of Surgical Hair Implants Conventional Surgical Har Impants By conventonal surgical har implants, we mean those artificial devices that have anchors that allow a hair fiber, real or artificial, to be anchored into the dermis. In contrast, har transplants involve transplanting living human follicles onto the head There are many problems with hair implants. First, since they don't grow, the wearer is typically confined to a single hairstyle Additonally, most of the people with implants, also, have natural har on their heads of approximately the same length. Thus, duπng har cuts, great care has to be taken to make sure only the growing natural har is cut. If implanted har is cut, it will not grow back Consequenty, small har-cuttmg mistakes can have a cummulatve effect over tme. Furthermore, since implanted hars don't grow, over the years they tend to wear out Undesirably, this will necessitate their eventual removal. Finally, the har fibers used in implants need to be composed of some organic matenal in order to look natural. This matenal can be natural human hairs harvested from a donor's head or artificial fibers fabπcated out of a plastic. However, in both cases, the wearer's immune system is highly likely to reject organic material which it considers non-self. This will likely lead to itching and inflammation around each implant site which will necessitate their eventual removal. Solution to Conventonal Implants To solve the problems of conventional implants we would first have to use extremely short hair implants, perhaps, with less than 2 centimeters of fiber above the scalp. This way there's no way that they could accidentally get cut dunng harcuts. Second, we could either manfacture them out of or coat them with an inert inorganic matenal. For example, a thin diamond-like coating, applied to the surface of an organic fiber using vapor chemical deposition, could be used to do this. This would make it nearly impossible for the implants to wear out. As an added benefit, the inorganic surface of sad implant would most likely prevent the immune system from reactng with it In fact, if we werent concerned about them weaπng out or being cut we could configure full-length implants whose tps were inorganic, or coated as such, but whose longer cosmetc fiber portons were entrely organic. Such a scheme would probably prevent the immune system from reacting with them, but such fibers would stll wear out (Note: The entire fiber could be coated with inorganic mateπal to prevent it from weaπng out. However, this would preclude entirely normal harstyling, and such fibers could still get cut accidentally.) Up untl this poin it seems that we have to make a choice between implant fibers that will wear out and short unnatural-looking inorganic implant fibers. The solution is simple. Implant the short, long-lasting, non-allergenic inorganic fibers for use as anchors. Finally, use the har extension attachment system, previously descπbed, to attach temporary cosmetic har extensions to them. If the har extensions wear out or are accidentty cut, they must simply be removed using the har extension removal process, previously descπbed The anchor implants reman, and a fresh set of cosmetc har extensions can be applied to them. Also, the wearer is free to change his harstyle whenever he desires by having the old cosmetc har extensions removed and new batch applied. Finally, it should be noted that using inorganic implant anchors is not necessaπly the only way this inventon can be applied. Most any matenal that doesnt tπgger the body's immune response might be used to make implantab le anchors The key idea is ttiat ttie cosmetc appearance of the implant anchors doesnt matter because the cosmetc har extensions will later be attached to them For example, a protein from someone's body, such as his own har keratn, might be used to form the implant anchors. Using Processing Stack Technology for Har Implant Surgery Processing Stack Modifications Needed to Implant Har Implants A modified veπsion of the har extension attachment system could be configured to implant hair implants into the skin. Such a system would assume that many patients still have some natural har. Thus, the tensionmg har straghtener, the front funneling portions of the hair channels, and some har handlers like the pushback gates, all as previously descπbed in the har extension attachment system, would likely reman. These structures could be used to confrol the position of the person's natural scalp hars, although we wont be attaching anything to sad scalp hars or chaig g them in anyway. The vaπous methods of stoπng and loading cosmetc har extensions into the processing area can be adapted for the stonng and loading of har implants into their processing areas. Of course, since har implants often have pellet-like anchors at their bases, the loading system very likely will manipulate these pellet-like anchors directly in preference to the fibrous portons. When speaking ot processing chambers with reference to the surgical har implantion system, we are refemng to a needle or other means capable of being actuated and dnving implants beneath the surface of the skin The needle, or other sub-dermal actuaton means, should be consided a homologous structure to the attachment chambers in the previously descnbed har extension attachment system and to the in-line processing onfices in the previously descπbed har cross-sectonal reshaping system. Of course, this needle, or more broadly sub-dermal actuaton means, will be loaded in an analogous manner to said homologous structures. For example, such a needle, or hollow chamber, will likely either have a slit in its side to allow loading or be loaded from the top. After a supenficial loading of the implant into the upper-regions of the chamber, it is likely that a plunger, or functionally equivalent means like pressunzed ar, will be actuated down into sad chamber pushing sad loaded implant down with it Sad chamber will likely narrow or have an internal nm which catchs the implant as a specific point in the chamber However, this catch point shouldnt be an absolute bamer. Either the implants end should be able to be forced past it with increased pressure of the plunger, or it should be a movable obstacle. Forcing the implant past the obstacle could be made possible by making the obstacle's positon on the inteπor wall of the chamber flexible by cutting slits in the chamber wall that would allow this. This would be particularly true if said obstacle was positon at the freest end of a long tab-like structure formed by three intersectng cuts in the wall Of course, to encourage flexing of sad tab-like structure, the obstacle on it might have a somewhat tapered or ramp-like shape towards the direction from which tie implant will come. Alte atvely, the obstacle might just be made flexible itself by being configured in a spπng-like shape such as an arch or from a flexible matenal. Altematvely, the obstacle could be made movable by some extenor actuator For example, the flexible tab-like structure could be externally actuated by attaching an extremely thin and strong fiber to it which can be pulled. Sad fiber might be placed in the intenor or extenor of the chamber. Altematvely, the obstacle can be made movable by positioning an external member through a hole or slit in the side of the chamber. The obstacle could be moved itself by moving the external member as a whole. Sad external member is likely configured with a L- shape where the foot of sad L-shape is inserted to serve as the obstacle. Both the extremely strong fiber and the L-shaped external member might conform so closely to the extenor of sad chamber that they could be forced sub-dermally with it. Either the fiber or external member might be actuated by constructing them, at least partially, out of a matenal that changes its shape in response to electπc currents. Furtherstll, the fiber and external member might both be entirely obviated by constructing the obstacle itself or a portion the sub-dermal actuation chamber itself out of such a matenal. With the implant chambered in the the sub-dermal actuaton chamber, sad chamber is ready to be actuated down into the human skin. Sad chamber pierces the skin by virtue of being the functional equivalent of a needle-itself or by tine end of the implant having a sufficientiy sharp point Once at the correct depth beneath the skin surface, if necessary, the implant is moved past the obstacle holding it by actuation of the chamber's internal plunger means and pushed out the end of the chamber. While the plunger remans extened, the walls the chamber should be retracted out the skin, thereby, leaving the implant underneath the skin's surface. The system will likely have a bend-under means, like that descnbed for the har extension attachment embodiment, operatng. This will allow the person's long natural hairs, and any implants if long enough to need it, easy passage under the connectvity-bndges of the system Preventing Damage to Remaining Hair Follicles Of course, for maximum rapidity, this system is best configured as a tne-based system with multple channels in parallel. This would mean that multple sub-dermal actuation chambers, or needles, would held largely perpendicular to the human skin directy over parallel processing areas. We would probably limit the number of needles per processing area to one because, being performed only once in a person's life, this operaton does not have to be as fast as har extension attachment. The scalp-har tops can be held aside from these processing areas at any given moment. This is made possible by the forward tension of the tensionmg hair straghtener, the backward tension of the bend-under system, and the hair handler's ability to close out scalp hars from said processing areas. Thus, the processing areas are relatvely free of obstructions just as if someone were parting the har with his fingers in these regions. However, there stll are follicles and hair shaft bases that we would rather not hit with a needle. So that the sub-dermal actuation chambers are only forced into the skin where there are no follicles or har-shaft bases beneath them, we could use the following system configuration. First, all sub-dermal actuator chambers, or needles, are attached at the distal ends of a tne-assembly. Said tne assembly is oscillated back forth either independently of the entire processing stack or as one with the entire processing stack. At the same ends of these tines, or ends of an independent parallel tine-assembly layer, are optical sensors that look perpendicularly down at the skin along axes parallel to the sub-dermal actuaton chambers. The oscillaton pattem is such that it can be known that an optcal sensor will sweep over a given area of skin a known amount of tme before a corresponding sub-dermal actuation chamber. In other words, the needles and sensors take turns being over a given any point of skin in the processing area. If a sensor doesnt detect any obstacles in the way of the single needle which it serves, sad needle will be actuated down into the skin when it reaches the patch of skin the sensor found clear. However, a detected obstacle will prevent this. You should note that, although parallel sensors and needels move as a single unit, each needle's actuaton is controlled individually, and each sensor is monitored individually The sensors work by detectng a difference between hair follicles, hair shaft bases, and empty skin. The needle must only be forced into regions of empty skin which have adequate safey margins from follicles and hair shaft bases. The sensors are based on the assumpton that follicles and har shaft bases have different optcal profiles from empty skin. To guarantee that this is true, a cream-like preparation could be worked worked into the follicles. This cream or fluid is likely a carbon preparaton that absorbs infra-red light Such carbon preparatons are already used in medicine for purposes of laser har removal. In laser har removal applicatons, they absorb laser energy so as to become hot and kill the har follicle. Such a preparaton would guarantee a distent optcal profile for ttne follicles. However, the use of follicle colorant cream neednt be limited to those that absorb IR. Perhaps, formulations that asorb or reflect other frequencies of light could be used. Nevertheless, due to its ability to penetrate the skin, IR is an excellent frequency to use. Har shaft bases might be made optically distract with a coloπng agent that selectively colors hars but not the skin's surface. Although the sensor system might rely entrely on natural light, it is probably more likely that an external light source will be attached to or used with the system. Most likely, this light source will be IR. At some p nt, the optcal sensors will need to convert the light image into digital electπc currents that a computer can understand. This conversion might take place in consolidated sensor components atop the processing stack from which wires run to the computer in control of the process. On the other hand, fiber optcs might be run from sensor optcal inputs to a remote electro-optcal conversion system. Thus, the light would be run to a remote locaton where it is digitally converted, rather than atop the processing stack. The advantage of this second approach is that the conversion apparatus itself could be made larger than if it had to be placed atop the har processing stack. The systems will likely control and monitor its movement over the scalp precisely using mechanims descπbed for the hair extension attachment system. For example, it likely will have wheels rolling over the scalp capable of monitoπng the system movement speed. Furtherstll, these wheels might be configured with braking capabilities so that they can slow the system down if necessary. As in the har extension attachment system, har density can be judged by using hair-presence sensors across the har channels and compaπng the number of hars to the movement speed over the scalp. Additonally, this embodiment could employee its optcal follicle and har base sensors to facilitate har density estimation. In either case, the system could adjust the density of hair implants that it applies based on this mformaton. Finally, the independent movement of needle chambers makes it possible to use depth gauages to gaurantee exact skin depth penetraton everytime. A depth gauge might be something as simple as a collar or other such obstructon on an extenor side of each needle To further increase accuracy and ensure needles always enter the skin at the same angle, the needle assemblies could be give a slight ability to pivot A part of each needle assembly, most likely flat and concentπc to each needle itself, could proceed each needle itself to the skin. Upon contact with the skin, this part will cause sad needle assembly to pivot to the exact, largely perpendicular angle, with the skin desired. Since the actual needle and its proceeding part have a telescopic relatonship, being composed of sliding overlapping sβctons allowing compression, the needle will contnue to move and enter the skin. Of course, the needle angle and depth could be controlled by actively dπven mechanisms. For example, the pivot that controls the needle angle could be actuated to the desired angle. Perhaps, this angle might automatically change as the position on the head changes Reverse the Entre Process in Order to Remove Hair Implants In order to remove har implants, the entre process can be reversed but with just a few modificatons. Duπng the reversal of the process the sub-dermal actuation chamber, or needle, will be expected to grab the implant out of the skin, rather than letting go of it To do this, the obstructon on the inteπor ot the needle needs to be able to temporaπly move out of the way of the implant as the needle moves down around it This can be achieved in the exact same ways as obstructon movement is achieved above The only difference being a ramp-like structure, if used, should taper towards the bottom of the needle, or in other words, the direction from which the implant will come at it Of course, the system has to be configured so that it can locate the implant and actuate a needle only when it is centered on an implant. The first way this can be done involves the use of the optical sensors as descnbed before The portions of the implant, especially the portions of it that anchor it beneath the skin, should have surfaces of an optically distinct mateπal, most likely in the IR range. This way the system can look for each implants profile and use at least two sides of the margin of normal skin around an implant to determine whether it is centered on sad implant. This will also allow the svstem to discπminate between natural hars and implants. A second way that might be used, in addition to or instead of the sensor method, involves mechanical needle guides Of course, we sad before that the needles would likely be mounted in a pivoting manner, and that the needle chambers are homologous structures to the attachment chambers and in-line reshaping onfices. Thus, if we use the mechanisms descπbed in the analogous embodiment to load an oπfice, or hook, on the side of or in-line with, the needle with an m-scalp hair implants fiber portion, then the needle assembly could slide down along this hair. Since the needle assembly would pivot duπng this sliding process, the needle would be pertecty lined up with the implant by the tme it reached the skin's surface The system would, likely also, need some type of sensor means to differentate between natural scalp hairs and hair implants. One way to obviate the need for sad sensor means is to first give the person a suffiαentiy short harcut and, next, use the har extension attachment system to attach hair extensions to all scalp-anchored hars real or artificial. After allowing the natural hairs to grow out, use an exteremly precise hair- extension-removal system that only removes hair extensions at a minimum distance away from the scalp. It could do this my not applying solvent below a certain hair length. The much longer har extensions that reman would only be attached to artificial hair implants Configure the automated implant system such that it only hooks its needles onto hairs above a certain length. Thus, the needles would only be hooked onto har extensions attached to artificial implant anchors and, thus, would only remove artificial implants. This Device Could Be Used to Transplant Hair Follicles Of course, if living har follicles could have their follicle portons pelletzed or made into small plugs, they could be implanted in the exact same manner as that previously descπbed for non-living implants. With advances being made in cultuπng hair follicles in vitro . we believe that industiial processes based on growing hars out of the body will be possible. Such processes would serve as an excellent source for har follicles which could be pelletzed, placed in cartπdges, and implanted in the head using the automated device descπbed herein. 4. Automated Haircutting Processing Stack Basic Automated Hairstyle Cutting Svstem In this alternative embodiment, we will descnbe how the basic processing stack design can be adapted for cutting har with the professional precision required to produce attractve harstyles. In the pnor art, there is a device which allows a person to cut his own har. This device consists of a relatively conventional electπc hair tnmmer mounted in a bracket that holds sad tnmmer portion a fixed height over the scalp while at the same time supplying a vacuum source above sad tnmmer portion. The vacuum source both holds hars straght upward so that they all get cut at the same length and carnes away hair tπmmings. The problem with this system is that it produces a harcut in which every hair on the head is cut to the same length, unlike most professional harcuts which have many lengths, and this length is limited to a maximum far below that required for most womens' hairstyles. Our processing-stack type system will not have these limitations. It can cut hars to different lengths at different positions on the head. First of all, we've sad that the processing-stack hair -cutting system will be able to vary its cutting length at different positons on the head. Of course, this requires that its control system is able to ascertain its positon on the head. This will be possible because the har-cuttmg embodiment, like other processing stack embodiments, will usually be guided over the head using a track-guide cap, or functonal equivalent It may be the normal procedure for the system operator to move the handle unit over the tracks in a standardized specific order, or to have access to an input device that lets the system's computer know the nature of an impromptu track-order change The system computer will know when the end of a track is reached and a new one begun either because there is a scalp contact sensor on the handle unit or finger switch the operator is supposed to tngger between track changes. The system will also have sensors that detect movement speed and distance over the scalp, like those discussed elsewhere within this document. Combining knowledge of the track number with data about the movement along that track, the system will be able to estimate its positon on the head This will allow the system to cut different areas of hair to different lengths. Note: This is the prefened method of Iocatng unit positon on the head. However, the here -descπbed harcuttng system will be able to function with any positon-locaton means. At this point, we could simply configure the processing stack as a conventonal tne-based hair tnmmer with the unique feature of being able to elevate and descend relative to the scalp. This would achieve benefits over tne pnor art in that it could accurately cut different areas of har on the scalp different lengths. However, such a configuraton would stll have a maximum har-cuttng length less than that required for many womens' hairstyles. Thus, we will likely want to implement a stll more sophisticated embodiment. In this more sophisticated embodiment, the system should be configured with the har isolaton and chambeπng capabilrtes as descnbed for the har extension attachment system, using mechanisms descnbed for it, such as the har handlers or functonal equivalents. Just as the attachment system isolated individual hairs and put them into attachment chambers, the harcuttng system will put isolated hairs into homologous structures that we will call hair-cutting chambers. Unlike the attachment and cross-sectional reshaping systems, which ideally, require that only a single scalp har is put in each processing chamber. The har cutting system can be a litte more lax and allow a limited number of hars per chamber. In fact, the system might very well use one consolidated chamber per tne channel that allows many hars together in it. This reduced precision is acceptable in the har-cuttng vanant because its fine if many hairs from a small region of the head get cut the same length. Afterall, this is what happens when a professional hairstylist uses scissors. Once the hars are chambered, we will have a har handler, most likely moving-tne or micro-machine based and equipped with a sharp cutting edge, to slide like the pmcher of the attachment system embodiment towards the left wall of the processing area, thereby, cutting the hairs in the processing area chamber or chambers The cπtcial parameter is when to tngger this cutting mechanism. We have already explained how the system estmates its positon on the scalp, but it must also, be positioned at the conect point along the length of the har before cutting. This can be achieved in the same manner as descnbed for pulling hars through the cross-sectonal har reshaping embodiment. Pullback means and/or bend-under means and/or stack elevaton means should be used to pull tine hars lengthwise through the onfices in which they're chambered. Because we will most likely be using a tensionmg har straghtener means, we will assume hairs in processing chambers are pulled tght and are, in effect, zeroed with reference to the amount of their length that has yet to be pulled through a given processing chamber. At this point, the means used to pull the har lengthwise through the chambers from har base to har tp, should be actuated. Since the rate at which this device pulls the hars should be known and ideally constant, we can estmate the length of har pulled through by tming When the system computer determines the correct har length has been reached, the cutting means is actuated. (The lengthwise pull through means may or may not have been stopped.) Thus, a limited number of hars have been cut to a specific pre-programmed length. This is repeated many tmes as the system moves over the head Note: Even if micro-machine type har handlers arent used, independent control among different har channels and hair cutting chambers is still possible using a tine-based system The configuration that allows this requires tnes that have hair-handler functonal areas (like cutters) in only a subset of the channels, not all of them This would require that the stack of moving tne-assemblies to have more layers, and as such, be thicker. Nevertheless, this is entrely acceptable, especially, because the system can be calibrated to take this into account. For example, the lower cutting tnes in the stack could be tmed to be actuated later than the higher ones. This is because the corresponding length points on the hars reach sad lower cutting tines later than the higher ones. Also, the cutting means isnt limited to a p cher coming from a single side The cutting means could be composed of two cutters that mesh together as the blades of a par of scissors do. One of these of these blades could be either statonary or moving. Programming Hairstyles into the Svstem We have explained how the system can cut hars at different positions on the head different lengths, but how does the svstem know what those different lengths should be. More specifically, what lengths will produce a specific and aesttietcally pleasing harstyle. There are two ways the system can determine this. In the first method, the system could be given basic parameters about the size and shape of a person's head, most likely based on the size and shape of track guide chosen. Next, a standard harstyle could be chosen, such as from a standardized picture book, and this selection could be entered into the computer. Finally, the computer would have been pre-programmed with the har-length informaton necessary to achieve the selected harstyle on the given head type. A second manner of programming a hairstyle into tie system is to use empiπcal sensor measurements from a specific individual's head. This way a person could have her har cut once by a professional, perhaps even a world-famous harstylist, and have this exact harcut automatically duplicated on her head for years to come. Technically, how the sensor mearsur ements would be made is by placing a har presence sensor, or sensors, at a position where it can monitor the presence of hars in the processing area, or even in individual processing chambers by using multple sensors. Ideally, this sensor should be placed at approximately the same height as the sharp-edged cutting har handler and have har-detecting capabilities limited to a line or plane at sad height To program the system, it should be moved through all of the har on the head using a standardized pattern. Duπng this programming operaton, no har will be cut. Ideally, programming should be done immediately following a professional harcut, and the data obtained should be saved for later use Of course, the system measures har lengttis in a very similar manner to the way the it esimates when to cut har, as descπbed above. Specifically, we will assume hairs in processing chambers are pulled tght and are, in effect, zeroed with reference to the amount of their length that has yet to be pulled through a given processing chamber. At this point the means used to pull the hars lengthwise ttirough the chambers from har base to har tp, should be actuated. Since the rate at which this device pulls the hars should be known and ideally constant, we can estimate the length of har pulled through by tmmg. When the har presence sensors detect that most hairs have been pulled ttirough the chamber past their tps, the computer records the har length at this specific point on the head. It is at this length that the cutting means will be tπggered when automated har cutting is performed in the future. Thus, the lengths of hars at all positons on the head have been measured and recorded Note: This recorded har-length data can be used not only to control the cutting process but, also, to determine, in advance, whether an individual's hair is long and dense enough all over to accept a particular harcut style. The density can be determined through the har countng methods, descπbed elsewhere in this document, or using sensor means sensitve to the volume of hars passing before them in the har channels. Such volume-sensitivity might be possible because increased hair volume will affect the electric cunents or electromagnetc radiaton circuits of the sensors more grealty. -Har presence sensors will likely have a range of sensrtivity so that they can discπminate between having a processing chamber full of hars in front of them or a sparsely filled chamber. A sparsely filled chamber, for practtcal purposes, could be treated like an empty chamber -The har length and position data can be applied to another person's head of a different shape and size by expanding, contracting or, in the case of a greatly receeded hairline, throwing out corresponding data points altogether so as to fit har-length data to homologous regions on the two heads. -In order to ensure that the track-guide cap is positoned on the head correcty, the system might require scanning runs before cutting If the cap is misaligned, the system could require the user to realign it or the system could calculate new cutting-position data based on the misalignment by mapping the length-positon data to a new gπd pattern -Optonally, additional har presence sensors could be positoned in the portions of the har channels and bend-under system behind the processing area in order to confirm that the har really is being cut to the correct length. This would be achieved by using a linear array a sensors spaced along the exit path. For example, a linear array spaced down the length of a bend-under belt assembly. Har length would be estmated by the last sensor activated. Longer hairs stay in the bend-under belts longer and activate more sensors than shorter ones. If placed on the bend-under belt assembly, this array is likely constructed in a flexible manner. -For all har presence sensors in this system, it is imporant to keep them clean. This might mean a tne-based part swiping over them peπodically or, in the case of sensors placed along the bend-under belt assembly, having one or more tabs on the edge of the bend-under belts that swipe across its sensors peπodically. -In additon to hair presence sensors, optcal sensors that record hair color informaton could be used and placed, mosted ideally, in a positon adjacent to the processing chambers. This way as hars are pulled through the processing chambers, color informaton about the hars at vanous lengths and positons on the head can be recorded so that later a colorant applicaton system could duplicate the colonng pattern. -Although direct measurement of movement over the scalp is the most likely way to measure system movement and estmate positon on the scalp, if something is known about the volume or number of har on a person's head, sensors that measure har volume or count har number passing through a har channel could be used to estimate movement, and from that positon on the scalp. -It is important that the operator hold the system sufficientiy near the scalp. For this reason, sensors that measure scalp contact or distance could be included in the handle unit. -Whether a tensionmg hair straightener system is used to hold the hair (more) perpendicular (than its natural state), to the scalp or it is done by another means such as by hand, ideally it should be done, otherwise, the system might not be positoned along the length of the hars correcty. To make sure adequate straightening tension is being applied a pressure sensor could be used to push (most likely perpendicularly) into the hars under tension The system could be calibrated so that the hars under tension counter the pressure sensor with certain amount of force. If they don , the re not under adequate tension, and the system computer (if one is used) could act accoπngly by taking measures such as sounding alarms and/or ceasing the system from any further activity especially cutting. These pressure sensors are likely configured with a line or band, perhaps under tension itself or a solid bar which is not, which presses into the hars most likely positioned above the processing stack and ideally aligned largely perpendicular to har flow above and across several processing areas. Har-presence sensor methods for doing the same might be employeed such as running an optical beam across and area where hars should or shoud not be if they are under tension. Use as an Intelligent Thinning Shear Means Some people think their har is too thick. For this reason, there exists in the pnor art a class of device known as thinning shears. Whether constructed as manually operated scissors or as an electπc har tπmmer, these devices work by cutting only one out of a specific number of hars that pass through them. For example, they might cut one out of twelve hars that pass through them. This is acceptable the first tme thinning is performed. However, if as some later tme after the hars cut grow partially, but not all the way, back to their onginal length, the person might want to have her har thinned agan. She'll desire this because her har will be getting overly thick close to the head, but not at longer lengttis because the har hasnt had tme to grow out this far yet. Ideally, what needs to be done is to only thin the har closer to the head. However, a problem aπses because conventonal thinning shears cant cut tine same exact hars that they did the first tme. Thus, after conventonal thinning shears are used a second tme, most of the oπg ally thinned hars will reman the same length while many long hars get cut undesirably. Thus, the har will be thinned all over, not just close to the head. This means that either the portons closer to the head wont be thinned enough or the portons farther away from the head will be thinned too much In subsequent thinning sessions, an ideal thinning shears system would cut the exact same hars the second time as it did the first while not cutting any previously uncut hairs. Such a system is possible by integrating the above-descnbed in-chamber cutting and in-chamber sensor monitonng fucntons into a system where they functon simultaneously. One change that would have to be made is that the sensors should be placed toward the tops of the hair-cutting chambers, approximately one to three centimeters higher than the cutting means portions. This distance is equal to the distance har grows in the several weeks expected between thinning sessions. While the hars are being pulled through the chambers, the sensors detect the tps of the shorter thinned hars before sad shorter hars have cleared the cutting chambers. At or tmed slighty after their detection, the hair cutting means positoned below should be actuated. Unlike the progr ammed-harstyle-cutting embodiment descπbed above, tor optimal performance, the har thinning embodiment requires each har to be isolated individually in seperate processing chambers and for there to be an independent cutting mechanism and independent sensor mechanism for each seperate processing chamber. If more than one har were placed into a single chamber, either longer hairs that werent supposed to get cut would or shorter hars has that were supposed to get cut wouldnt. These seperate cutting means are most ideally configured by placing ttne cutting edges as functional areas on micro-machine type actuators. Naturally, the mechanisms descπbed for the hair-thinning embodiment can be used in a manner that produces pre-programmed hairstyles. In other words, the longer hairs that arent to be cut for thinning are dealt with in the same manner as descnbed above for the basic automated pre-programmed harstyle cutting embodiment In fact a system can be embodied that performs both thinning and harstyling fucntons simultaneously on one pass over the head Applying Coloπng Agents to Simulate a Preview Before Cutting In order to gan a clients confidence before allowing the system to actually cut the har, the system could be configured with the capability to simulate the appearance of what the haircut will look like by applying a dark temporary har colonng agent to those portions of the hair which are planned to be cut while not coloπng those portions that will remain uncut This is achieved using the same process used for tmmg the actuation of the cutting means However, instead of actuating a cutting means, a color application means is activated Naturally, the color application should begin at the exact same point cutting would have been performed and it should continue until the b r's tip is reached Perhaps, a har presence sensor could be used to determine when the hars tp has been reached so as to prevent wastng colonng agent Most likely, this coloπng agent will be applied to hars at locatons within the inteπor of the processing chambers using either bare nozzles or coatng onfices, as descnbed for the hair cross-sectonal reshaping system The most probable position of the coloπng agent supply is through the left wall as descπbed for other processing stack embodiments Computer imaging could even be used to produce a preview picture of a person showing these colored areas automatically edited out 5. Dynamic Hair-Channel or Other Functional-Area Designs In the embodiments descπbed up until this point, it has been assumed that the hair-channel wall means portions would reman statonary relatve to the processing stack configuraton as a whole Likewise, many functonal areas disposed on sad hair-channel wall means, such as nozzles, intakes, and dipole ends of a sensor gap, would also remain stationary relative to the rest of the system In such systems, hair- channel-wall spacing remans constant However, we can configure designs where the hair-channel-wall tnes (or more broadly functonal- area-supporting projectons into a mass of har) that support the har channel walls themselves move relatve to each other and the processing stack (or more broadly system) as a whole More dynamic configuratons are possible where the hair channels formed between sad functonal-area-supportng projections (perhaps, tine-like, perhaps not) could do things such as repositon themselves relative to hars, perhaps, even going to the hairs rather than the hars to them This can be achieved by configunng sad functonal-area-supportng projections involved as moving and capable of forming isolation areas within the areas between some of their functional areas (usually including their har-channel-wall functonal areas) This might be achieved by functonal areas on a single projection moving relative to each other, for example by micro-machine means, and/or entire functional-ar ea-supporting projections moving relative other functonal-area-supportng projections Hairs may enter sad isolation areas by any of, but not limited to, the following 1 Hars being moved in by a mechanical hair handler 2 Har-Channel-wall-based funneling means guiding them in 3 Pure chance 4 Har attractive or repulsive force means, such as static electncity or ar currents 5 Sensor means guiding the movement of said isolation areas to hars 6 Sensor means telling a computer that functonal areas which form an isolaton area to close around a har(s) when said functional areas happen to be in its proximity Said isolation areas can be one and the same as the processing areas which performs the desired functions on the har or sad isolation areas each with a har(s) in them can be moved closer relative to sad processing areas so as the net effect is that hars are brought to sad processing areas or sub-areas within sad processing areas, such as processing chambers Note. -We refer to functonal-area-supportng projectons extending into a mass of hair rather than tnes because we arent requiπng that there be multple projections nor that ttney be configured in a tne-assembly fashion -The above-descnbed functonal-area-supportng proiectons might, (in addition to, or instead of, a har-channel-wall functional area), support functonal areas descnbed as meteπng-area side walls, isolation-area side walls, processing -area or chamber side walls, (but not limited to this list ) -Vaπous functional areas such as hair channel wall means may form hair channels or hair-channeling areas dunng processing even if sad channels and channeling areas arent present all of the time Regardless of whether a dynamic or stationary har channel configuration is used, those functonal areas of har handlers which manipulate hars by making surface-to-surface mechanical contact with them could be replaced by functonally-equivalent hair-handling functonal areas which generate (non-solid-based) forces that effectuate hair manipulation For example moving fluids (liquid or gas), electncal charges or currents, forms of energy including, but not limited to, sound, heat, magnetic, electromagnetic, could be used to manipulate hars in homologous manners to ways many of the dir ect-mechanical-contect functional areas do The mechanisms that generate these (non-solid- based) har-handling forces could be deployed on tnes, or more broadly, functonal-area-supportng structural projectons into a mass of har Sad mechaiisms likely occupy relatively discrete positions on sad structural projections, in a similar manner to mechanical-har-handler functional areas, fluid-output nozzles, and har-channel sensor gaps Furthermore, ttney are likely powered in analagous manners, for example, by fluid or electncal supply lines Note. If elctncal charges are used for manipulation the system might (or might not) be configured so that it imparts a certain electπcal charge to the entire human body and/or all the hars on it The means that does this could be part of, or independent of, the har-processing system itself This dyanmic har-channel-wall design could applied to embodiments that serve vaπous har processing functions including, but not limited to, those descnbed in this document such as har-extension attachment, har -coating application, hair cross-sectional reshaping, automated haircutting, automated har-implant application Finally, just as the dynamic har-channel-wall configuration can be applied across many embodiments, so too can features illustrated in one embodiment be applied by analogy to other embodiments For example, ttie processing-steck-elevaton system, shown illustrated for the cross-sectional har reshaping system, can be applied to the other embodiments including, but not limited to, har-extension attachment, automated harcutting, and automated har-implant application REFINEMENTS AND IDEAS CONCERNING THE OVERALL ATTACHMENT SYSTEM (and other types of processing by analogy) ♦ "Attachment Svstem Enhancement Features*" Just as the attachment stack can be embodied and enhanced in many ways, so too can the overall attachment system The following represent vanatons, and in some cases, enhancements of the overall attachment system • " • Different Svstem Types on One Handle Unit REMOVAL AND ATTACHMENT SYSTEMS ON SAME HANDELE UNIT Oπgmally, the har extension removal and attachment systems were placed on two seperate handle units However, a system where the attachment stack follows immediately behind the har removal system is a possibility In such a system har extensions are recylced in a different manner Rather than first filling clip cartπdges with har extensions from the removal system hair extensions from the remover are fed by a conveyor system directly to the attachment stack The conveyor may first take the har extensions through some type of refinement system ttiat may do things such as clean, sort out undesirable, and realign how the conveyor holds the har extensions Altemeratvely the har extensions maybe taken directy from the removal system to the attachment stack Regardless of the path the conveyor takes in the middle, it will typically leave the back of the remover with detached hair extensions and bπng them to the attachment stack from the back or top. In other words, it will loop around from the front of the handle unit to a place towards farther back in the traling attachment stack. In such a system, a single pass over each scalp area would both remove har extensions and then reattach them closer to tne scalp. Naturally, such a system would ideally have a har straghtener. It may use one har tensionmg straghtener that precedes both the removal and attachment systems or two straghteners, one proceeding each directy The remover, attachment stack, and straghtner can each be considered a seperate functonal unit. Each functonal unit should have dose contact with the scalp. In FIG.78, it is shown how the attachment stack held by its belt buckle and ttne straightener both were allowed to rotate relatve to the handle unit and each other in order to conform to the surface of the scalp. Refemng to FIG.75, rotaton of these two functional units is achieved by their peg-m-hole connecton to the shits B of the handle unit However, when more than two functonal units are attached to a single handle unit, a slighty different system for allowing the them to conform to the scalp must be used. For example, all functonal units could be mounted with resilent connections that permit their movement both rotationally relative to and vertically away from the scalp. This includes simple attachment by spπng or rubber band to the πgid handle unit, mourning on a nandle unit compnsed of mdependenty flexible segements, or introducing additional pars of handle unit stilts where each par of stilts has the ablity to retract away from the scalp when pushed in and resilentiy rebound towards ttne scalp when this pressure is released. These additonal pars of stilts would most likely be introduced one behind the other. CROSS-SECTIONAL RESHAPING AND HAIR ATTACHMENT ON ONE HANDLE Another possible combination of two system on one handle is to place a har cross-secton reshaping stack in front of a har extension attachment stack. Such a system would reshape the cross-sectons of natural scalp hars and then attach har extensions to them. Naturally, such a system would ideally have a straghtener. It may use one straghtener that precedes both the reshaping and attachment systems or two straghteners, one preceedmg each directy. HAIR EXTENSION REMOVAL AND CUTTING FUNCTIONS ON ONE HANDLE Yet another possible combination of two systems on one handle is to place a scalp har cutting system after the har extension removal unit. The hair cutting system could be either be some form of conventional electπc har tπmmer or the automated hair cutting processing stack embodiment. In such a system, the har extensions would be removed a d scalp hars cut to the desired length in one step. Such a system is desirable for people who want to keep their natural scalp har very short and unseen relative to the har extensions. Ideally, a straightening system should contnue to tension scalp hars as they are cut and the cutting system's height above the scalp should be made adjustable. " •• Pre-Proorammed Styles. Another labor-saving strategy is to use har extensions that are already cut to the correct lengths before they are attached to the scalp hars. Such a system would make possible pre-programmed harstyles To best do this, the har extensions should be cut to length by the tme they are placed in the har extension cartπdges. Since harstyles usually are composed of hars of different lengths, the clip cartπdges will have to be filled with hairs of a vanety of lengths. This can be done several ways. One way to fill clip cartndges with a vanety of hair lengths is to fill each clip with hars from different sources This can be done by moving the hair extension clip cartπdges relatve to their filling sources Another way to fill clip cartndges with a vaπety of har lengths is to cut har extensions to the correct lengths as they move on a conveyor system headed towards the clip cartπdges. The best way to do this is to introduce a har-tensionmg and straghtening means such as a vacuum along the path of the conveyor. This will pull all the conveyor held hars largely straght and perpendicular to their supporting conveyor system. Further, place a cutting mechanism such that the tensioned hairs must flow through it at some point along their lengths. The cutting mechanism should be given the ability to move towards and away from the har supporting conveyor This will allow the hars coming through the conveyor to be cut to a vaπety of controlled lengths. As such, ttie har extensions placed in the clip cartndges can have a vanety of lengths ordered to produce a desired harstyle when attached to the head. In order to better control the filling of clip cartπdge, countng sensors could be placed along the length of the har conveyor that feeds the cartndges. " • Utility Features iSaftev/Maintenencei-Macro Level"* The attachment system might have certain features incorporated into it that ensure safety and system maintence. I call these features utility features. The following are such utility features ""Between Customer Automatic Cleaning Process The attacher and remover handle units could have some means of applying degumming, lubπcation and disinfection that is used between har attachment sessions. This applicaton means could be a system that pipes the vaπous mantenance fluids to the handle units and, perhaps, sprays it on them. Altematvely, the handle units could soaked in tanks of lubπcaton, cleaning and disinfecton fluid This fluid applicaton means could be deployed automatcally between sessions. If soaking tanks are used, sensors, such as floats, could be incorporated as part of the handle units in order to enforce dunking in the tanks. Duπng fluid application, the moving parts could be activated so they get lubπcated better. Before fluid application, the vanous applicaton outputs, such as adhesive and solvent outputs, should use negative pressure to pull their contents back into the supply lines. This will cause ar bubbles to form at ttne output nozzles. These ar bubbles should obstruct entrance into the supply lines, preventing mixing of cleaning fluid with the output fluids such as adhesives. Whether sprayed or dunked, the handle units should be placed in a largely sealed container duπng cleaning to prevent cleaning fluid from escaping and causing a mess in the har salon. Sad container likely has a dran. Additionally or instead, heat or UV light might be applied in this container to facilitate cleaning. ""Use of Sensors to Monitor for Correct Handle Movement Both the remover and attacher handles are typically run over the scalp by following between track-guides placed on the surface of the head. In order to ensure that these track-guides are followed and that the system is moved over the scalp at the correct speed, alarms could be used. Tracking centenng alarms could be based on sensors that measure pressure aganst the track-guides or electro-magnetc sensors, such as optcal or magneto sensors, that measure relatve positon of the track-guides. If magnetc sensors were used, the track-guides would have to be impregnated with a magnetcally detectable matenal. Pressure sensors that give feedback on how hard the the system system is being held aganst the scalp might also be helpful. When such pressure sensors show that the system has been moved too far away from the scalp, the system's computer might be programmed to assume the end of a track-guide row has been reached, or if it knows otherwise because of some other means like a speed and distance measurement device, it could alert the user Finally, if the system is being moved over the scalp too fast an alarm could sound or tngger a mechanism that acts like a break to slow the system down "*Tensioninα Hair Straightener Enhancement Features*" There are altematve ways of configunng a hair straightening and tensionmg means. Below are descπptons of vaπant tensionmg hair straghtener embodiments: The scalp har straghtener oπgmally was shown as a set of tines that first moves sideways (aganst another set of tines) to pinch scalp hars and then moves upwards to straighten them under tension. However, the straightener could be configured so that it only has to move sideways in order to pinch and hold scalp hars. In order to move the hairs upwards away from the scalp, ar could be blown or sucked in the apporpoπate directon. Hars would be held firmly when the sideways moton pinches them, and move upwards when sideways moton releases the pinch. The pinch and release moton should occur fast enough that the system can be moved over the scalp at a desired speed As with most straightener designs, the scalp hars should be pinched and firmly held duπng har processing and meteπng. It is not as important that hars be held under tension when they are being brought into or exitng the attachment area It should be noted that any means capable of conveying hars upwards could be substituted for ar, such as forces deπved from electncal charges. ""Use of Non-Solid-Based Forces to Straighten Har. Systems that used non-solid-based forces to straighten the har could be employed Functonal areas which generate these (non- solid-based) hair-lifting forces could be positioned on the straghteners surfaces (likely tine-based surfaces) homologous to those illustrated in the first-descπbed emboidment of the the tensionmg har straightener If force-generatng functonal areas are actually positoned on surfaces which extend into the har, such as tnes, then these surfaces may require pathways through their supporting structures in order to power the force-generating functional areas For example, ar could be earned to the functional areas in hollow tubes but output only through discrete functonal areas in the form of nozzle on a tne's surface However, the vaπous non-solid-based forces used dont necessariy have to be applied on functional areas supported by tines or any type of projection extending into a mass of har. Instead, the force could be applied from a general locaton extenor to mass of har on the human head For example, vacuum intakes or electπcally-charg ed surfaces could be used to attract the har upward The intake nozzle or attractive charged surface could simply be placed on a fixture that holds it a desired height above the scalp. The types of non-solid-based forces used to lift hair include, but are not limited to, moving fluids (liquid or gas), electπcal charges or currents, forms of energy including, but not limited to, sound, heat, magnetic, electromagnetc Systems that use air to help straghten hars away from scalp should have their ar nozzles placed in vaπous manners If the air nozzles suck ar into themselves in order to create a vacuum, they should be placed a distance above the scalp at least equal to the the desired length of hair straightening . Altematvely, if the ar nozzles blow ar out of themselves in order to create positve pressure ar currents, they will usually be placed near the scalp below the desired length of har straghtening. In either case, steightening systems that only use ar and no mechanical pinching are a possib ty However, they're less able to hold straightened hairs under tension than systems that use mechanical pinching Generally, ar and other non-solid-based forces will perform the har lifting and staightening function better than they will the hair- engagement-holdmg functon (such as pinching or tension-holding via hooking or pinching) Thus, the a har straghtener which uses non-solid- basβd forces to lift will likely retain a separate har engagement function such as pinching For example, a system that uses ar currents to lift, but having some portion composed of pinching tnes like those shown in the first-descπbed embodiment is a likely implementeton. This pinching portion may (or may not) be limited to only one portion of the straghtener, such as a band along its top. This type of configuraton will likely stll be used even if non-solid-based forces are generated by mechanisms which are NOT supported by projectons extending it a mass of har such as tnes. For example, vacumm intakes placed on fixture (which itself could be part of the straghtener unit) that holds them over the scalp could be placed above a pinching means (like a set of pinching tines). The vacuum would generate the har lifting, and ttne pinching means could be soley responsible for pinching and holding the hars in position. — Use of a Rotary Means to Straighten Ham Rather than the using tnes that pinch and slide relatve to each other to tension scalp hars, tnes that rotate relative to each other could be used. Such a rotary straghtening means might be rollers of a largely cylindeπcal shape used to move hars away from the scalp Altematvely, the rotary means might be belts that are used to move hars away from the scalp Regardless of the exact configuraton of tie rotary means, the rotating members should typically be used in pars, functionally and structurally analogous to the tne pars of tt e first emobodiment of the straightener. Each member of a par should rotate in an opposite rotatonal direction than the other, and their closest rotatng edges should both move in the same linear directon away from the scalp. Although less ideal, a system that uses rotating members pared not with other rotating members but with stationary surfaces is possible Regardless of whether rotors are pared with other rotors or stationary surfaces, scalp hars should be guided between each member in a par in order to allow the rotors tight contact aganst the scalp hars. In order to guide hars into these tght central passageways, the rotary means should be proceeded by narrowing areas that funnel ttne scalp hars into said passageways. These funneling passageways could be formed by placing pointed shaped projections in front of the rotating members These pointed projections could be non-rotating and independent of tine rotating members or part of the rotating members, for example, the rotating cylinders could have fronts that narrow into cone shapes Regardless of the exact nature of the funneling system, it should prevent hars from going between two seperate rotor pars because the most lateral rotating surfaces of each par move in a linear direction towards the scalp. The rotating pars should be able to exert a certain amount of pinching force on the hars between them To best do this, each member of the par could be resiliently mounted relatve to the other This resilience may be achieved by a mountng each rotatng member on a resilent axils, by placing a resilent matenal under the rotatng belts, or by fabπcatng the rotatng parts themselves out of a resilent matenal. Altematvely, the pinching force could be achieved in the same manner it was in the straghtener oπginally descnbed in the onginal embodiment In otherwords, my actuating the steightener's tines (or pinching pars) together. The rotating members will likely be dπven by a mechanism such as a pulley system that has a belt or cord interlaced ttirough it It is most likely that each individual roller will not be mdependenty powered, but all the rollers will be connected so as to share a single power source This connecton of rollers could benefit from a connectvity bndge situation where the tnes are the individual rollers and the connectvity bndge between them is the dπve system. For example, the belt or cable in a shared pulley system could be considered a connectvity bπdge. At those areas between each roller par that form the har pathways, the dnve system should be elevated above the desired length of har straightening. In these same areas, the dnve system should usually have a shield near it that separates its moving parts from the scalp hars However, the dnve system can extend downwards towards any lower-lying rollers in any of those areas where they do not intersect the scalp har pathways (hair channels). Although rollers in each pair (of pinching tne structures) must rotate in opposite (rotatonal) directons, it is most ideal to configure a dnve system that uses a single belt or cable moving in only one directon In order to get a single directon dnve means to rotate rollers in opposite directons, it will is best to contact opposing rollers from opposite sides, be twisted backwards around certain rollers, or first contact a direction-reversing roller or that goes on to contact a har pinching roller itself. If belts are used as the rotatng pinching means, then belts of vaπous heights (their directon of move is perpendicular to the scalp) can be used along the length of the har straghtener. For example, taller belts that touch the scalp, in order to pick up hars, could be used at ttie front of the straightener. Likewise, shorter belts that do not touch the scalp, but reman above the attachment stack where they serve to keep hars straight, could be used at the back of the straghtener. A functonal equivalent can be achieved by stacking rollers The stacks should be linear with har pathways between them. Such stacked rollers would only need to be dπven by a belt from the back of the straghtener if they interiocked with each other so as to transfer rotatonal movement among each other. This interlocking would most likely include the use of much thinner rollers or gears, that do not come in contact with the har, placed between the rollers that do. Sad thinner rollers would be used to transfer rotational movement among the larger rollers in a manner so that they all rotate in the same direction " •• Independent Pinching Means Used With Straghtener Regardless of the type of straightener used to lift hairs, an independent pinching (or other form of engagment) means, most likely a set of pinching tines, could be placed over it (or in the case of non-solid-based-hair-lifting forces, sometimes under the areas that generate them). This pinching (or other engagement) means would not be responsible for lifting hars over the scalp Rather, its pπmary duty would simply be to help keep the straght hairs that enter it straight It could help a pmch-and-release type straightener (the type in the onginal embodiment) by pinching when the lifting mechanism below releases. It could also help any type of straightener by secuπng tension or pinching in a manner that it acts like a break, stopping forward advancement of the attachment or removal system For example, it might be desirable to stop forward movement of the attachment system while hars are being attached It also might be desirable to secure the tension on the scalp hars while they are, for example, being metered out by a hair isolation system. Such a pmcher most ideally should be composed of or coated with a high coefficient of friction mateπal such as silicone rubber Although some use might be found for such a pmcher break with the remover system, it is probably best not to use is there because it might prevent the bend-under belt system from carrying detached har extensions away • A DESCRIPTION OF THE STRAIGHTENER WITH RESPECT TO THE ENTIRE HANDLE UNIT AND ATTACHMENT PROCESSING! STACK Regardless of its exact mechanism of operaton, any straghtener will usually be positoned in a special manner with respect to the attachment stack or remover, or any other processing system, for which it is straghtening scalp hars Since a straghtener may serve either an attachment stack, remover or any of the processing-stack embodiments, whether descnbed herein or not, all will be subsumed by the phrase, "processing system " Below vaπous attributes of straghtener positon relatve to a processing system are descirbed First, a har straightening system should usually be positoned in a flexibly yielding manner that allows it to move relative to the processing system (for example attachment stack) it serves The following descnbe some methods of such placement The straightener is often located in the following manner -Attached, either directy or indirectiy, to handle means AND in front of a processing system, such as the attachment stack -Portons of it often extend back over a processing system, such as the attachment stack. The straghtener usually moves relatve to the processing system in one or more of the following ways -Mounted on a fulcrum, so that it moves rotatonally -Mounted on a spπng or other flexible mechanism, or straightener itself made from deformable mateπals, so that in can move in one or more of the following ways: -Vertical retraction away from, and advancement towards, the scalp -Hoπzontal retraction away from, and advancement towards, the scalp Note: Although the above movement patterns usually apply to a straghtener where the entire unit moves, they also usually apply to a straightener that allows part of itself to retract into itself. Force exertion areas of Hair Straightener Means: Additionally, a har straightening system should usually exert force on scalp hars within the following areas with respect to the processing system which it serves The scalp har tensionmg or straightening means should exert largely upward (with resepct to the scalp) force on hars in the following areas, designated by letter descπbed below and shown in FIG. 121. A- The force extends down below and in front of the attachment stack (processing system) down to or very near the surface of the scalp AND may also exert this upward force on scalp hairs in one or more of the following areas. B: The force remains in front of the attachment stack. C The force remans above and in front of the attachment stack. D The force remans directly above the attachment stack [AND OPTIONALLY: The straghtener means is so attached relatve to the attachment stack (processing system) that the forces mantan these relatve positons, such that a hair lying flat on the scalp expeπences these force-areas A,B,C,D, sequentally. -And as a further opton, it might only expeπence forces attributable from only one of these areas (or an area with one of these area) at any given time and not be disturubed by forces out sad force-attπbutable area. In other words, it might be moved from one area to the next incrementally, but unit it reaches the next area it cannot be influenced by the next area. This opton is would not be the case if, for example, ar intakes were simply placed on a fixture that holds them several cm over the scalp because the resultng air currents would usually move erratcally between several areas. However, if an acuaton means or non-solid-based force-generatng actuaton means had discrete functional areas placed on projections (such as tines) extending into a mass of human har, then sad functonal areas could limit their spheres of influence. For example, such functonal areas capable of limitng the spheres of influence include, but are not limited to, micro-machine actuators, gentte ar currents generated by nozzles placed near the hars, electπcally-charged surfaces placed in a similar manner.] Note: -Moving hars through the staghtener in increments from on functonal area to the next may be desirable because it is more predictable and neednt affect anything outside of the har straightening system. An example of a short distance would certainly include a distance less than the height of the attachment stack (or more broadly hair processing system). -By sometmes using the word tensionmg straightening with reference a device which holds hairs more perpendicular than their natural state relative to the scalp, we are trying to differentiate between it and chemical and heat har straghteners which are designed to, at least somewhat, fixate the har with a longitudinal curvature. This is not to say all embodiments of tensionmg har straghteners apply a great amount of tension to ttne har. For example, if static electπcity was used to onent har in a more perpendicular oπentation the scalp, one could argue that many of the force vectors suspending the har technically arent tension. However, we would stll consider such a system to fall under the category of a tensionmg har straightener. This not say that in many embodiments of the tensionmg har straghtener that the tension isnt real. It many it is, and often very strong. -Ideally, but not always, a straightener's channels (if it has any) should line up with the processing stack which it serves. This way the hars from the straghtener will flow directy into the processing system's channels and will not have to be re-funneled into rows agan. ♦ "Handle Refinements* 1 Previously, handles for holding the attachment stack and hair extension removal system were shown These handles may be enhanced with any of the following features' - Refe ng to FIG.75, rollers could be put on the bottoms of the front stlts B of the handles. These rollers allow the front-most stlts to roll over the scalp without disturbing the hairs below Furthermore, these rollers could be used to measure speed and distance over the scalp by feeding their rotatonal movement to a sensor. Additionally, these rollers could be attached to actuators that cause them to automatcally brake under control of the system computer. To facilitate this breaking, the rollers could be compnsed of a high fπcton matenal like rubber and/or have cleats - A processing system, such as the attachment stack, could be made to move up down relatve to the scalp, in a manner similar to an elevator. This could be accomplished in a vanety of ways. For example, refe ng to FIG 75, the front stlts B on the handles could be configured so that their tps move in and out, causing shortening and lengthening of the stilts. Alternatively, if stilts are not used, whatever portion of the handle that holds the processing system could be made to go up and down relative to the rest of the handle. Finally, the belt buckle, or functional equivalent could have an elevator means within it that moves the attachment stack, or analogous processing system, up and down relatve to the scalp. -Several parallel processing stacks could be connected to a flexible backbone means that holds them aligned with the tracks of the track-cap (if one is used otherwise simply laterally spaced), thereby, allowing them to all advance over several tracks (positons) on the head together. Sad backbone could be configured as or attached to a handle unit means. Alternatively, this like all handle assemblies could be held by a mechanical arm(s) or moving support means, instead of by a human. The above-descπbed assemblies may even obviate the need for using a track-cap. • "Attacher Supply Lings-Joining & configuration"* The processing stack embodiments and hair extension removal systems all must be supplied with vaπous inputs These inputs may be energy, such as electπcal or mechanical, or vanous substances. Although discussed to a certain extent before, below is further discussion of supply lines. Previously, the idea of using "contact-cards," as illustrated by B if FIG.67, to consolidate many electπcal contacts into a single unit was discussed. At this point it should be made clear that the surfaces of these contact-cards are not necessanly pertecty flat Often, the vanous contacts on each card must be arranged in a stair-step pattem relatve to each other. Further, contact cards need not only be employed to carry energy. They could also be used to unify tubes into a single orderly array. An array of tubes joined together by a contact-card structure could be molded as a single object, ideally out of a flexible tough plastic such as Teflon • "Thermally Insulating Connected Supply Lines Clearly, there is a benefit to uratng tubes with a contact-card immediately before they connect with the attachment stack. However, we may also want to unite parallel wires, fibers and tubes into bundles along their length. This is especially true if they are carrying a substance that must reman hot, cold, or otherwise protected from the enviroment For this reason, similar tubes, say tubes carrying heated matenals, should be wrapped together with an msulative means such as an infra-red reflective tape. To further control temperature within these bundles, heating elements could be introduced within each bundle These temperature regulaton elements could be of vaπous types. For example, heatng elements could be electncal resistance or tubes that carry a heated liquid in loops. If temperature-regulation tube loops are used, the segment of each loop that cames liquid towards the attachment stack should be incorporated into the insulated bundles However, the sides of the loops that return the temperature-regulation fluid might well be left on the outside of the temperature-regulated bundles When a thermally insulatve wrapping is used, it will ideally be wrapped as close to the attachment stack as possible, perhaps even around the attachment stack itself. If this is impossible, then the contact card might be made out of an msulative matenal or a sealant mateπal with msulative properties could be applied between the attachment stack and where the thermally msulative wrapping ends Although most likely used with the attachment stack, the above-descπbed temperature control strategies could also be used with the hair extension removal system or any analogous processing system. — ϋαuid Propulsion Systems: Adhesive and other liquids used in the attachment process, or any process, can be propelled through the supply lines by pressure applied by several different methods as descnbed below: — Gas-in-line propulsion In the first method, adhesive or other fluid could be transported to the nozzle outputs via ar pressure behind it in the supply line. In such a system, there is no need to suck the fluid back towards its source resevoir. This is because only a small amount of fluid has been infused into the fluid supply lines. Any excess fluid remaning after a single use can simply be expelled This is possible because this small volume of adhesive or other fluid is pushed from its source resevoir several feet along a supply line by ar pressure behind it in the line. The line only contains a small amount of fluid at the very front of the pressuπzed ar. This means the fluid supply line will be empted between uses and can actually be blown or washed out before its next use Such a system will usually have a small chamber that is filled up by a much larger fluid supply resevoir Once the smaller chamber is filled, perhaps by gravity, a valve between it and the mam fluid resevoir should be closed. Next, a valve that supplies this smaller chamber with ar pressure should be opened forcing the adhesive through the supply line. This ar pressure should be introduced into the small chamber such that it is behind the adhesive For example, the adhesive line could exit through a funneling bottom in the small chamber, while the ar pressure could be introduced from the top. Sufficient air pressure should be applied in order to bπng the adhesive to its output nozzles in the attachment stack. This can be done by applying a tmed pulse of ar pressure, or by constant low pressure ar. Constant low pressure ar will be sufficient to move the adhesive through the relatively wide supply lines but not to expel it through the thin output nozzles in the attachment stack. Naturally, when adhesive is desired to be squirt out of these nozzles, ar pressure will be applied in short powerful pulses. Any small amount of excess adhesive that remans at the end of a session can simply be discarded by forcing it out nozzles. The lines can even be washed with a solvent and then blown dean. If a washing solvent is used, it should be introduced into the same small chamber in the same manner that the adhesive was. — ϋouid-in-line propulsion A second type of propulsion scheme pushes adhesive through the entire length of a supply line soley by rasing the pressure in the man adhesive resevoir. It has an entre supply line of adhesive uninterrupted from the resevoir In such a configuraton, when adhesive is expelled through an output, more always takes its place from behind. This means that to prevent adhesive contaminaton between uses, negatve pressure might be applied to suck the adhesive backwards through its supply line. Hopefully, the resultng ar bubbles at the tp of the supply lines will prevent contaminants from moving backwards down the supply line. A system such as this one not only has an adhesive supply line that leads straght from man adhesive resevoir to the adhesive outputs in the attachment stack. It also has to have some means of applying both positive and negative pressure to the adhesive in this large resevoir In theory, a mechanical means of pressing directy aganst the contents of the resevoir could do this. However, it is more practcal to apply ar pressure into the resevoir. Regardless of the type of adhesive-propulsion scheme used, these propulsion schemes apply not just to adhesives but all fluid outputs used in the attachment process, or by any type of processing system. Each of these vanous fluids should be kept in its own resevoir. Each of these resevoirs will need to be cared for in its own way. For example, cyanoacrylate adhesive cures upon exposure to moisture in the ar. Its life could be extended if the ar at the top of its resevoir tank could be kept dry, such as with the use of desiccants. In a similar manner, the wax-rosin mixture will turn solid if not kept above a certain minimum temperature. Thus, the wax rosin resevoir tank should be heated pnor and duπng system use. — Using Color Adhesive: Most ideally, a clear invisible adhesive that works fine with all colors of har will be used. However, if using different colors of adhesive on diffent heads of har is desirable, then the system can accomodate this by using one of the following methods. You should note these following methods apply not just for dealing with vaπous colors of adhesives, but also for dealing with vanous colors or types of fluid to be applied on the har such as vaπous coatngs >Mιxιnq Custom Colors: When creatng custom colors of adhesive, relatively pure coloπng agents can be mixed together in proper proportion and added to the adhesive. Altematvely, the adhesive could be supplied in several pπmary colors which are mixed together in proper proportion In both methods, mixing must occur. This mixing will usually occur in a small mixing chamber. This mixing chamber might be placed anywhere between the adhesive supply resevoirs and the adhesive output nozzles In fact, simply placing several pπmary color adhesive output nozzles near each other in the attachment chamber might provide sufficient mixing It the gas-in-line propulsion method is used, then it does not really matter how close the mixing chamber is placed to the output nozzles in the attachment stack. Because ar pushes the adhesive through the entre line, the same amount of colored adhesive is used regardless of the distance it must travel. However, if the liquid-in-line propulsion method is used, ideally, the mixing chamber should be placed very close to the output nozzles because there will need to be a contnous line of custom-color adhesive between the mixing chamber and the output nozzles. Generally, this custom-color adhesive will have to be discarded after a single use. Thus, a long distance between the mixing chamber and outputs wastes much adhesive. In both configurations, the components to be mixed could be introduced into the mixing chamber through one way valves. In the gas- in-lme propulsion system, this mixing chamber could be the same small chamber that adhesive is usually released into before it is sent through the supply lines. In the liquid-in-line porpulsion system, the pressure of inputs into the mixing chamber through one way valves could force the mixture out of a single valve that feeds a single supply line. — >Selectng Among a Selection of Standard Colors- Altematvely, the system could work like a modem gas pump. There could be a selecton of several standard colors, each having its own resevoir, but all shaπng the same adhesive supply line. In the liquid-m-lme propulsion system after each use, the last color used should be sucked from the shared supply line completely back into its holding resevoir. In gas-in-line propulsion system, all colors would have different mam reseviors but would all probably share the same small pre-l e chamber. " ♦ Various Means of Preventing Hair Buildup In System*" The vanous hair processing-stack type systems usually work most effectvely on hars that stand largely perpendicular to the scalp. However, unlike conventonal har tnmrners, most of tne processing-stack embodiments cant simply cut hairs all hars in their path. Thus, this presents a problem because hars have entered the har processing stack system and vaπous structures associated with it, and said hars are onented largely perpenicular to the scalp. If such systems do nothing to help the hars that have entered them exit, the hars will tend to reman in the mechanisms of the system, taking up space, for too long of a tme. Thus, regardless of whether a processing-stack type embodiment is used, or some completely different type of har processing system that is also subject to har-buildup in its mechanism, ideally, devices should be implemented to prevent this buildup. In other words, device that moves hars out of path of the processing system and its mechanisms faster than they would move out of sad path because of mere processing device movement over the scalp. The device oπginally discussed for moving hars out of the way in the first-descπbed embodiment of the hair extension attachment system was the bend-under system. The first-descπbed embodiment of ttne bend-under system was configured using two pars of pinching belts, to engaged hars, and it was placed below and towards the terminal ends of the processing stack's har channels However, the embodiment of the bend-under system first discussed is neither the only possible vaπant of a bend-under system nor the only embodiment of a broader class of device which we will refer to as a means of preventing har-buildup in front of an obstacle associated with a har processing or manipulaton system. Generally, wherever a bend-under system is referenced, other types of har-buildup-prevention systems can be used in its place. Har-buildup-prevention systems can be divided into two general categoπes: Continous and Intermittent. " •• Contnous Hair-buildup-prevention systems tt h b h th ""Intemnitten Hair-Buildup-Prevention Systems Intermittent Reversing Hair-Buildup Prevention We will discuss two types of intermittent system which prevent har-buildup in front of an obstacle associated with the har processing system The first type involves backtracking or reversing hair movement through the processing sytem and the second type involves elevating the processing system relative to the scalp There are two vaπants of the reversing system, largely-parallel-to-movement- path-onented processing systems and largely non-parallel-to-movement-path-oπented processing systems By movement path, we are refenng to movement of a processing system relative to the scalp By parallel vs non-parallel oπentataon, we are speaking of sad movement path direction over scalp relative to the most promenient direction of movement hars take within a processing system 1 LARGELY-PARALLEL-TO-MOVEMENT-PATH-ORIENTED The operationl sequence of the largely-parallel system is to backtrack exiting hairs through their their onginal movement paths into the processing system after they have been processed or manipulated by it Next, convey sad hars laterally to at least one lateral side of the processing system Finally and optonally, apply force to sad exiting hars capable of moving them backwards The most promenient direction of movement hars take within the processing system is largely parallel to its movement over the scalp Note. Means used to convey or apply force to hars may selected from, but not limited to, any means previously descnbed in this document for these purposes 2 LARGELY-NON-PARALLEL-TO-MOVEMENT-PATH-ORIENTED In the largely-non-parallel system the paths hars take inside the processing system are configured to have the most promenient directon of movement hars take in a largely non-parallel direction relative to the system movement over the scalp Thus hairs must be backtracked through said largely non-parallel portions Once backtracking is complete, said hairs are largely in an area which isnt obstructed by the processing system relative to its movement over the scalp, thereby, avoiding har-buildup However, a means of actively encouraging hars to take the largely perpendicular path into the hair processing system, such as a preliminary acutator that engages hairs and moves them in, a preliminary-har-actuation (non-solid-based) force that does the same as sad acutator, movement of har processing system itself into the hars, or configunng the tensionmg har straghtner means to tension so that hars arc under some tension around the entrance areas of sad (largely-perpendicular-path) har processing system might be necessary Note. This arcing under tension is due to a tendencey for the hars to want to staghten out in a straght line intersecting the har-pracessmg system or on the far side of sad har -processing sytem Preliminary actuator and preliminary-har-actuation force denote actuaton means that wouldnt be necessary if the processing system were onented more parallel to har flow Notes for both svstem nπentatinns. -In both LARGELY-PARALLEL-TO-MOVEMENT-PATH-ORIENTED and LARGELY-NON-PARALLEL-TO-MOVEMENT-PATH- ORIENTED emobidments, ideally, some preliminary-obstructon means for keeping the limited group of scalp hars, which currentty have authoπzed access to the hair-processing system, seperate from those traling behind them duπng har-processing-system entrance and exit via reversing (processed hars) through their paths Addtonally , said preliminary-obstructon means might be used in preventng trailing hars from moving laterally and past the har processing system prematurely before being processed This preliminary-obstruction means means could include, but is not limited to, an additional set of har-meteπng means perhaps based on a multiple har channel design or, alternatively, based on one large har channel placed ahead of the cardinal-processing system The cardinal-processing system is defined as that processing system which performs (at least some of) the processes on or relative to the hars which are the purpose of the use of the hair-processing system, as a whole, in the first place, whereas, the preliminary-obstructon means serves to prevent premature entrance to or passage around sad cardinal processing system -The most promenient direction of movement hars take within a processing system should be assumed to be that of final approach into the processing areas before contact with a functional area which has a purpose other than to merely act as a stationary har-channel wall this direction of approach should be assumed to be largely perpendiuclar to a line running through like areas in parallel processing areas if the system is actaully, or was to be configured, with multple processing areas and/or hair channels in parallel -Generally, there should be enough space between the preliminary-obstructon means and cardinal processing system that exit of hars reversed relatve to the cardinal-processing system have a free path of movement either laterally around said cardinal system and/or past it Of course, sad free-path includes the path formed through a har-conveyance means if any is used -Reversal of hairs through the cardinal-processing system can be effected by sad cardinal system itself backing up relatve hars in it rather than only a means of actuatng sad hairs out of the processing system -A hybnd of LARGELY-PARALLEL-TO-MOVEMENT-PAT H-ORIENTED and LARGELY-NON-PARALLEL-TO-MOVEMENT- PATH-ORIENTED emobidments can be configured, such as a processing system onented diagonally to the direction ofmovement over scalp -The means of laterally helping hairs around the side of cardinal system after reversal from it can include blocking entrance to it with an obstruction means whose forward edge is slanted in a direction largely non-perpendicular to the direction ot system movement over the sclap This blocking should occur in a time peπod after reversal of hars out of the system is complete but before the preliminary-obstructon means (if one is used) allows another group of hairs access to enter the processing system Sad obstructon edge may (or may not) include a means of engaging the reversed hars in front of it and guiding or conveying them in a direction either to a lateral side of the system or the back of the system or both Intermittent Elevating Hair-Buildup Preventon -Processing system elevaton, such as oπgmally shown in the har-cross-sectonal reshaping embodiment, could be used as a means of preventng (processed-) har-buildup in front of an obstruction associated with the processing system It is based on intermrtenty actuatng the processing system relative to scalp by using a mechanism that moves said processing system either relative to a handle unit and/or a processing-system-attached fixture whose purpose is to support the processing system above the scalp For example, the stlt-portion of the handle unit shown in the first embodiment is a fixture whose purpose is to support the processing system above the scalp. *"A Computerized Control Svstem that Requires a Code to Function*" In order to make sure that the operator does not use mfeπor mateπals, the system could be configured so that a code has to be entered in order to get the system to do a certain amount of won. The code veπftcation system could require that a different code be entered for each batch of matenal used. For example, to ensure that the authoπzed brand of adhesive is used, with each container of adhesive sold, a valid code should be supplied. This code will allow the amount of adhesive in the container to be used, but this code will only be accepted by ttne machine once In order to use the next container of adhesive, the system will require a new code. Ideally, each code will be custom generated to work only on a specific unit. As such, valid codes provided for one machine cannot be shared and used in an unauthonzed manner with another machine. The codes can be supplied by a vanety means including keyboard, diskette, swip card, or any other computer input system. In order for the system to know how much work is being done, it could simply keep track of the time it is turned on However, some operators might keep the machine turned on even when they are not really using it on the hair. Thus, use could be veπfied by sensors that sense movement over the scalp and/or hars passing through the system. Such sensors include sensors hooked to wheels and sensors run across the channel pathways that detect movement of hars through the system. REFINEMENTS AND IDEAS CONCERNING THE HAIR EXTENSION REMOVAL SYSTEM The har extension remover system has been previously descnbed However, further refinements to this type of system are descnbed below ♦ "Mechanical Aspects of Remover*" Har extension remover system refinements of a pπmanly mechanical nature are descirbed in the list below - The remover's input vacuum nozzles, usually, should be divided into thin slits, small apertures or have screens placed over them. This will prevent any har extensions from being sucked into the vacuum nozzles rather than being earned away by the hair transport belts. Of course, this does not have to be the case if the har extensions are supposed to be earned away by the vacuum nozzles. This might be desired if the har extension are simply to be removed and not recyded. It might also be the case if there is a sophistcated recycling system that can deal even with hars sent to it after they have been sucked ttirough a tube. - Improve solvents ablity to dissolve by warming it before applying it to the har. - In many attachment systems, a temporary fast hardening adhesive means, such as wax, will be applied in con j uction with a longer last adhesive means such as cyanoacrylate. This temporary adhesive means is likely to rapidly soften and harden with heating and cooling. In order to remove this temporary adhesive means, the hair extension remover could be have a mode where it only applies a heated fluid to the har. It would apply and suck away this heated fluid in the same manner as it does solvent and cleaning fluid. This fluid might be washed over the har in great quanates and sucked up in a fracton of a second after applicaton. Alternatively, it might be applied and left on the har for a short tme The hot fluid might be an oil or some other organic fluid that, once melted, the temporary adhesive would tend to remain dissolved in. The hot fluid might have a very thick, even gel-like, viscosity so that it stcks to the hars and/or stcks the hars together in bunches so that detached har extensions dont fall from the head spontaneously. The temporary adhesive removal substance may use some other removal means than heat It might use a solvent strong enough to dissolve only the temporary adhesive but not the more permanent adhesive. For example, isopropyl alcohol will dissolve a mixture of beeswax and rosin, which can be used as a tempoary adhesive. However, isopropyl alochol does not effectively dissolve cyanoacrylate adhesives, which can be used on a more permanent basis Regardless of the exact nature of the temporary-adhesive-removal substance, it will have to be washed off itself. Perhaps, this can be done by using the remover system to apply a detergent and water solution which will be vacuumed away a moment after it is applied to the har. - The solvents used to detach har extensions are are usually flammable. In order to reduce this nsk of fire, certain precautions might be taken For example, a sensor capable of detecting fire and fire extinguisher nozzles could be placed in or near the remover handle unit Naturally, tine sensors would be configured to tngger the fire extinguisher nozzles placed nearby. Alternative fire prevention methods include incorporating a fire retardant substance into the solvent or applying such a substance with the solvent. To illustrate, a flammable solvent gel could be under, above, or sandwiched between a fire-retardant gel. This would be accomplished by a mechanical process. For example, fire-retardant gel could be extruded through nozzles positioned on either side of each solvent gel nozzle. A similar mechanical scheme could be used to apply a protective fluid, gel or foam that shields the scalp from the solvent gel, so as to minimize the amount of solvent absorbed by the human skin. - To further reduce fire πsks and health hazards, the har extension remover handle unit could have a vacuum nozzle within it. This would suck any escaping solvent vapors from the unit. Such nozzles might be placed near and even in line with the solvent applicaton nozzles themselves. In a similar manner, a hair cap that sucks solvent vapors from it could be produced. This cap would be used duπng the peπod while the solvent is detaching hair extensions. Solvent vapor πch ar, from either source, could be bubbled through a solvent that will dissolve them, such as water in the case of acetone. Finally, this solvent could be safely flushed down the drain. - In most cases, the har extension detaching solvent will be appied to the hars, on the head, in long flat beads that will act on the adhesive for several minutes. In order to prevent har extensions from falling out in an unorderiy manner, the solvent should be thick and stcky enough that it holds har extension in place, even after the adhesive that holds them have been dissolved Ideally, the remover handle unit should be configured so that the long solvent beads line up with the remover channels that onginally applied them This way one row of hars matted into a sheet-like group will go to only one remover channel, and wont be disrupted by being split between two channels This is facilitated in great part because the remover could use the same type of track guiding means that the attachment system does, most likely a track-guide cap. ♦• "Altematve Hair Extension Removal Means Remove CVD films nngs with. An altematve hair extension attachment removal means should be used if chemical vapor depositon (CVD) was used to deposit a πng of inorganic mateπal around a scalp har and a har extension in order to attach them together These nngs typically will not be dissolvable by organic solvents, therefore, another removal means will be necessary Below is a list of strategies for removing hair attachments without using organic solvents. - Har extension attachments that are not dissolvable by organic solvents might be dissolved with acids or bases These acids or bases should usually be formulated into a semi-solid gel or paste - It is possible that an attachment means that uses a combination of an organic adhesive with an inorganic nng might be used. For example, the inorganic nng might be applied using CVD or by cπmpmg metal around the har attachment area. However, these inorganic nngs, although strong, might it some cases might slide so that they fail to hold their positions on their hars To prevent this sliding, an organic adhesive might be applied to both the nngs and the hars, after the nngs have been placed around their hars. In order to dissolve such a combmaton attachment, the organic adhesive should first be dissolved with a organic solvent, as previously descπbed. Once the solvent is removed, the nngs could be slid off the hars by pulling them lengthwise ttirough slits that have a wider diameter than the hairs but smaller diameter the nngs. These slits might be configured as funneling notches cut into the connectivity bndge area. Hars will be tunneled into these thin slots where they will pulled through by the bend-under system. As the hars are pulled through, the nngs will be pulled off. Likewise, these nngs could be slid off by sliding har bundles through pmcher notches similar to those p cher notches descπbed for use with the attachment system - Altematvely, such inorganic nngs, or any sufficienty πgid attachment means, might be cracked mechanically. Ultra sound should be counted among such mechanical cracking means. A crushing means such as hammers or rollers are other possibiiites However, the danger of using such a crushing means is that the hars themselves may be permanenty flattened and damaged. To prevent this, the most narrow distance between crushing surfaces must be held to a minimum distance Furthermore, only a limited number of hars, at any given moment, should be allowed between crushing surfaces. This might require the use of metenng/isolaton system like those descnbed for the attachment system. " •• Wavs to prevent and deal with attachment of 2 or more scalp hars to each other: The attachment stack can use systems that isolate single scalp hairs. This way only har extensions will be attached to scalp hars. Scalp hars will not be attached to each other. However, what if the systems used by the attachment stack fal to do this, and two or more scalp hars get attached to each other. Certainly, this is undesirable because if a person combs or runs her fingers ttirough her har, ttie fingers might get caught under the arcs of the attached scalp hars. Although it is preferable to prevent scalp hars from getting attached to each other, if this cannot be prevented, a system that detaches scalp har from each other but leaves them attached to har extensions could be used. The best way to configure such a system is to space sheets with wedge-shaped cross-sectons pointed forwards, as tnes along a connectivity bπdge. The flat surfaces of these wedge-shaped sheets should be largely perpendicular to the scalp and parallel to their directon movement over the scalp, and the tps of the wedges should be placed near the scalp and pointed forward relative to their movement over the scalp These sheets could have a center to center spacing less or approximating equal to the spacing of har follides on the scalp, in other words about .05 of an inch (1.27 mm). They could also have an edge to edge spacing sufficient to allow hars to pass between them, about .01 of inch (.254 mm), or greater. This assembly of wedges could be moved over the scalp in a similar manner to the way that the straghtener is. In fact, like the straghtener, this wedge assembly might be made moveable relatve to its handle unit The points of these wedges will tend to get caught under the arcs that connected two connected scalp hars form. Further, the gentely sloping wedge-shapes will relatively gradually force itself between connected scalp hars, thus, peeling them apart. However, these wedges will tend not to detach har extensions from scalp hars because they cannot get caught between a scalp har and its attached har extension. Since the adhesives used usually temporaπly weaken upon exposure to heat, heatng these wedges will help them peel two scalp hars apart. The heated-wedge system could be combined with the remover unit Other systems that could be combined with it and the remover include a hot oil applicator for dissolving the temporary holding wax/rosm adhesive and a solvent gel applicator for dissolving the longer term holding adhesive. " • Keeping Applied Solvent Only Where It's Needed*" Har extension remover system refinements that pπmaπly deal with keeping the applied solvent only where its needed are descirbed in the list below: - In order to use any solvent that is undesirable to get on the scalp, such as methylene choloπde, mix the solvent into a slurry with small particles that will through capillary action prevent solvent from escaping. It's important that the pore size between slurry particles is sufficiently smaller than that found between human hairs so that the slurry wins the competon with the hars for soaking up solvent, and thus, keeps it off the scalp. Also, the slurry-paste should stck to the hars so that gravity doesnt pull it down the hair shafts onto the scalp. A stcky slurry paste is also desirable from the standpoint of immobilizing detached hair extensions before the remover can get to them. Means of making the slurry paste sticky include: 1. Fomulate it with a thick viscosity 2. Allow its viscosity to increase with a partial evaporation of solvent from the slurry. 3. Use a chemical hardening reaction similar to plaster of pans or concrete (onlv weaker only small percentage of slurry on its exteπor surface should react this way) 4 Add sticky organic substances to the slurry Perhaps sad organic substances are slighty in soluton or perhaps their molecular weights are too great for them to be dissolved (or there's some other reason they cant be dissolved). In fact, organics that dont fully dissolve could replace inorganic grans that dont dissolve. In other words, the product would be a gel rather than a slurry. Finally, this thick solvent slurry or gel might itself be applied under or within a protectve foam that retards evaporaton of ttne solvent Sad protective foam would most likely be simultaneously applied by a seperate set of nozzles on ttie remover. - Think of small grains as having little capillaπes between them that are forced to form small capillaπes that dead end at their line of contact no matter how big and non-pourous the ob|βct is theyre in contact with. The solvent in these capillaπes dissolves the adhesive which is earned off and diluted deep within the capillary channels by diffusion (nol capillary acton). - It is undesirable for the solvent in the slurry to evaporate because this means that it is no longer around to do its job. In order for the solvent in a slurry to evaporate, it must evaporate through the pores on the extenor surface of the slurry mass. These pores can be called extenor terminal pores because they are the ends of the capillary tunnels exposed to the the ar. In order to prevent undesirable solvent evaporaton, consider the possibility of using a substance that dissolves in the solvent within the slurry-paste such that as the solvent evaporates from the exteπor terminal pores this dissovled substance builds up clogging the exteπor terminal pores. Thus, a "skin" is formed on the exteπor of the solvent mass. This skin prevents further solvent evaporaton from the paste. This same type of evaporaton-preventng-skin-formation approach could also be used in pastes and gels which are entirely organic. However, since in 100% organic gels there typically won't be small particles, passageways or pores, the skin will be responsible for preventng evaporton of the entre surface area of the solvent mass in envelops. - Gelatin can be an example of an organic molecule that really doesnt dissolve in water but can retain it. Hot gelatin mixed with solvent and extruded under pressure is likely to stay put in the har. Of course, there are many altematve organic molecules that could be used to make a solvent gel. Ideally, organic molecules that will retain a solvent without fully dissolving in it and weakening its solvency should be used. - The slurry-paste or gel could be extruded through a slot on the remover as if it were caulk. The extrusion could be completely powered from the base unit and its rate synchronized with the remover's movement speed over the scalp to prevent excess solvent paste applicaton. - Altematvely, the remover's solvent could be introduced into an air stream by a liquid output nozzle close to the exit of its ar output nozzle. This would allow for fast adjustment of the applicaton rate - By applying har tension far enough back with the tensionmg har straghtener, at least duπng solvent paste applicaton, the caulk-like πbbons of solvent can be placed at an exact distance from the scalp and their πbbon -like structure will help: 1. Support the detached hars 2 Hold hairs into pre-separated and straightened rows such that the straightener need not be used on the removers solvent washing pass, or at least it would not be used as vigorously. Note: The washing pass is the second pass the remover usually makes Duπng this pass, it washes the caulk-like πbbons of solvent from the har after the solvent has dissolved the har extension attachments. - Bald spots might present a problem in terms of protectng the scalp from solvent contact To remedy this, har sensors could be put in the remover. Solvent would not be applied in areas where there are too few haπs Altematvely, bald areas could be sprayed with a substance, perhaps a powder, that is less absorbent of the solvent than the paste-forming solvent vehicle is. Such a substance could be applied manually to bald spots or sprayed on by the remover either using outputs located below the solvent outputs or outputs that spray at a steep angle that ' s sure to make it to the scalp through the har. - Solvents (usually organic) might be used on har for vanous purposes including removing har extension attached with adhesive or solvent-dissolvable har coatngs. In order to reduce any drying effect the solvent might have on the skin and har, certain steps can be taken like dissolving conditoners in it These conditioners may include vaπous substances known to form a protective film on keratinous surfaces or an oily substance similar to the natural oils found in har. Dissolving such substances in the solvent will reduce its ability to dissolve adhesive, so their concentrations should be carefully calibrated. The ideal solvent dissolves adhesive (or coatings) fast and thoroughly, while robbing the hair of as little moisture and oily substances as possible. The nail polish remover industry faces these same challenges. Pnor art in this industry includes nail polish removers that combine powerful solvents, like acetone or ethyl acetate, with proteins like colagen. Sad proteins form a protectve film on the har surface that helps prevent moisture loss We suggest that all pnor art intended for use nal polish removers be considered when formulating an adhesive (or coating) removal solvents for hair. Three of the most relevant U.S. patents concerning formulatng gente yet effectve nal polish removers are 4 ,829,092, 5,342,536 and 5,486,305. REFINEMENTS AND IDEAS CONCERNING THE SYSTEM THAT RECYCLES OR DISPOSES OF HAIR EXTENSIONS AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM THE SCALP - Complete vacuum transfer may be optonal if the grasp positon at the remover is sufficient constant. If belts need to be transfer ed to a second belt for any reason simply mantain engagement in one belt set and using vacuum to pull har largely perpendicular to sad belt set before introduction to a second parallel belt set. Also, a double belt remover is an option for getting hars between to be held between two belt sets. -Potential problem: Overly short and/or overly curly hair extensions might jam the system Overly short hairs might jam the vacuum transfer unit by being sucked up as a clump or more likely overly short hars would get conveyed to the clips as a clump Overly curly-tipped har extensions might not hang straght down into the attachment area. Solutions: -Apply water to har extensions while they're being earned on the first transport belt before they reach the vacuum transfer unit. This is an effort to straighten hars. -Before the vacuum transfer unit, have the first transport belts take tine har extensions through a process that removes overly short hair extensions (too short to make it successfully through the vacuum transfer unit). This process would consist of first pulling har extension straght down from the tranport belts by applying downward air cunents (vacuumed or blown) or any other functionally equivalent har straghtening means (sad belts may have to be turned upside first). Dunng application of downward ar currents, a second lower tranport belt system should pinch/engage har extensions at a distance far enough below the first higher belt set that short hars dont get pinched. Next, the onginal and highest transport belt sets should release their pinch on the har extensions. Thus, overly short hair extensions will no longer be pinched. Instead, they will be vacuumed away and discarded. Next, upward air currents should be applied to the belts The higher tranport belts should resume their pinch. The lower tranport belts could now release their pinch, but they might continue to mantan it. At this point, the belt system is only holding sufficienty long har extensions The belt system can now enter the vacuum transfer unit Note- In order to ensure that the upward ar currents dont blow both the upper and lower har extension tps into the higher transport belt, the lower belts could be sunounded laterally by marginal platforms on both sides. Ideally, these marginal platform should begin after the lower belts have pinched the har extensions but before the higher belts have relinquished their pinch. The marginal platforms should continue until the upper transport belts have re-established their pinch The marginal platforms could be placed at a height above the lower tranport belt sets very bottom but below the upper transport belt In order to prevent lower har-extension tips from finding their way between the marginal platform and the lower transport belt, the platform most optimally be placed at the same height as the lower transport belt system such that it forms a seal around the lower transport belt system In which case, upward ar cunents should oπginate at or above the marginal platform's surface. -To remove overly curly tipped har extensions, have the second tranport belts take them through a sorting process after the vacuum transfer unit. First the upper second tranport belts should release their pinch on the hair extension. (Altematvely, the upper second transport belt may be configured such that it hasnt yet pinched the har extension.) In an area where there are no upward ar currents stragteπmg the upper tip of the har extension, the upper second transport belts should establish their pinch on the har extensions. Overly curly har extension tips won't extend high enough to be pinched. If the belts are moving so fast when the upper pinch establishment area that ar resistance causes even straight hair extensions to bend, then reduce the ar resistance by blowing from behind, sucking from the front, or even establishing a sealed vacuum chamber that is contnaully evacuated by sucton. Optonally: Once the upper tranport belt has reestablished pinch, blow a sideways ar cunent between the upper and lower belt such that tps that are just barely held by the upper belt are dislodged from it Perhaps, have a a third level intermediate transport belts establish pinch on the har extensions duπng this blowing process. These middle belts would be placed directy below the upper belts. Dislodged har extensions will be blown hoπzontal to such an extent that they will not even be pinched by the middle belts. Next: Have t e lower belts release pinch on the har extensions. Vacuum away hars that are dropped. They are the overly curly hairs that didnt get pinched by the upper transport belt. Using a marginal collar around the upper or middle transport belt, create downward ar currents. Duπng this tme, have the lower belts re-establish their pinch on the har extensions If a middle belt is used, have it release its pinch on the hair extensions. Finally, create upward ar currents, and have the upper belts re-establish pinch on the har extensions The har extensions are now being held by an upper and lower sets of second transport belts which are taking them to the har extension clip filling system REFINEMENTS AND IDEAS CONCERNING INDEPENDENT(OPTIONAL) ACCESSORIES THAT WORK WITH THE SYSTEM [[Independent Accessories for Safety and Convenience]] The vaπous har processing systems descπbed in this document can benefit from certain independent accessoπes that work with such systems. Descπptions of such accessoπes follow Protective Eyeglasses and Masks Protective eyeglasses or goggles could be used to protect a customer's eyes from any unhealthy agent that might escape from a har processing system The type of protecton needed depends greaty on the embodiment of the processing system However, such eyeglasses may protect aganst agents like U V., solvents, and hot liquids The eyeglasses may fit over the ears in tie normal manner However, since the customer will most likely be weaπng a track cap as shown in FIG. 83, it is likely that the eyeglasses will somehow snap onto the track cap. For example, it is likely that the eyeglasses could engage the track guide supporting perpendiculars below the ears and side bum area. The supporting perpendiculars are those portons of the track cap perpendicular to the parallel track guide portons A likely form of engagement would be concentre: cylinder over cylinder snap For example, the cylinders attached to the eyeglasses could could each be hollow with a slit in its bottom that allows it to fit over the cylmdeπcal perpendiculars Such goggles might be equipped with a positve pressure ar hose that pumps clean ar into sad goggles in order to exclude solvent vapors from them. This positive-pressure goggle assembly might even be extended down over the nose and mouth as a mask. Braiding Gloves In order prevent nppmg off attached har extensions by putting excessive force on them when styling the har, for example when bradmg the har, braiding gloves could be used These gloves have a relatvely slippery surface which is likely to be made siippeπer by applicaton of a lubπcant. Hands weaπng sad gloves will be unlikely to grasp any har extensions tght enough to πp their attachments to scalp hars. The storage case for these gloves should have a lubπcant resevoir in it In fact, the gloves themselves should be stored within the lubπcant resevoir or at least touching a lubπcant soaked object, such as a storage case lining made of sponge. The gloves will most likely be made of a slippery cloth, such as silk, or have their surfaces coated with a low coefficient of fπction mateπal, such as Teflon. Snap-To-Guida Track Place Holder A snap-to-guide-track place holder could be used to keep processed and unprocessed hars separate so the attacher can be lifted from the scalp and refilled with a fresh cartndge, should the cartndge run out in the middle of a track-length In other words, the track cap has rows formed between parallel tracks. In the event that the har attacher has to be paused in the middle of a row, a place holder constructed as a rod witti a clasp on each end, where sad clasps are spaced one track width from each other, should be attached to the track at a point between the scalp hars that have been processed and those that have not This should be done before the attachment system is moved away from the head. Trie place holder, by holding the processed and unprocessed hars apat, will allow the user to begin agan where she left off. Ideally, the dasps can slide along the track so when the user begins she can slide the rod of tne place holder back over ttie processed hars out of the way of the system. As long the rod is not slid too far back, it will make the processed hars lay flat and keep them out the attachment system, even if the attachment system touches them The clasps I am refemng to most likely are made out of a flexible matenal, have a largely circular cross- sectons (or cross-secton similar to each track's) with a slit near the bottom each. Each slit, when pressed down over the track, first flexibly widens over the track and then hugs around sad track Custom Fabπcaton Of A Track Cap The track cap is illustrated in FIG 83 Although several standard sizes of prefabπcated caps might be used, there might be advantages to custom forming a track cap to an individual's head The best way to do this is to start with components made out of a relatvely flexible matenal that can be treated to become a πgid mateπal. The track cap itself is composed of two types of tracks. Most tracks are guide tracks. These guide tracks are the many parallel tracks that run from front to the back on the head. These are the tracks that the har attachment system is guided between. A second type of track are the supporting tracks that hold the guide tracks together. These support tracks run largely perpendicular to the guide tracks and largely parallel to the hariine. There can be ttiought to be two support tracks, one in front of the har running across the forehead, and one behind it running across the nape of the neck However, these two support tracks usually connect together, often somewhere below the ear, to form a single support structure that enπcles the head. The support tracks should mantan an adequate margin from the hariine so that they never overlie the har, because this would obstruct the attachment system A custom-made track cap could be constructed in place on a customer's head. This is begun by attaching both ends of each flexible guide track member perpendicularly with both the front most support track and the rear most support track The first guide track to be attached between the two support tracks is the one most in the center and at the top of the head. Once this is done the two support tracks are conveniently held together and one can work outwards symetπcally adding new guide tracks on each side in turn. After all of the guide tracks are attached, both ends of one support track should be attached to the the other support track The guide tracks should be equally spaced, one standard track- width apart through their entire length This spacing can be accomplished by using a device functionally the same as the snap-to-guide-track place holder descnbed above These track spacing means should only be left on the cap assembly until it is treated and becomes hard Although the support track might have receiving holes in it, it is best if a clasp means is attached to the end of each guide track and then clasped around the support track Although guide tracks might have their clasping means integrally attached to one end, the clasp means attached to the opposite end of each guide track most ideally should be a seperate part from each guide track This is because we dont know how long each guide track should be, and each will have to be cut to size on the head. If clasps were pre-atteched to both ends of a guide track, one clasp would probably have to be cut off anyway Thus, a joiner configured as seperate part compnsed of a clasp to fit around the side of the support track and attached perpendicularly to a clasp or open-ended cylinder to fit around the end of a guide track. These joiners themselves should probably be composed of a soft plastic that becomes πgid or otherwise permanenty attached to the pieces they hold together However, independent joiners dont have to be used at the ends of all guide tracks. For example, the guide track to be used in the very middle of the head can be pre-attached to both support tracks The assembly can be molded this way as one piece. Similarly, all the guide track to support track attachments on just one of the support tracks might be prefabncated at equal distances from each other. However, the remaning guide-track-to-support-track attachments shouldnt be made on the second support track because this would make it difficult to get the tracks to conform to the shape of different-sized heads. The previosuly descnbed guide track spacers, which are to be used every few inches along the guide tracks and then removed after ttie cap is hardened, could each have one of its ends pre-attached to a guide track and a clasp disposed on their other end After hardening, these spacers should be removed. Thus, ideally the pre-attached end is very thin and weak so that it can easily be cut or broken off and the clasp end either remans soft, (perhaps by making it out of a seperate mateπal), so that it doesn't engage its track very tghty, or is made thin or perforated so that it too can be removed from the guide track to which it had been attached A BRUSH THAT DOESNT GET CAUGHT BETWEEN HAIRS ATTACHED IN AN UNDESIRABLE MANNER Also use of flexible bπstles, bnstes with balls, or other smooth objects, at their ends, or large ends with a cone shape In other words, brush or comb bnstes (or bπstle-like rods) with large ends can't get caught between two scalp hars that have been undesirably joined together Har Diameter Gauge A har diameter gauge that is made up of parallel narrowing channels juxtaposed with a diameter measuπng scale mscπbed on it is a desirable accessory. By using a form of precession manufactunng, such as electroforming, a comb-like device with narrowing funnel-like passageways between its tines could be formed These funnel-like passage ways could narrow down through the range of scalp hair diameters The thinner a har is the farther it could make towards the apex of each passageway Juxtaposed to the passageways could be a scale indicating their width at vaπous points. Bv running this implement through the har like a comb and then observing the narrowest diameter to which most hars make it, an estimate of the typical diameter of the hars present on a person's head can be made Cπmping of Hairs Coated with a Wax-Like Temporary Protective Substance Which Have Also Been Exposed to a Disulfide-Breaking Chemical. In many cases it might be desirable to use chemical setting of the har in conjunction with the special types of har processing descπbed within this document Before attaching cosmetc har extensions, it might be desirable to straighten a person's natural hair Likewise, after har extensions are attached, both the hair extensions and natural har could be given a permanent wave or curl together. Also, after cross- sectional hair reshaping, it may be desirable to permanenty set the hair using chemicals. Such a procedure will help influence the desired har growth patterns. Whether the har is straightened or given tght curls the procedure remans similar. Specifically, the har has to be treated with a chemical that will temporally allow some of the disulfide bonds in it to be temporanly broken and it must be set to hold it in the shape of a desired longitudinal curvature while the disulfide bonds are allowed to reform However, there are some disadvantages with conventional har setting methods In the case of har curling, curlers are time consuming to apply. In the case of har straightening, the chemical agents used are often stronger than those used for curling and are not adequately prevented from coming in contact with the scalp This causes imteton of the scalp. In both cases, the chemical agents tend to release an unpleasant odor. For these reasons, I have contπved an accessory that performs chemical har setting without these disadvantages. This device doesn't use curlers to temporaπly set the har in place. Rather, after a disulfide breaking chemical is applied to the har, the device coats ttie with a temporary coatng, such as wax This temporary coating both alleviates the need for curlers by serving as a fixaton means itself and prevents the chemical agent from escaping from the har, thereby preventng scalp imteton and odor For the temporary coatng to hold the har it a certain shape, it must first be set in a particular shape itself This can be best done by cπmping the wax coated har between surfaces in order to give sad coated hair a desired shape These cπmpmg surfaces could be refened to as cπmping irons The wax, or other temporary coatng matenal, has to be malleable enough to be cnmped but firm enough to hold its shape This might be facilitated by using heated cπmping surfaces to soften the wax duπng cπmping The devices that apply the chemical, coat with temporary coatng, and cπmp might be separate implements run through the har individually or built into a single unit In many cases, it is desπable to configure the system with a bend-under means that will allow the hairs to be pulled ttirough it Processing areas can be formed along a specific length of each har channel, perhaps by isolatng a limited number of hair in said area By holding hars in a processing area, hars can be pulled vertically through sad processing area or even individual processing chambes. The processing occurnng in this area may include applicaton of a chemical agent and protectve temporary coatng and cπmping Cπmping should occur in segments starting at the proximal bases of the hars and moving lengthwise towards the distal tps of the hairs. This segment-by-segment cπmping should be faciliated by intermittent pulling of the hars by a bend-under system, and/or a processing system elevaton means, such as onginally descnbed in the har-cross-sectonal reshaping embodiment, and refened to later as an intermittent elevatng har-buildup (in front of obstacle) prevention means. Spedfically, the bend-under system will pull a length of har through approximately equal to the length of har the cπmping irons process in a single step. Cπmping is facilitated by cπmpmg-iron surfaces disposed largely parallel to lateral edges of each processing area channel and capable of moving inwards into the processing area in order to cπmp the lock of har therein. Likely, the sad cnmping-iron surfaces will be disposed as functional areas on moving tines or even supported by stationary channels and actuated by an mtra-channel means of acuation like micro-machines. The cnmping-iron-placement relative to the har should be considered structurally homologous to the placement of the protectve side walls of the har remover system shown in, and oπficies halves in the coating/cross-sectional reshaping embodiment Naturally, both the hair channels and the cπmping irons are likely to be configured in a tine-based manner using connectivity bndges. A convex- shaped iron should should be placed on one side of each har channel and be made capable of meshing with its concave counterpart on the ottier side of the channel. Either both tie convex and concave members move together to meet in the middle of their channel, or only one of them may move in order to meet its static counterpart on its counterpart's side. Cπmping irons usually function in complementary concave/convex pars of counterparts However, their specific shape depends on the desired degree of har curiiness desired If perfectly straght har is desired, each cnmping-iron par used will most likely be composed of two pertecty flat surfaces, neither convex nor concave However, if a certain degree of har curiiness is desired, each half of a cπmping iron par will have a somewhat semi-circular shape, one half convex, the other half the same shape but concave. Usually, this will mean each cπmpmg-iron-par half has a "C" cross-sectional shape. However, we can imagine each half having several semi-circular sections joined together forming a serpentine cross-section, such as an "S"-shape Of course, since different dients will desire a different curl tightness and shape, so too will the exact shapes of the cπmping irons have to vary. This vanance can be achieved by several methods First, there can be several entire cnmping-iron handle units each with its own size and shape of cnmping iron. Alternatively, there can be a single cnmping-iron handle unit to which vanous sizes and shapes of cnmping irons can be easily removed and attached. Finally, the cross-sectional shape of the cnmping iron surfaces might be given the ability to actually change their shape under the guidance of an automated mechanism. To illustrate, the cnmping-iron surfaces could be composed of a flexible sheet or film on the inteπor (non-hair-touching side) of which rods or bars move to support and influence its shape. Sad movable rods could be firmly attached to said flexible sheet, in which case, the diameter, or height, of the cπmping surface would vary with its degree of curvature. As an alternative, sad movable rods could freely slide relative to sad flexible sheet. In which case, the cπmping surface diameter, or height, could reman the same at any degree of curvature so long as the flexible sheet is held aganst the movable rods by a strechable means, such as spnngs. Of course, it should be obvious that many hybπds of the attached-rod and sliding-rod system can be readily imagined. For example, an attached-rod system that mantains its diameter at different curvatures because its flexible sheets is itself composed of a flexible matenal Likewise, a sliding-rod system which uses an attached-rod configuration at only a few strategic points, such as to the most inteπor concave point of a concave curvature in order to hold the sheet inward over all the rods. -This device is largely homologous to the automated hair-cutting embodiment except the cutters have been substituted for cπmping irons. With respect to applying coatngs and chemicals, this device may be homlogous to embodiments that use onfice halves to apply coatings to hars pulled lengthise ttirough them. -This is a device that cπmps disulfide-breaking-chemical soaked/ wax coated hars in order to replace the need for curlers. (The wax or other temporary coating placed on the hars serves as a fixaton means replacing curlers.) -The system might spray the chemical and or temporary fixatve coating on using nozzles which spray a great numbers of hars at a time, like in the remover. Altemtively, it may use small nozzles or coating onfices halves like those descπbed for the cross-sectional reshaping/har coating system embodiment. Like it the fashion descnbed for the remover, it may (or may not) also apply a protectant to the scalp. -The system may also have a twist functon built into it so that the entre system or part (like a tne-assembly or functonal har handler portion) of it twists relative to the scalp, thereby, imparting a spiral twist to the hars strands that pass through it in additon to, or instead of, a cπmp- generated wave. -Since the system applies the disulfide-breaking (or any other type of har processing) chemicals accurately, it can keep them off the scalp. Additionally, since the system applies a coatng over sad chemicals it can contan their odor and prevent them form rubbing off of the hars onto the scalp. -For disuflide-breaking chemicals can be substtuted any substance which can used to change the longitudinal curavature of har either permanently or temporanly. For example, NaOH can be used to relax curiiness of har, thereby, making it straghter. -Applicaton of longitudinal-curvatur e-changing chemicals, protective coating, and cπmping may all occur on the same or different passes over the head. Mostly likely, curvature-changing chemicals are applied followed by the protective coating in the one pass over the head, and cπmping is performed in a second. A third pass (optional) may use methods, as those descirbed for the remover, to remove the protective coating. All of these functions might be integrated into a single system in one handle unit or placed on different handle units. -Protective coating application often includes application of a coolant to facilitate said coating's hardening -Cπmping duπng lengthwise pull through is optional Cπmping could be handled by a more conventional imptent such a conventional cnmping iron or curling iron without the automated lengthwise pull-through function -Also, the heart of this embodiment is applying a temporary protective coating to har which is capable of acting as a temporay fixation means and or protective coating means while a more permanent but somewhat slower-acting hair longitudinal-curvature-changmg substance has been applied to the har. Thus, any means of applying such a coating and such longitudinal-curvature-changmg subtance fall under this embodiment. Use of Hot Iron Straightening Combs in Sets with Decreasing Tine Spacing -Certain people have such tght curly har that many of these processing systems might not be able to be run through it unless sad har is first stragtened (curiiness removed) at least temporanly. One way to do this is to use conventional hot iron straightening combs However, to best prepare the har a set of several combs each with increasingly narrower har channels (decreasing tne spacing) could be used The wider- channel tines could be used as a preliminary measure and the nanower-channel tnes for further refinement This set of tnes might be mounted in the conventonal manner on conventonal handles using one type of tne-width per handle Further, increasingly narrower tne combs could be mounted together longitudinally into a single assembly so that the when combed through the har, areas one the head are exposed to increasingly narrower tnes in a single pass Addtonally, such hot iron combs (individual or sets) could be mounted in a manner homologous to the hair tensionmg straghtener. For example, ahead of a processing stack or system Further, such hot iron combs (individual or sets) could be mounted ahead of the har tensionmg straghtener Finally, the har tensionmg straghtner could be made the functonal equivalent of a hot iron comb by heatng it to a sufficientiy hight temperature Such devices can be used to make sure even the coarsest and tghest-curled har flows smoothly through the processing system without getting jammed in it REFINEMENTS CONCERNING THE MANUFACTURE OF HAIR EXTENSIONS AND FILLING CARTRIDGES WITH THEM " • Hair Extension Factory Manufacturing -Keratin Extrusion Manufacturing Process Previously, it was mentoned that an ideal source of hair extensions is manufactunng them from animal sources of keratn Usually, this would involve dissolving and extruding animal keratn into fibers shaped like human hars There are many animal sources of keratn including har, wool, hooves, aid feathers. Chicken feathers because of their lack of pigmenteton, low cost and vascular structure, which allows for rapid chemical degradation, are an excellent keratin source. Because these fibers are compnsed of proteins very similar to those found in human hars, they should behave like human hars In other words, they can be styled into whatever harstyle a person desires This is possible because proteins, unlike most synthetic polymers, soften and change their shape when exposed to water. When dned, this allows the hair to be set Extruded keratin is an ideal har extension source, not just because it is relatively inexpensive, but also because it allows man- made fibers to be used which helps to standardize the entre attachment process. The following steps outme a basic process ttiat could be used to manufacture extruded keratn har extensions: 1. The keratn source, such as feathers, should be mechanically washed and then chemically dissolved. Dissolve the keratn using a thiol to break the disulfide bonds and a detergent that will allow the keratn to be dissolved in soluton. Once chemically dissolved, the keratn may or may not suitable for extrusion. If there are undesirable impuπtes in the keratn that we do not want in the extruded har extensions, then once in soluton, the keratin should be punfied by methods such as filtenng and chemical manipulations Most of this process should occur in the absence of oxygen because oxygen will neutralize the thiol allowing the disulfide bonds to once agan establish themselves. If the keratin source is a slightly softer type of keratin than human hair, it might be harden by increasing the cross-linking in its chemcial structure, for example by vulcanization. In the case of vulcaniztion, this is to say additional disulfide bonds should somehow be introduced into the protein structure. However, if the keratin source is a slightly harder type than human hair, some of its disulfide bonds should be removed. This is probably best done by introducing chemicals that react with the cystme sulfurs so that they do not form disulfide bonds. Of course, it would probably be too difficult to remove the sulfur entities themselves without destroying the protein structure. A third option to achieve the correct keratin hardness is to mix keratin from two sources. Once source that is harder than human hair, the other softer. A variant of this third solution is to mix an overly hard type of keratin with a softer synthetic polymer that acts as a plasticizer. Polyurethane should be an excellent choice to act as plasticizer. 2. The keratn and any other structurally compatible compounds that reman should be extracted from soluton or transformed into a more concentrated soluton. For example, this achieved by evaporaton of the soluton or some form of chemical precepitation The keratin should still have a thiol concentraton great enough for it to reman soft. Probably, it should be brought a paste-like consistency The dissolved keratn should probably stll be protected from atmospheπc oxygen at this point 3. Optonal. This keratin paste should be mixed with color pigments to achieve the desired har color This mixing should probably occur in an ar-tght container that does not allow oxygen to come in contact with the softened keratn By mixing the coloπng agent in before fiber extrusion, subsequent dying will not be necessary. Pigments mixed into the fiber will likely be more stable than many dyes applied by soaking Additionally, if any plastcizers are to be mixed in that could not have been added previously, they should be mixed into the keratin paste now 4 The thiol containing softened keratin should be feed from a storage container to a gear pump, or equivalent, which extrudes it through a spinneret. The keratin source contaner and gear pump should not allow oxygen to come in contact with their contents The keratn used should be free of all gas bubbles and soft enough to make it through the small diameter spinneret holes but hard enough that once extruded the resultng fibers wont readily deform or stck together. Optonally The kertan fibers should be allowed to fall onto a screen conveyor belt that moves at their extrusion speed. 5. The extruded kertan fibers should be allowed to come in contact with sufficient oxygen to neutralize the thiol in them so that they may harden This may mean blowing ar over the fibers or spraying them will a thiol neutralizing liquid After neutralizaton, the fibers should be washed of extraneous chemicals 6. Optional. The now hardened kertan fibers, presumably washed of extraneous chemicals, should continue down their screen conveyor belt, or path, where they are sprayed, or soaked, with a soluton that coats them with a protectve coating A protective coatng is a concern for the following reasons. Normal human hars are largely made up of one homongenous blend of keratns. However, their surfaces have a thin protective cuhle layer of much harder keratin than ttne rest of the har. This protectve cutcle layer regulates the rate at which moisture and ions can enter and exit the har. A har stnpped of this bamer might dry and become brrttte because water exits from it too fast or it might allow undesirable dissolved substances to enter the hair. A protectve coatng semi-permeable to moisture can take the place of this cuticle. This protective coating might be a hard form of keratin, keratn mixed with a synthetic polymer, or an entirely synthetic polymer. In many cases, the protectve coatng should be dissolved because it is broken down to monomer or short chan lengths, or if it has disulfide bonds that are temporaπly broken. This coatng, or its polymer sub-units in soluton, should have an affinity for the surface of each har However, this coatng should be applied thin enough such that after it hardens around the surface of the har fiber, it does not greaty affect the flexibility of the inner keratn fiber For this reason, sad coatng should be designed such that only a certain amount of it can coat a hars surface regardless of the amount applied. This might mean that the coating is composed of the structural polymer sub-units and a filler substance that is also attracted to the surface of the har, however, later can be washed away. Perhaps, once the coating is hardened, this filler substance could be washed away leaving only the very thin and somewhat porous polymer coatng. The use of such a washable filler is a potental method for increasing a coatng's porosity and permability while setting and upper limit on coatng thickness. Altematvely, the chemical properties of the coating and the soluton it is in could be chosen to control the coating's affinity for the hars surface. The coatng, when applied, should be of sufficiently high molecular weight that it cannot be absorbed into the porous structure of the har extension fiber. At the same tme, this high molecular weight should not lead to such a high viscosity that applying a thin coat of coatng isnt feasible. For these reasons, it might be desirable to dilute the coating chemical in a solvent. Of course, this same solvents propeπties should be choosen so as to control the affinity between the kertan fiber's surface and the polymer sub-units or monomers. A coatng molecule should be chosen such that it forms a polymer that adheres to the keratn fiber surface, allows adhesives to hold on to it, and is not weakened by the solvents and other removal means used to detach the attachment adhesives. Such coatng-to-fiber surface adherence would likely be facilitated by using a coatng chemical capable of engaging in disulfide bonding with the keratn fiber surface. 7. Optonal: The screen conveyor belt, or any other form of conveyor, should pass through some means of removing excess coatng liquid, such as squeezing rollers or a vacuum under the screen belt The excess liquid coating should be removed and perhaps returned for reuse. The result will be individual hars evenly coated with a thin coatng. 8. Optonal: If necessary, the coated hars could have an initiator wash applied to them to harden their coatngs By initator, I am refe ng to a substance that starts the chemical hardening process, such as a free-radical that starts a polymeπzaton reaction 9. Optional. The screen conveyor should pass through some means of removing excess liquid that returns the excess initator liquid for reuse. 10. Optonal: The hars should once agan should be washed to remove any extraneous substances. 11. Optonal: Once agan, the hars should pass through a liquid removal means. However, the liquid removed is considered waste which needs to be disposed. 12. The extruded hars are brought together in bundles and then either wound up on spools for storage or sent to cutting machines that cut the continous har bundles to a length that can be used by the har attachment system. 13. Optonal: The cut bundles of har are conveyed on a belt system to a vacuum transfer belt junction. This should be a transfer unit, similar the one illustrated for use with the har extension recycling system, in FIG.86, but that has multple incoming belts but only one outgoing belt. This outgoing belt, of course, is used to fill the har extension cartndges. This modified use of several incoming belts allows several batches of har extensions to be mixed uniformly together. Each of the mixed batches should be a slightly different color or texture. This process is desirable because natural hars on a head are not all exacty the same. Thus, this mixing scheme achieves a natural looking textuπng and colonng patterns. It gives the har highlights. Of course, such a mixing system could also be supplied with hars that were previously wound up on a spool. 14. Optonal: From the vacuum transfer juncton, hars should be sent to a clip filler device This device should have some means of sensing the amount of har it puts in each clip. When one clip, or set of clips, is full the next clip, or clips, in the senes should be advanced into positon and filled •General Notes on Mechanical Fiber Quality and Manufacturing MIXING OF DIFFERENT BATCHER OF HAIR: A vacuum transfer system is not the only way of mixing multple batches of har. Several slighty different types (colors or textures) of har from different sources could be lad on a conveyor belt together. This would be form of mixing. Additonally, hairs from several different sources could simply be brought together as a single bunch before being placed into the clip cartπdges. DESIGN OF SPINNERETS AND QTEHR EXTRUSION EQUIPMENT USED: The holes of the spinneret might be cut into a non-moving plate, as is the more conventional approach. Alternatively, the spinneret holes might be configurated as notches cut into the outer surfaces of two cylinders whose outer surfaces are rotating aganst each other. The inner-surfaces of these exttusion holes would, in effect, be moving at the same speed as the keratin they're extruding. This would greaty reduce extrusion fπction on the fiber surfaces in compaπsion to holes cut ttirough the thickness of a non-moving plate. This moving cylinder approach is analogous to that used by steel manufactures to extrude beams and rails. The moving-cylinder-extrusion approach has other advantages For example, these notched cylinders can be fed not only by a softened keratn paste, but also by a flat sheet of keratn delivered by other cylinders behind them which will be cut and shaped into fibers by the notched cylinders. Additonally, the notched cylinders can be fed by extremely fat fibers or bars of keratin. One way this can be done is by placing relatively large extrusion holes behind the cylinders that would extrude thick bar-like keratn. These holes would most likely be cut through a non-moving plate in the manner of most conventonal spinneret onfices. Next, the front-most notched cylinder pars would be responsible for narrowing this bar-like keratn down to the correct diameter and shape and imparting the desired texture of the final har fibers. Alternatively, fibers extruded with a larger diameter might be brought to their correct diameter by passing through a mechanism designed to stretch them out by drawing, thereby decreasing their diameters. Also, the cylinder approach allows the cross-section of a har to vary with har length and even makes it possible to use cylinders that by themselves cut off the hars coming out of them so that they only produce hars of a certain length, rather than endless strands that need to be cut. This could be achieved by using two cylinders with discontinuous extrusion notches. Further, it would require that the rotation of these cylinders be synchronized. Such systems could produce har extensions of varying cross-section, har extensions cut to length, and even har extensions with widened ends that can serve as anchors, as those used by hair implants below the skin, or to otherwise ad later processesing or use. Using rotatng cylinders allows greater control of hair surface texture compared with conventonal spinneret holes with state edges. State-edge holes tend to smooth and polish the surfaces of the fibers they extrude. This may produce hars that are too shiny. It is true that this shine from the polishing can be reduced if the edges of the exttusion holes have small groves on their surfaces parallel to the direction of extrusion. However, this produces long contnous scratches on the fiber surface, which may not yield the precise appearance desired. Fortunately, exttustion holes made using rotating cyliners do not polish the fibers that they extrude. Further, the inner-surfaces of the cylinder notches can be textured themselves and will transfer the exact mirror image of this texture to the fiber they are extruding. This provides much greater control of fiber surface texture. Surface texture can also be roughened by rapid changes in temperature after extrusion. For example, if still relatively soft extruded keratn fiber is rapidly cooled by exposure to a very cold liquid or gas, its surface may wπnkle. This temperature-induced wπnkling can be calibrated to produce the precise surface texture desired. In contrast to fiber surface texture, there is hair texture. For example, too kinky and too stiff descnbe two undesirable types of har texture. Har texture greatly depends on the cross-secton of the har fiber. Hairs must have an ideal diameter and shape to be cosmetcally ideal. For example, hars with round cross-sectons are generally straight while those with oblong cross-sectons are curlier. Hars with overly large diameters are stff while hars with overly thin diameters are undesirably delicate and whispy. For this reason, the cross-sectonal width and shape of extruded hars must be carefully chosen and controlled. Thus, the spineret holes used will like vary in diameter and shape from perfectly round ttirough oval. Sealing the Roller Svstam In the roller system, unlike with conventional static spinneret holes, the passage that carries the fiber-forming-matenal flow from the pump to the first set of extrusion onfices cannot be one continous structure. This supply passage in the roller system must be an independent part from the rollers, so that they can rotate. However, this independent supply passage should form such a tight seal with the rollers that the fiber-forming-matenal flow does not escape to their sides, rather than being forced through their extrusion holes. This means that the supply passage must conform to the shape of the back of the roller assembly and it should probably contact the rollers using a conforming flexible matenal in order form a good seal. The rollers must be supported and dπven from at least one end. Thus, the area of seal contact should only contact the central bodies of the rollers, avoiding the more lateral support and dnving mechanisms. This is because these more lateral mechnisms, such as gears, are likely to have a more complex structure that is difficult to form a seal aganst. The rollers, such as shown in FIG. 145, should be set up in pars, as shown by FIG. 146. Each roller in a par should have concave notches, with largely semi-circular cross-sectons, carved into its surface as nngs around its circumference. The semi-circular notches on one roller should mesh with mirror-image notches on the other roller, in order to form, largely circular, spinneret extrusion holes. Each roller in a par should rotate in an opposite rotatonal direction, but in the same linear direction and speed at their (_oιnt of tangency. Usually, the linear speed should be calibrated to be the same as that of fiber extrusion. The line of tangency between each par of rollers will form a single line of fiber exttusion holes parallel to each other. Several pars of rollers in parallel may share the same fiber-forming-matenal supply passage. In this case, some effort should be made to seal the areas between roller pairs. This seal might be a flexible conforming matenal pressed up between roller pars, most likely from behind, where behind is the directon from which the fiber-forming-matenal comes. On the other hand, this seal might be achieved by placing rased πdges with largely semi-circular cross-sectons as nngs around the rollers, such as the roller shown in FIG. 144 These convex semicircular nngs will mesh with the concave semi-cirular notches on the adjacent roller in another roller par, as shown in FIG.146. This will seal notches which would have, otherwise, been left open between roller pars. Two semi-circular notchs on different roller cans should not be used as an extrusion onfice because their linear direction of movement is backwards and aganst extruston flow. Any fiber extruded from such a hole would expeπence a rubbing force on its surface opposite to its direction of extrusion. However, the entire purpose of using rollers is to reduce the rubbing an extruded fiber expenences. Entirely Mechanical Kneeriing Svstem Although less likely to produce the highest quality of artificial hair fibers, solely mechanical methods that extrude keratin without chemcially dissolving it first might be practcal. Such a system might first unify individual pieces of keratn such as fβatners or hars into a single large object It might do this by putting them under enormous pressure by using a means such as a piston in a cylinder It might further homogenize this large keratinous object by kneeding it It might kneed by using a rotational means that pulls and pushs on the keratinous object Alternatively, kneeding might be achieved by extruding the keratin through multiple pathways that intersect with each other Homogenizaton can also be achieved by first gπnding the keratn into a fine powder before putting it under mechanical pressure FIBER COMPOSITIONS AND COATINGS The reason for a semi-permable coating around the har shaft is largely to control the moisture level in the har Adequate moisture in the har helps keep the har soft This is largely how conditioners work to keep hars soft However conditioners are not permenately polymeπzed around hair shafts A moisture ba er does not just keep the hair soft by allowing the har to retain a minimum amount of moisture It may also prevent the har from absorbing too much moisture especially on humid days Hars with too much moisture might be too soft and limp, or might become frizzy In short the coatng forms an artifical protective cuticle around the extruded keratin shaft If possible, it would be beneficial to make this protective barner Ultra Violet impermeable Also this barner should protect aganst chemcials and ions by keeping them from being absorbed by the keratn protein Conceivably, this coatng could even increase the shine of a keratin fiber's surface It should not be such a perfect ba er that no water can enter or exit the hair If this were the case the har might behave as it were a conventonal plastc In which case, water could not be used to influence the styling of such hars HAIR COATINGS CAN BE APPLIED AT THE FACTORY TO ARTIFICIAL HAIRS OR THEY TYPE USED FOR CROSS-SECTIONAL RESHAPING PROCESS IN A SALON Certain fiber compositons make protectve coatngs less necessary These compositons are less vulnerable to drying and becoming bntte and to absorbing undesirable substances from the environment than is most har keratn They accomplish this by being allied with synthetc non-ammo acid substances This might mean that the keratn protein is mixed with another substance such as a plastcizer This mixed substance may help soften the fiber, or impede the entrance and exit of all substances including water Fibers composed of such substances might have a lower water content than would expected with pure keratn Nevertheless, the mixed in plastcizer will keep them soft Furtherstill, such fibers would be expected to have a higher water content than conventional plastic fibers would This would allow harstyling The mixed-m substance may or may not itself be a polymer and may or may not be chemcially cross-linked to the keratin or keratin-like matenal Keratin and keratin-like mateπals maybe be made softer and less vulnerable in ways other than infusing a plastcizer into them For example, the keratn-like polymer Chans can themselves be a co-polymer with a non-amino-acid-based monomer unit in them Keratin-like sub-chans joined with urettiane sub-chains is such an example The presence of urettiane sub-chains will both soften the fibers and reduce their vulnerablity to the environment Although synthetc hars should generally be formed from substances that behave like keratn true keratn is not necessariy the only option We use the term keratin-like to refer to substances that behave like keratin Most substance that are keratin-like will be expected to have a chemical structure similar to keratin This includes vaπous proteins and poly-ammo acids Proteins are mtπcate sequences of am o acids arranged in order by the design of nature Poly-ammo acids are long polymers of ammo acid units with a random order, determined only by the monomer units present duπng polymeπzaton Poly-ammo acids may be composed entrely of one type of ammo acid or several types of ammo acids Below, are several types of keratn-like chemical compostions that can be used to manufacture artificial hairs (specifically entre hair fibers! -Pure thiol (or other disulfide-bond breaking chemcial) dissolved keratn -Keratn proteins broken down into protein sub-chains (for example by hydrolysis) which are then converted to reactive entities (for example, acid anhydπds or chloπdes) that are allowed to react together to reform long structural keratin-like molecules —Where these keratin protein sub-chains are reacted together with non-ammo acid based monomers or sub-chain units to form a co-polymer — Where the non-amino-acid-based entity is one or more of the following urettiane monomer, short poly-urethane chan, or one of the subcomponents used in the manufacture of the urettiane monomer such as an isocyanate or polyol or any synthetic monomer or sub-chan capable of forming a peptide bond-like polyols or any synthetic monomer or sub-chain capable of forming a peptide bonds, for example, like vaπous polyols —Where these keratin protein sub-chans are reacted together with ammo-acid based monomers or sub-chain units to form a co-polymer -Keratin (or ketein-like) molecule with synthetic polymer (or other structurally compatible non-keratin substance) mechanically mixed in with it, perhaps to serve as a plasticizer or change physical properties of the mixture like water permeability —Where said synthetic polymer (or non-keratin substance) is poly-urethane —Where sad synthetic polymer is a poly-ammo acid —Where said synthetic polymer is chemically cross-linked to the the keratin or keratin-like mateπal — Where this cnemcial cross-linking is done through disulfide bonds -Poly-ammo acid polymer with synthetc polymer mixed in with it for example to serve as a plastcizer or change one or more physical qualities —Where sad synthetic polymer is poly-urethane —Where sad synthetc polymer is chemically cross-linked to the the poly-ammo acid polymer — Where this chemcial cross-linking is done through disulfide bonds -Poly-amino acid and non-ammo acid enttes reacted together as a copolymer —Where the non-amino-acid-based entty is one or more of the following urettiane monomer, short poly-urethane chan, or one of the subcomponents used in the manufacture of the urettiane monomer such as an isocyanate or polyol or any synthetc monomer or sub-chan capable of forming a peptide bonds, for example, like vaπous polyols There are several types of chemicals compositions that can be used to serve as protectve coatngs around har fibers, regardless of whether said fibers are artificial or natural harsi These coatnos can also be used for cross-sectonal reshaping of the size and shape of individual scalp hair diameters.l. -Any of the aboved descπbed compositions for manufactunng fibers can be applied for use as fiber/har coatings as well in addition to the below -Extruded keratin (or keratin-like matenal) or natural hair coated with any of the following -A different type of keratn dissolved by disufiding-boπd breaking chemicals (for example, a type that has a greater degree of disulfide cross linking) -A poly-ammo acid -A poly-ammo acid urettiane co-polymer -Poly-ammo acid and non-ammo acid entities together as a copolymer —Where the non-amino-acid-based entty is one or more of the following urettiane monomer, short poly-urethane chan or one of the subcomponents used in the manufacture of the urettiane monomer such as an isocyanate or polyol or any synthetc monomer or sub-chan capable of forming a peptde bond-like, for example, like vaπous polyols -Keratn (or keratin-like mateπal) with a non-amino-acid-based polymer mixed in with it such as to serve as a synthetic plastcizer —Where sad synthetc polymer is chemically cross-linked to the the keratn or keratn-like polymer — Where this chemcial cross-linking is done through disulfide bonds -A poly-amino acid with with a non-amino-acid-based polymer mixed in it such as to serve as a synthetc plastcizer —Where sad synthetic polymer is chemically cross-linked to the the poly-amino acid polymer — Where this chemcial cross-linking is done through disulfide bonds Hair-Fiber Designs that Ensure Strong Attachment to Scalp Hairs USE OF SLIPPERY COATINGS. Although the most obvious way of ensunng that har extensions reman attached to scalp hairs is using the strongest possible adhesive, another way is make the surface of the attached har extension slippener If the surface of a har extension is slippery, it becomes much more difficult to grasp and pull firmly enough that its attachment will fail. For this reason, coatng fibers with a low coefticent of fπcton substance such as Teflon is desirable. However, using such a coating might have disadvantages For example, the coating might retard the entrance and exit of moisture to such a degree that the har cannot be styled. Furtherstll, such a coatng might have such a great non-stck effect that adhesive will not work effectvely on it To alleviate these disadvantages, the coating could be applied in a pattern so that it does not coat the entre surface of the fiber. This will allow moisture exchange and adhesive contact with the uncoated areas of fiber surface. In order to maintain the coating's low-coeffiαent-of- fπcrton effect, the coating thickness to spacing between coated areas ratio should be high. This way fingers that grasp the fiber will only come in contact with the slippery coating, not the less slippery uncoated areas of the fiber. In order to produce tt e interrupted coating pattem on the fibers, some pnnting means needs to be used This can involve any type of pπnting technology, or other analogous pattern-forming technology, available mduding laser pπnter, ink jet pnnter, and offset press technologies For example, the fibers could be run between flexible rubber cylinders that pπnt a pattern on them. This pattern can be the coatng resin itself which will subsequenty be cured by some means such as heat Altematvely, this pattem could be a masking substance with the purpose of preventng the coating resin from sticking to areas where it has been applied. Of course, after this masking substance, the coating resin would be subsequently applied and cured, and then the masking substance itself would be removed. In a similar fashion, entre fibers could be coated and then areas of the coatng could be removed with a directed energy source, such as a laser. USING NOTCHES AND HOLES THROUGH HAIR FIBERS. Another way of keeping har extensions more firmly attached is to give their adhesive a structure that is most ideal for it to adhere. Although there are adhesives that can effectvely adhere two smooth fiber's surfaces to each other, if the surfaces were made more porous, the adhesives would work even better. One way of making a har extension surface more porous is to cut holes or notches in it. A possible way to do this is to run the hair fiber ttirough a hole to support and steady it while cutting holes in it with a laser or other analogous focused-energy device. Possibly, even a preciesly manufactured mechanical implement could be advanced into the har in order to notch it or make small noles through it Such a mechanical device might take the form of a pmcher that grasps the har from two opposing directons simultaneously in order to steady it Regardless ot whether directed energy or a mechanical means is used, this fiber perforaton means might be used shortly after the hair fiber has been extruded or the hair fiber has been unwound from a storage spool Whether directed energy or mechanical, the perforaton means is likely configured as a tned-fork In the case of a directed energy tned-fork, for a visual analogy, refer to the previously descnbed fork-like pπsm that uses internal reflection to distπbute U.V. light in order to cure adhesive . In the case of a mechanical tned-fork, for a visual analogy, refer to just about any of the moving har handling tnes previously descirbed for use in attachment stack, such as -Sorting of natural hair to packages as end product Ways of son.no hair extensions into groups of eoual length: Although it is desirable to use man-made har, har fibers obtained from humans or animal sources is an opton. The basic mechanisms previously descπbed for use in the salon-based har extension recycling system can also be used in a factory that fills har extension clip cartndges with human har. Har could be cut off the head using a mechanism similar to the remover, but instead of applying solvent to the head, it would cut the hars, by having cutting shears incorporated into the remover as a structural layer. The first transport belts would take the hars from the remover to a mechanism similar to the har extension recycling system As descπbed before, this system would line the har extension tips up in one direction such that the conveyor belts are grasping the hairs all at an equal distance from their tips. At this point, the hars could be fed into clip cartπdges, as in the previously descπbed salon veπsion of the har recycling system. However, head hars are a mixture of many lengths, and it might be desirable to sort them by length first Sorting Hars bv Length: The following procedure could be used to sort hars by length. Once hars are grasped at an equal distance from their tips by a grasping conveyor system, introduce a vacuum source approximately in line with the grasping conveyor, positioned on the same side of the conveyor as the vaπable hair lengths, and at a distance greater than the length of the very longest hair. This vacuum will pull all the conveyor- held hars largely straght Between the vacuum source and this first grasping coveyor, place a second grasping conveyor system Only the longest hars will be able to reach this second conveyor system If necessary, place funneling guides in front of this second conveyor system in order to guide hars into it The longest hars are now held by two conveyor systems. By making the second conveyor system grab each hair tighter than the first one and then by making it take a diversionary course away from the first one, the longest hars will earned away by the second conveyor system, and the shortest hars will reman in the first conveyor system. For this reason, I call the second conveyor system the sorting conveyor system. Hars of increasingly shorter length can be sorted out by running the first conveyor system through a senes stages that repeat this process However, in each progressive stage, the sorting conveyor system should be placed closer to the first conveyor system Thus, shorter and shorter hars will be obtained from each stage The end result is hars sorted by length. When speaking of a grasping conveyor system, it should be understood to mean any means capable of rotary or recipor eating motion and pinching hars. Likewise, the vacuum source should be ttiought of as a har tensionmg means. Any other force capable of har tensionmg might be used. For example, blown ar cunents, static electncity, or a mechanical means that gentely pinches or rubs the hars moving them away from the har grasping conveyor are other optons. Such a mechanical system is similar to the type previously descnbed for use as a straightener for the attachment stack. Such a sorting system might be used as an industnal method of harvesting real human har cut from human heads. Alternatively, it might be incorporated into the salon-based har recycling unit. In this second configuration, it would serve to recycle only sufficiently long hars while discarding excessively short natural hars. Wavs of Filling Hair Extension Clip Cartπdges: Regardless of how har extensions are obtained, they should be put into clip cartπdges. Usually, instead of directly filling the cartndges used by the attachment stack, a disposable introduction cartπdge, as shown in FIG.99, will be filled at the factory However, the following systems for filling clip cartndges work for both types of clip cartrdiges, disposable introduction and small attachment stack-ready. If the har extensions are man-made, this will usually mean that they are hundreds or thousands of feet long This will allow cartπdges to be filled in a continous manner Whether directly obtained from the extrusion spmerets or first rolled up on spools, the terminal ends of these man-made har extenion fibers should be brought together in bunches large enough to fill each clip entrely. There should be as many of these bunches as there are clips in a batch of clip cartndges that need to be filled. These bunches should be held seperate from each other. Ideally, whatever seperates these bunches should have a similar shape, width and spacing as the hair-holding inteπor channels of the dips of clip cartndges This is to say that it should be composed of many seperate parallel har-holdmg channels, and all said channels should supeπmpose congruenty on those of several clip cartridges arranged in a straight line Probably, the hair-holding channels of this bunch- seperating means should be just slighty wider than the inteπors of the clips of the cartπdges because they should not grasp the hair extensions as tghty as sad dips. This bunch-seperatng means can be open on one side or closed on all sides. The bunch-seperatng means should be used to help fill the clip cartndges in the following manner. First, a desired length of har should be pulled through the bunch-seperatng means. Next, the clip cartndges should be aligned with bunch-seperating means, if they are not already. The clip cartndges and bunch-seperating means can approach each other from below or above, their front or their backs Naturally, there should be some fixture that holds the cartndges and helps faciliate this alignment Once aligned with the bunch-seperatng means, the clips of the clip cartndges will, in effect, be filled with hair extensions. Finally, a cutting means should cut the har extensions at a very short distance above the clips of the clip cartπdges. These filled clip cartndges can now be moved away, and a new group of empty clip cartndges can be brought in to take their place. Ideally, it would be fine for the empty clip cartπdges to be aligned with the bunch-seperating means before the har extensions are pulled through them. In order for the above system to function most effectively, it should be configured as follows- The clip cartndges should be placed below the bunch-seperating means. (Below meaning downline with respect to the direction that the har extensions are pulled from their source.) The cutting means should be placed between the bunch-seperating means and the clip cartπdges. Thus, after cutting, the bunch- seperating means will still be threaded with har bunches. This will allow a device to pinch the bunch tips extending from the bunch-seperatng means and pull them further through This pinch-and-pull means itself is likely to have hair-holding channels that align congruenty with those of the bunch-seperating means and dip cartπdges. As such, it might be configured as two layers with channels of a similar shape, width, and spacing as those of ttie bunch-seperatng means In order to pinch har bunches, one or both of these two layers could slide relatve to each ottier in order to narrow their hair-pinching channels. This pinch-and-pull means could continue to pinch a batch of bunches until after they have been cut. This would provide tension on tne har extensions duπng both cartndge filling and har extension cutting Ideally, the pinch-and-pull means should be formed out of or coated with a high coefficient of fπαton matenal such as silicone rubber. Sad bunch-seperatng means could itself be configured as two layers with pinching capability. If so, the bunch-seperating means could pinch har bunches to ad in steadying them dunng cartndge filling or hair extension cutting, but release this pinch when the filled clip cartndges are removed. Regardless of how the clip cartndges are filled, ttney can be conveyed into the positon where they are to be filled in vaπous ways. In the case of disposable introduction clip cartndges, they could be fed into position as a continous web. After filling, this continous web coulcf be broken or cut into individual disposable introduction clip cartπdges, such as the one illustrated by FIG.99 This web might be wound into a coil This web might be conveyed by gear-like interlock with some rotatng or reciponcatng part For example, refemng to FIG. 99, the holes at the lateral edges of each introduction cartndge could be engaged by cogs in a wheel If individual attachment stack-ready cartndges are used, they should be loaded onto some holding means that moves them into positon for filling. Regardless of the type of clip cartndges used, they have to be aligned with the bunch-seperating means in order to get filled. This can happen in a vanety of ways. The clip cartπdges and their holding means can move towards the bunch seperating means; the bunch-seperatng means, the pinch-and-pull means, and the cutting means can move together as a unit towards the clip cartπdges, a combiaton of these two events can occur. INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY We expect that this invention will be applied to the hair-care industry as a professional product used in hair salons, rather than being used as a home product. There are two reasons for this. First, because of the relative complexity of this family of devices, it is most advisable for them to be operated by highly trained users. Second, since these systems are much more elaborate than any hair-care device up to this time, they will be correspondingly more expensive to manufacture. Thus, they ideally should be used in a professional setting where their higher cost can be spread out over many users. The operation of this device by a hairstylist has already been described in the above description. However, this not to say units for home use couldn't be economically implemented. We expect the various embodiments of this system to operate fast enough that they can process an entire human head of hair in a matter of minutes.

Claims: Claims 1. A hair processing device which isolates one or a small number of human-body-attached hairs between projections from said device projecting into a mass of body-attached hairs so that these isolated hairs can have further processing performed on them in isolation. 2. As in 1 , where said projections are on tine-assemblies 3. As in 2, where some said projections form stationary hair channels between them. 4. As in 2, where said projections are moving hair handlers which are configured by their shape and movement pattern to push hairs in desired directions and into desired positions. 5. As in 1 , where further processing includes attaching one or more hair extensions to said isolated hairs 6. As in 1 , where further processing includes drawing said isolated hairs through orifices which change said hairs' cross-sectional shape by cutting portions of said hair's cross-sectional shape away 7. As in 1 , where further processing includes drawing said isolated hairs through orifices which apply a beneficial coating to said isolated hairs. 8. As in 7, where said beneficial coating is a structural, perhaps keratin-like material, capable of bonding to the external surfurace of a hair, thereby, changing said hair's cross-sectional shape. 9. As in 7, where said beneficial coating is a colorant. 10. As in 1 , where further processing is simply holding hairs out of the way of a implant needle. 11. As in 1 , where further processing includes cutting the isolated hairs to a specific length. 12. Hairtensioning straightening means that holds hairs more perpendicular to the scalp 13. As in 12, except it works by pinching or otherwise engaging hair 14. Means of preventing hair-buildup in front of an obstacle associated with an advancing processing system. 15. As in 14, where a bend-under means is used 16. Means of application of a hair perming or relaxing chemical followed by a coating which both holds said chemcial to hair and can be used to as a temporary fixation means during chemical processing, in place of other fixation means such as hair curlers. 17. Means of manufacturing artificial hair by extruding keratin or keratin-like materials

Inventors: KING CHRISTOPHER R, KING, CHRISTOPHER, R.
Applicants: KING CHRISTOPHER R, KING, CHRISTOPHER, R.
Application year: 1998
Main classification: A61K
IPC codes: A41G3, A41G5, A45C3, A45D19, A45D24, B26B13, B26B19